Professional Documents
Culture Documents
INDIC100高压发生器英文维修手册 SM
INDIC100高压发生器英文维修手册 SM
INDIC100高压发生器英文维修手册 SM
SERVICE MANUAL
PREPARED BY:
COMMUNICATIONS & POWER INDUSTRIES
45 RIVER DRIVE
GEORGETOWN, ONTARIO, CANADA, L7G 2J4
TELEPHONE: (905) 877-0161
SERVICE
AND
INSTALLATION
MANUAL
P.N. #740855
PRE-INSTALLATION
CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING
ACCEPTANCE TEST
TROUBLESHOOTING
REGULAR MAINTENANCE
THEORY OF OPERATION
SPARES
SCHEMATICS
Ch # 740895-00
Rev. A
Page 0-1
Page 0-2
Rev. A
Ch # 740895-00
Pre-installation
CHAPTER 1
PRE-INSTALLATION
1.0
INTRODUCTION
1.1
Purpose
This manual applies to the Indico 100 family of generators and provides instructions for the installation
and maintenance of all models of that generator.
This Chapter contains the following sections.
SECTION
1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
TITLE
Introduction
Safety
Preparing for installation
Compatibility listing
Generator layout and Major Components
Ch # 740895-01
Rev. A
Page 1-1
1 Pre-installation
Page 1-2
Rev. A
Ch # 740895-01
Introduction
1A
CHAPTER 1 SECTION 1A
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS:
Section
Title
1A.1.0 INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................................................................1A-2
1A.1.1 Purpose..................................................................................................................................................1A-2
1A.2.0 GENERATOR DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................................1A-2
1A.3.0 PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS..................................................................................................................1A-3
1A.4.0 APPLICATIONS.........................................................................................................................................1A-5
1A.5.0 FEATURES................................................................................................................................................1A-5
1A.6.0 ROTOR CONTROL ...................................................................................................................................1A-6
1A.7.0 AUXILIARY POWER OUTPUTS ...............................................................................................................1A-6
1A.8.0 SYSTEM DOCUMENTATION ...................................................................................................................1A-6
1A.9.0 REGULATORIES AND DESIGN STANDARDS........................................................................................1A-7
1A.9.1 Environmental Specifications.................................................................................................................1A-7
1A.9.2 Applicable Standards .............................................................................................................................1A-7
1A.9.3 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) ..................................................................................................1A-11
1A.10.0 TECHNIQUE FACTORS DEFINITIONS ..............................................................................................1A-11
Ch # 740904-00
Rev. L
Page 1A-1
1A
Introduction
1A.1.0 INTRODUCTION
1A.1.1 Purpose
This manual provides instructions for the installation and service of Millenia and Indico 100 X-ray generators.
This section of the manual applies to the Millenia and Indico 100 family of X-ray generators. Some of the
sections / chapters in the balance of this manual are common to Millenia and Indico 100 X-ray generators;
other sections / chapters are unique to each generator series.
Page 1A-2
Rev. L
Ch # 740904-00
Introduction
1A
Ch # 740904-00
Rev. L
Page 1A-3
1A
Introduction
18 (457)
*
TOP
ANCHORING PLATES
4 PLACES
16.1 (408)
RIGHT SIDE
12.3 (313)
12.3 (313)
4.5 (114)
REAR
16.4
(417)
3.7
(94)
14.3
(363)
16.4 (417)
MAXIMUM
10.9
(277)
3.7
(94)
6.5 (164)
24.6 (626)
39.7 (1008)
FRONT
16.6 (422)
3.0 (76)
38.7 (984)
48.7 (1237)
9 (229)
18.1 (459)
R&F CONSOLE
RAD CONSOLE
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES (MM)
TOUCH SCREEN
CONSOLE
FIGURE 1A-1 SHOWS THE OUTLINE FOR THE 23 X 56 (CM) CONSOLE. THIS FIGURE SHOWS THE OUTLINE FOR THE
31 X 42 (CM) INDICO 100 R&F CONSOLE, THE INDICO 100 RAD-ONLY CONSOLE, AND THE TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLE.
AN OPTIONAL LINE-ADJUSTING TRANSFORMER IS AVAILABLE THAT MOUNTS ON THE BOTTOM OF THE GENERATOR
CABINET. THIS TRANSFORMER HAS THE SAME WIDTH AND DEPTH AS THE GENERATOR CABINET, AND A HEIGHT OF
APPROXIMATELY 8.1 INCHES (206 mm).
IN_OL.CDR
Page 1A-4
Rev. L
Ch # 740904-00
Introduction
1A
1A.4.0 APPLICATIONS
RAD SYSTEMS:
Bucky table, tabletop and off-table radiography.
Vertical bucky/cassette radiography.
Conventional tomography.
R&F SYSTEMS
Fluoroscopic and spot film applications.
Tomography with conventional and/or remote R&F tables.
Optional digital compatible.
Optional high-level fluoro for therapy simulators (Indico 100).
1A.5.0 FEATURES
Refer to the compatibility statement / product description (end of section 1D) for compatibility and
features of this specific generator.
Ch # 740904-00
Rev. L
Page 1A-5
1A
Introduction
24 VDC, 4 Amp.
120 VAC, 2.5 Amp.
240 VAC, 1.5 Amp.
2.5 AMPS IS AVAILABLE AT 120 VAC OR 1.5 AMPS IS AVAILABLE AT 240 VAC, BUT BOTH ARE
NOT AVAILABLE SIMULTANEOUSLY.
The above voltage sources are not compatible with:
Collimator lamps (24 VDC 150 watts). These lamps exceed the 4 Amp rating of the 24 VDC supply.
Fluorescent lamps. These have high starting currents and generate transients when the tube strikes.
Some inductive loads may cause difficulties (some motors and solenoids).
Page 1A-6
Operators manual.
Service and installation manual.
Insert and application notes as required.
Rev. L
Ch # 740904-00
Introduction
1A
10 to 40 C
30 to 75%
500 to 1060 hPa (375 to 795 mm Hg)
-20 to 70 C
10 to 95%, including condensation
500 to 1060 hPa (375 to 795 mm Hg)
FDA Center for Devices & Radiological Health (CDRH) - 21 CFR title 21 subchapter J (USA).
Ch # 740904-00
Rev. L
Page 1A-7
1A
Introduction
Emissions test
Compliance
RF emissions
CISPR 11
Group 1
RF emissions
CISPR 11
Class A
(The VZW2926
and VZW2930
series of X-ray
generators in
combination with
shielded location)
Not Applicable
Page 1A-8
Rev. L
Ch # 740904-00
Introduction
1A
Immunity
test
IEC 60601
test level
Compliance
level
Electromagnetic environment
guidance
Electrostatic
discharge (ESD)
IEC 61000-4-2
Electrical fast
transient/burst
IEC 61000-4-4
6 kV contact
8 kV air
6 kV contact
8 kV air
2 kV for power
supply lines
1 kV for
input/output lines
1 kV differential
mode
2 kV common
mode
< 5 % UT
(> 95 % dip in UT)
for 0.5 cycle
2 kV for power
supply lines
1 kV for
input/output lines
1 kV differential
mode
2 kV common
mode
< 5 % UT
(> 95 % dip in UT)
for 0.5 cycle
40 % UT
(60 % dip in UT)
for 5 cycles
40 % UT
(60 % dip in UT)
for 5 cycles
70 % UT
(30 % dip in UT)
70 % UT
(30 % dip in UT)
< 5 % UT
(> 95 % dip in UT)
for 5 s
3 A/m
< 5 % UT
(> 95 % dip in UT)
for 5 s
3 A/m
Surge
IEC 61000-4-5
Voltage dips,
short interruption,
and voltage
variations on
power supply
input lines
IEC 60601-4-11
Power frequency
Power frequency magnetic fields should be at
(50/60 Hz)
levels characteristic of a typical location in a
typical commercial or hospital environment
IEC 61000-4-8
NOTE: UT is the A.C. mains voltage prior to application of the test level.
Ch # 740904-00
Rev. L
Page 1A-9
1A
Introduction
Immunity
test
IEC 60601
test level
Compliance
level
Conducted RF
IEC 61000-4-6
3 Vrms
150 kHz to
80MHz
3 Vrms
150 kHz to
80MHz
Radiated RF
IEC 61000-4-3
3 V/m
80MHz to 2.5
GHz
3 V/m
80MHz to 2.5
GHz
NOTE 1 These guidelines may not apply all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption
and reflection from structures, objects and people.
NOTE 2 It is essential that the actual shielding effectiveness and filter attenuation of the shielded location be
verified to assure that they meet the minimum specification.
a
Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) telephones and
land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be predicted
theoretically with accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an
electromagnetic site survey should be considered. If the measured field strength in the location in which the
VZW2926 or VZW2930 series of X-ray generators is used exceeds the applicable RF compliance level
above, the X-ray generator should be observed to verify normal operation. If abnormal performance is
observed, additional measures may be necessary, such as re-orienting or relocating the X-ray generator.
Page 1A-10
Rev. L
Ch # 740904-00
Introduction
1A
KV:
TIME:
mA:
mAs
Telephone:
(905) 877-0161
Fax:
(905) 877-8320
Attention: Customer Support Department
E-mail:
marketing@cmp.cpii.com
Attention: Customer Support Department
Ch # 740904-00
Rev. L
Page 1A-11
1A
Introduction
Page 1A-12
Rev. L
Ch # 740904-00
Safety
1B
CHAPTER 1 SECTION 1B
SAFETY
CONTENTS:
Section
Title
1B.1.0 INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................................................................1B-2
1B.2.0 SAFETY AND WARNING SYMBOLS .......................................................................................................1B-2
1B.3.0 SAFETY NOTICES AND WARNINGS ......................................................................................................1B-2
1B.4.0 SAFETY WARNING LABELS - INTRODUCTION.....................................................................................1B-4
1B.4.1 Safety Warning Labels - Organization ...................................................................................................1B-5
1B.5.0 SAFETY LABELS / NOTICES COMMON TO MILLENIA AND INDICO 100 ............................................1B-5
1B.5.1 Caution HV Behind Cover Label............................................................................................................1B-5
1B.5.2 Weight Label ..........................................................................................................................................1B-6
1B.5.3 DC Bus Label .........................................................................................................................................1B-6
1B.5.4 Console CPU Board / Console Board....................................................................................................1B-7
1B.5.5 Generator Interface Board .....................................................................................................................1B-7
1B.5.6 Room Interface Board............................................................................................................................1B-7
1B.5.7 AEC Board .............................................................................................................................................1B-7
1B.5.8 Power Input Board .................................................................................................................................1B-7
1B.5.9 Dual Speed Starter Board......................................................................................................................1B-8
1B.6.0 SAFETY LABELS / NOTICES UNIQUE TO MILLENIA ............................................................................1B-8
1B.6.1 HT Tank - Transformer Terminals Label................................................................................................1B-8
1B.6.2 Live Mains / Fuses / Ground Label ........................................................................................................1B-9
1B.6.3 Live Mains / Fuses Label .......................................................................................................................1B-9
1B.6.4 Caution - Hazardous Voltages Label ...................................................................................................1B-10
1B.6.5 Warning / Caution / Caution Label.......................................................................................................1B-11
1B.6.6 Tank Vent Label ...................................................................................................................................1B-11
1B.6.7 mA Test Jacks Label............................................................................................................................1B-12
1B.6.8 mA test Jacks.......................................................................................................................................1B-12
1B.6.9 F3 (Auxiliary Power Fuseblock) ...........................................................................................................1B-12
1B.7.0 SAFETY LABELS / NOTICES UNIQUE TO INDICO 100 .......................................................................1B-12
1B.7.1 Caution HV Exposed Label..................................................................................................................1B-12
1B.7.2 Caution HV Label.................................................................................................................................1B-13
1B.7.3 Danger HV Label .................................................................................................................................1B-13
1B.7.4 High Voltage Warning Label ................................................................................................................1B-13
1B.7.5 HT Tank - Transformer Terminals .......................................................................................................1B-14
1B.7.6 Danger High Tension ...........................................................................................................................1B-14
1B.7.7 F1 (Primary of Auxiliary Transformer)..................................................................................................1B-14
Ch # 740904-01
Rev. H
Page 1B-1
1B
Safety
1B.1.0 INTRODUCTION
This section contains important safety warnings and safety information required for installing and
servicing the generator.
WARNING
Page 1B-2
Rev. H
Ch # 740904-01
Safety
1B
THIS X-RAY UNIT MAY BE DANGEROUS TO PATIENT AND OPERATOR UNLESS SAFE
EXPOSURE FACTORS AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS ARE OBSERVED.
X-ray radiation exposure may be damaging to health, with some effects being cumulative and extending
over periods of many months or even years. Operators and service personnel should avoid any
exposure to the primary beam and take protective measures to safeguard against scatter radiation.
Scatter radiation is caused by any object in the path of the primary beam and may be of equal or less
intensity than the primary beam that exposes the film.
No practical design can incorporate complete protection for operators or service personnel who do not
take adequate safety precautions. Only authorized and properly trained service and operating
personnel should be allowed to work with this X-ray generator equipment. The appropriate
personnel must be made aware of the inherent dangers associated with the servicing of high voltage
equipment and the danger of excessive exposure to X-ray radiation during system operation.
CAUTION:
DO NOT EXCEED THE TUBE MAXIMUM OPERATING LIMITS. INTENDED LIFE AND
RELIABILITY WILL NOT BE OBTAINED UNLESS GENERATORS ARE OPERATED WITHIN
PUBLISHED SPECIFICATIONS.
Ch # 740904-01
Rev. H
Page 1B-3
1B
Safety
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES EXIST INSIDE THE GENERATOR WHENEVER THE MAIN POWER
DISCONNECT IS SWITCHED ON. THOSE AREAS INCLUDE THE MAIN FUSEHOLDER AND
ASSOCIATED CIRCUITS IN THE HV POWER SUPPLY, PORTIONS OF THE GENERATOR
INTERFACE BOARD IN THE UPPER PORTION OF THE GENERATOR (MILLENIA AND
INDICO 100), AND THE TERMINALS ON THE LINE ADJUSTING TRANSFORMER IN THE
LOWER GENERATOR CABINET IF FITTED (MILLENIA ONLY).
THE CONSOLE ON/OFF SWITCH DOES NOT DISCONNECT THE MAIN POWER FROM THE
ABOVE AREAS INSIDE THE GENERATOR.
THE BUS CAPACITORS, LOCATED IN THE POWER SUPPLY PRESENT A SAFETY
HAZARD FOR AT LEAST 5 MINUTES AFTER THE POWER HAS BEEN REMOVED FROM
THE UNIT. CHECK THAT THESE CAPACITORS ARE DISCHARGED BEFORE SERVICING
THE GENERATOR.
THESE LABELS AND WARNINGS ARE LOCATED TO ALERT SERVICE PERSONNEL THAT
SERIOUS INJURY WILL RESULT IF THE HAZARD IDENTIFIED IS IGNORED.
NOTE:
WARNING:
SWITCH OFF THE MAIN POWER DISCONNECT AND ALLOW SUFFICIENT TIME FOR ALL
CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE BEFORE REMOVING ANY COVERS OR OPENING ANY
SERVICE DOOR.
WARNING:
REPLACE ALL FUSES IN THIS GENERATOR WITH THE SAME TYPE AND
RATING.
This information is provided to help you establish safe operating conditions for both you and your CPI Xray generator. Do not operate this X-ray generator except in accordance with these precautions, and any
additional information provided by the X-ray generator manufacturer and/or competent safety authorities.
Page 1B-4
Rev. H
Ch # 740904-01
Safety
1B
MILLENIA:
This label is attached to a cover over the main power contactor. This area will have
mains voltage applied as long as the main disconnect is switched on.
MILLENIA:
This label is attached to a cover over the resonant circuit and low speed starter
components if a low speed starter is fitted. The resonant components (resonant
capacitors etc) may be energized for 5 minutes after the console is switched off, or the
main disconnect is switched off.
If a low speed starter is fitted, the associated components will have up to 240
VAC applied when the console is switched on.
MILLENIA:
This label is attached to each of the access panels on the rear of the generator. The high
voltage hazards behind these panels is similar to that behind the upper and lower
entrance doors, see 1B.7.4.
MILLENIA:
This label is attached to a cover over the line adjusting transformer (if fitted). The
terminals on the transformer will have mains voltage applied as long as the main
disconnect is switched on. If access to the transformer connections is needed, SWITCH
OFF THE MAIN DISCONNECT FIRST.
INDICO 100:
This label is attached to a cover over the inverter board(s). The inverter assembly is
connected to the main DC bus and will have high voltage applied at all times that the
generator is switched on. This assembly will remain energized for 5 minutes after the
generator is switched off, or the main disconnect is switched off.
INDICO 100:
This label is attached to a cover over the main input fuses on the power input board. This
area will have mains voltage applied as long as the main disconnect is switched on.
Ch # 740904-01
Rev. H
Page 1B-5
1B
Safety
MILLENIA:
This label is attached to the upper and lower generator cabinets and to the HT oil tank
and states the approximate weight of each of the generator sections and of the HT oil
tank. This label cautions against attempting to lift those assemblies without proper
assistance.
INDICO 100:
This label is attached to the lower generator cabinet and to the HT oil tank and states the
approximate weight of the lower generator cabinet and of the HT oil tank. This label
cautions against attempting to lift those assemblies without proper assistance.
MILLENIA:
This label is attached to a cover over the DC bus capacitors. These capacitors will hold a
lethal charge for 5 minutes after the console is switched off, or the main disconnect is
switched off. Do not remove the cover for a minimum of 5 minutes after the power has
been switched off.
INDICO 100:
This label is attached to the removable panels on the lower (power supply) cabinet. The
internal capacitors will hold a lethal charge for 5 minutes after the console is switched off,
or the main disconnect is switched off. Do not remove the cover for a minimum of 5
minutes after the power has been switched off.
WARNING:
Page 1B-6
WAIT A MINIMUM OF 5 MINUTES AFTER THE INPUT MAINS POWER HAS BEEN REMOVED
BEFORE REMOVING ANY COVERS OR ACCESS PANELS. ONCE THE COVER(S) /
PANEL(S) ARE REMOVED CHECK THAT THE VOLTAGE ACROSS THE DC BUS
CAPACITORS IS LESS THAN 48 VDC BEFORE SERVICING.
Rev. H
Ch # 740904-01
Safety
1B
Ch # 740904-01
Rev. H
Page 1B-7
1B
Safety
This label indicates that if the power supply inverter leads that attach to the high tension transformer
primary terminals are not connected the generator must not be energized.
This label also cautions against over tightening the nuts on the transformer feedthrough terminals
mentioned in the above paragraph.
Page 1B-8
Rev. H
Ch # 740904-01
Safety
1B
This label is attached to a cover over the main fuse block and fuses. This area will have mains voltage
applied as long as the main disconnect is switched on. The main system ground is also located behind
this cover.
This label is attached to a cover over the fuse block and fuses for the room interface transformer. This
area will have mains voltage applied as long as the main disconnect is switched on.
Ch # 740904-01
Rev. H
Page 1B-9
1B
Safety
CAUTION
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES ARE
PRESENT INSIDE THE CABINET
FOR A PERIOD OF FIVE (5)
MINUTES AFTER DE-ENERGIZING
THIS EQUIPMENT.
This label is attached to the main access doors on the generator. Wait a minimum of five minutes after
the main power has been removed from the generator before opening the cabinet doors. This will
allow for internal capacitors to discharge to a safe level.
The upper door provides access to the HV power supply driver section, room interface board and
associated control circuits. The lower door allows access to the HT transformer, dual speed starter
chassis if fitted, line adjusting transformer if fitted, and access to the tube stator connections and thermal
switch connections. Additionally, the grounding location for the X-ray tube housing is located in this area.
Hazards associated with each area within are outlined in the relevant sections of this chapter.
Page 1B-10
Rev. H
Ch # 740904-01
Safety
1B
This label is attached to a cover over the dual speed starter assembly (if fitted). DC bus voltage is present
behind this panel, see 1B.5.9.
Ensure that the generator has been turned OFF for five minutes before removing the cover or
disconnecting the DC supply.
Replace fuses with the same type and rating, refer to spares list (chapter 8) for details.
This label is attached to the HT tank clamping bracket on generator models equipped with an HT tank
vent screw. This screw must be loosened to allow venting of the HT tank before use of the generator
when the tank is so equipped.
The screw must be fully tightened to prevent insulating oil spills or leaks from the HT tank during
transportation or shipping.
Ch # 740904-01
Rev. H
Page 1B-11
1B
Safety
This label is attached to the top of the HT tank on generator models equipped with mA test jacks. A
similar warning is printed on tank lid boards using this connector; see 1B.6.8 below for details.
This label is attached to the removable panels on the lower (power supply) cabinet. High voltage is
present within this cabinet at all times that the mains power is switched on.
Page 1B-12
Rev. H
Ch # 740904-01
Safety
1B
This label is attached to the power input board, and to the resonant board assembly. The input power
board has line voltage components attached that will be live at all times that the main disconnect is
switched on. This includes the input fuses, main line contactor, mains rectifier and associated
components.
The resonant board assembly has components that may be energized at all times that the
generator is on. These components may retain their charge for 5 minutes after the console is switched
off, or the main disconnect is switched off.
This label is attached to the primary terminals on the HT oil tank. These terminals may be energized at all
times that the generator is switched on, and for 5 minutes after the console or the main disconnect is
switched off.
This label is attached to the inverter board(s) and to the low speed starter assembly if fitted. The inverter
assembly is connected to the main DC bus and will have high voltage applied at all times that the
generator is switched on. This assembly will remain energized for 5 minutes after the generator is
switched off, or the main disconnect is off.
Components on the low speed starter assembly will have 240 VAC applied when the console is
switched on.
Ch # 740904-01
Rev. H
Page 1B-13
1B
Safety
This notice is printed on the HT oil tank lid and indicates that if the power supply inverter leads that attach
to the high tension transformer primary terminals are not connected the generator must not be energized.
This notice also cautions against over tightening the nuts on the transformer feedthrough terminals
mentioned in the above paragraph.
This notice is printed on the HT oil tank lid. High voltage may be present at the primary terminals on the
tank lid board, at the output high voltage connectors, and at the mA/mAs measuring jacks if the shorting
link is opened for mA/mAs measurements.
Page 1B-14
Rev. H
Ch # 740904-01
1C
CHAPTER 1 SECTION 1C
PREPARING FOR INSTALLATION
CONTENTS:
Ch # 740895-02
Rev. N
Page 1C-1
1C
1C.1.0 INTRODUCTION
The following items must be considered before installing your generator:
Power level of your generator.
Power line requirements.
Ground requirements.
Physical placement of the generator.
Environmental requirements for the generator.
Cable runs from the generator to all room components: tables, Buckys, X-ray tubes etc.
Line Frequency
50/60 Hz.
Momentary Current
200 Amps.
Standby Current
5 Amps.
Line Frequency
50/60 Hz.
Momentary Current
250 Amps.
Standby Current
5 Amps.
Line Voltage
50/60 Hz.
Momentary Current
Standby Current
Page 1C-2
5 Amps.
Rev. N
Ch # 740895-02
1C
Line Frequency
50/60 Hz.
Momentary Current
Standby Current
5 Amps.
50/60 Hz.
Momentary Current
Standby Current
5 Amps.
50/60 Hz.
Momentary Current
Standby Current
5 Amps.
Ch # 740895-02
Rev. N
Page 1C-3
1C
Line Voltage
50/60 Hz.
Momentary Current
Standby Current
5 Amps.
Line Voltage
50/60 Hz.
Momentary Current
Standby Current
5 Amps.
*NOTE:
Page 1C-4
Rev. N
Ch # 740895-02
1C
Mains Voltage
Minimum
Recommended
Mains Disconnect
to Generator
15 ft/5 m max)
Generator
Momentary
Line
Current
Minimum
Recommended
Generator
Service Rating
Minimum
Recommended
Distribution
Transformer
Rating
#4
200 A
120 A
50 kVA
Ground
Wire
Size
Apparent
Mains
Resistance
#4
0.055
32 kW 1 Generator
230 VAC
(25 mm )
(25mm )
40 kW 1 Generator
230 VAC
#4
250 A
120 A
65 kVA
0.045
#4
2
(25 mm )
(25mm )
32 kW 3 Generator
400 VAC
#6
65 A
100 A
45 kVA
(15 mm2)
480 VAC
#6
0.27
#4
(25mm2)
55 A
100 A
45 kVA
0.40
#4
2
(15 mm )
(25mm )
40 kW 3 Generator
400 VAC
#6
80 A
100 A
55 kVA
(15 mm )
480 VAC
#6
(25mm )
65 A
100 A
55 kVA
0.32
#4
2
(15 mm )
0.22
#4
(25mm )
Ch # 740895-02
Rev. N
Page 1C-5
1C
Mains Voltage
Minimum
Recommended
Mains Disconnect
to Generator
15 ft/5 m max)
Generator
Momentary
Line
Current
Minimum
Recommended
Generator
Service Rating
Minimum
Recommended
Distribution
Transformer
Rating
#6
100 A
100 A
65 kVA
Ground
Wire
Size
Apparent
Mains
Resistance
#4
0.17
50 kW 3 Generator
400 VAC
(15 mm )
480 VAC
#6
(25mm )
80 A
100 A
65 kVA
0.24
#4
2
(15 mm )
(25mm )
65 kW 3 Generator
400 VAC
#6
125 A
100 A
85 kVA
(15 mm )
480 VAC
#6
0.13
#4
(25mm )
105 A
100 A
85 kVA
0.19
#4
2
(15 mm )
(25mm )
80 kW 3 Generator
400 VAC
#6
155 A
100 A
105 kVA
(15 mm )
480 VAC
#6
0.11
#4
(25mm )
130 A
100 A
105 kVA
0.15
#4
2
(15 mm )
(25mm )
100 kW 3 Generator
400 VAC
#6
195 A
100 A
130 kVA
(15 mm )
480 VAC
#6
(25mm )
160 A
100 A
130 kVA
Page 1C-6
0.12
#4
2
(15 mm )
0.09
#4
(25mm )
All wiring and grounding should be in compliance with the national electrical code or equivalent.
All wiring must be copper.
For all installations, a separate copper ground cable #4 AWG (25 mm2) is required from the building
distribution ground to the ground terminal located inside the main disconnect switch fuse block.
The disconnect switch shall be located within reach of the operator.
Rev. N
Ch # 740895-02
1C
Ch # 740895-02
Rev. N
Page 1C-7
1C
Page 1C-8
Rev. N
Ch # 740895-02
1C
Ch # 740895-02
Rev. N
Page 1C-9
1C
Page 1C-10
Rev. N
Ch # 740895-02
1C
13.9 (353)
16.1 (409)
3.3 (85)
TOP
VIEW
FRONT
LEVELLING
FEET
(4 PLACES)
20.1 (511)
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES (MM)
SPACERS
SUPPLIED BY
CUSTOMER
(4 PLACES)
FILE: IN_MTG.CDR
16.1 (409)
12.3 (312)
TOP
VIEW
FRONT
1.5 (38)
15.0 (380)
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES (MM)
FILE: IN_MTG2.CDR
Ch # 740895-02
Rev. N
Page 1C-11
1C
Unrestricted air flow must be provided at the front and sides of the cabinet, as well as underneath the
unit.
Do not allow storage on top of the cabinet.
Typical heat output of the generator during stand-by is 75 BTU/hr, or 4000 BTU/hr during fluoro
operation.
Control console heat output is negligible (150 BTU/hr).
The cable supplied for the console is a 15 conductor cable with a standard length of 50 ft. (15 m).
The cable supplied for the optional remote fluoro control is a 9 conductor cable with a standard length
of 50 ft. (15 m).
Page 1C-12
Rev. N
Ch # 740895-02
1C
Site logistics
Installation equipment
DESCRIPTION
Is there an unloading area to transport the generator from the delivery truck to the inside of
the building?
If the installation is not on the same floor as the delivery entrance, is there an elevator
available?
Are all halls and doorways large enough to allow the generator to pass through?
Is there a transport dolly or similar device to move the Generator? It must have a minimum
rating of 250 lb. (115 Kg.)
Do any regulatory bodies need to be notified prior to installation?
If movers are required, have arrangements for time and equipment been completed?
Are lifting straps or some other suitable device available to lift the generator off the
shipping pallet?
DESCRIPTION
GenWare and a laptop computer for setup and calibration if required. This is needed for
programming and calibration of the touch screen console.
General hand tools for installation: Wrenches, nut drivers, assortment of screwdrivers,
pliers, etc.
If the generator is to be anchored to the floor, suitable hardware and drills, drill bits etc
must be available.
A supply of connectors for wiring: lugs, caps, line splices etc.
A calibrated DVM which indicates true RMS voltages.
Dual trace memory oscilloscope with a minimum 20 MHz bandwidth; appropriate leads,
probes, etc.
Device for measuring true kVp and mA (mAs). This may be a Dynalyzer equivalent or a
non-invasive system such as the Keithly TRIAD system.
A calibrated radiation meter with detectors that will allow for R/min and uR type
measurements (or uGy and Gy/min).
A strobe or reed type tachometer to verify that the anode is rotating up to speed.
A sufficient selection of patient absorbers to allow AEC and ABS calibration. A suggested
selection is 3/4 inch Al (quantity 2); 1 mm of Cu (quantity 8), Water in containers of 5.0.
10.0, 15.0 cm thickness.
Test phantoms to verify the imaging system with the generator.
Ch # 740895-02
Rev. N
Page 1C-13
1C
Page 1C-14
Rev. N
Ch # 740895-02
Compatibility Listing
1D
CHAPTER 1
SECTION 1D
COMPATIBILITY LISTING
CONTENTS:
Section
Title
1D.1.0 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................... 1D-2
1D.2.0 COMPATIBLE DEVICES AND OPTIONS ................................................................................................. 1D-2
1D.2.1 X-Ray Tubes ......................................................................................................................................... 1D-2
1D.2.2 Stators................................................................................................................................................... 1D-2
1D.2.3 AEC Devices......................................................................................................................................... 1D-2
1D.2.4 ABS Pickups ......................................................................................................................................... 1D-2
1D.2.5 Tomographic Tables ............................................................................................................................. 1D-2
1D.2.6 Digital Interfaces (R&F Generators) ..................................................................................................... 1D-2
1D.2.7 DAP (Dose Area Product)..................................................................................................................... 1D-3
1D.2.8 Options.................................................................................................................................................. 1D-3
1D.3.0 X-RAY TUBE DATA ................................................................................................................................. 1D-3
1D.4.0 COMPATIBILITY STATEMENT / PRODUCT DESCRIPTION ................................................................ 1D-4
Ch # 740904-02
Rev. C
Page 1D-1
1D
Compatibility Listing
1D.1.0 INTRODUCTION
This section details external equipment that is compatible with your specific generator, and lists options
that are included in that generator.
1D.2.2 Stators
Various types / impedances of stators are supported.
Page 1D-2
Rev. C
Ch # 740904-02
Compatibility Listing
1D
1D.2.8 Options
Major options include AEC board, DAP (Indico 100 only), remote fluoro control unit, dual speed starter,
line adjusting transformer, and two tube HT transformer.
NOTE:
TUBE #1
HOUSING (MAKE / MODEL):
INSERT (MAKE / MODEL):
SERIAL #:
STATOR TYPE:
TUBE #2
HOUSING (MAKE / MODEL):
INSERT (MAKE / MODEL):
SERIAL #:
STATOR TYPE:
Ch # 740904-02
Rev. C
Page 1D-3
1D
Compatibility Listing
Page 1D-4
Rev. C
Ch # 740904-02
Compatibility Listing
1D
Ch # 740904-02
Rev. C
Page 1D-5
1D
Compatibility Listing
Page 1D-6
Rev. C
Ch # 740904-02
1E
CHAPTER 1 SECTION 1E
GENERATOR LAYOUT AND
MAJOR COMPONENTS
CONTENTS:
1E.1.0 INTRODUCTION
This section contains generator layout drawings and figures that identify the major generator components and
circuit board assemblies.
This section also shows the location and correct orientation of the power EPROM (located on the
generator CPU board, the console EPROM (located on the console CPU board), and the dual speed starter
EPROM (located on the dual speed starter board if the dual speed starter option is used). Refer to the applicable
figures to ensure correct EPROM placement and orientation should EPROM replacement be necessary.
Ch # 740895-03
Rev. H
Page 1E-1
1E
Figure 1E-1 shows the major components within the front and right side of the generator cabinet. Figure
1E-2 shows the major components accessible from the left side and the rear of the generator cabinet.
Page 1E-2
Rev. H
Ch # 740895-03
1E
Ch # 740895-03
Rev. H
Page 1E-3
1E
INDICO 100
23 X 56 cm
Console
31 X 42 cm
Console
Rad only
Console
Touch Screen
Console
FILE: IN_CON1.CDR
Page 1E-4
Rev. H
Ch # 740895-03
1E
Ch # 740895-03
Rev. H
Page 1E-5
1E
Page 1E-6
Rev. H
Ch # 740895-03
Installation
CHAPTER 2
INSTALLATION
CONTENTS:
2.1.0 INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................................................................... 2-3
2.2.0 RECEIVING .................................................................................................................................................. 2-3
2.2.1 Major Shipping Assemblies ....................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.3.0 REMOVAL FROM PACK .............................................................................................................................. 2-4
2.3.1 Lifting The Generator ................................................................................................................................ 2-5
2.4.0 REMOVING THE EXTERNAL COVERS...................................................................................................... 2-6
2.5.0 LINE ADJUSTING TRANSFORMER............................................................................................................ 2-8
2.6.0 MAJOR COMPONENT LAYOUT.................................................................................................................. 2-8
2.7.0 INSPECTING THE HT TANK ....................................................................................................................... 2-8
2.8.0 EQUIPMENT PLACEMENT.......................................................................................................................... 2-8
2.8.1 Equipment Cabinet .................................................................................................................................... 2-8
2.8.2 Control Console......................................................................................................................................... 2-8
2.8.3 Anchoring The Generator To The Floor .................................................................................................... 2-9
2.8.4 Leveling ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-9
2.9.0 WIRING TO THE GENERATOR................................................................................................................... 2-9
2.9.1 Control Console......................................................................................................................................... 2-9
2.9.2 Remote Fluoro Control (Optional) ........................................................................................................... 2-12
2.9.3 Hand Switch Installation .......................................................................................................................... 2-12
2.9.4 X-Ray Tube Stator & Thermal Switch Connections ................................................................................ 2-14
2.9.5 Generator Mains Connection .................................................................................................................. 2-15
2.9.6 Room Equipment..................................................................................................................................... 2-16
2.9.7 Emergency Power Off / Power Distribution Relay .................................................................................. 2-16
2.10.0 X-RAY TUBE HOUSING GROUND ......................................................................................................... 2-16
2.11.0 HIGH TENSION CABLES......................................................................................................................... 2-16
2.12.0 PROGRAMMING THE LOW SPEED STARTER ..................................................................................... 2-18
2.12.1 Low Speed Starter Tube Select Table .................................................................................................. 2-18
2.12.2 Low Speed Starter Boost Voltage Selection ......................................................................................... 2-18
2.12.3 Low Speed Starter Run Voltage Selection............................................................................................ 2-20
2.12.4 Low Speed Starter Boost Time Selection ............................................................................................. 2-21
2.13.0 PROGRAMMING THE DUAL SPEED STARTER .................................................................................... 2-21
2.13.1 Setting tube type ................................................................................................................................... 2-21
2.13.2 Confirming/Changing DSS Starter Type ............................................................................................... 2-23
2.13.3 Dual Speed Starter Tube Select Table ................................................................................................. 2-25
2.13.4 Configuring dual speed starter 733317-08 / 735925-08 ....................................................................... 2-25
2.14.0 GENERATOR LOCKOUT SWITCH ......................................................................................................... 2-26
2.15.0 SAFETY INTERLOCKS ............................................................................................................................ 2-27
2.16.0 CHECKING THE RAM BACKUP BATTERY VOLTAGE .......................................................................... 2-27
2.17.0 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS.......................................................................................................................... 2-31
2.18.0 INITIAL RUN-UP ....................................................................................................................................... 2-32
2.18.1 Initial Voltage Measurements ................................................................................................................ 2-32
2.18.2 Initial Power Up ..................................................................................................................................... 2-33
2.18.3 Single Phase Primary Tap Selection..................................................................................................... 2-34
2.18.4 Three Phase Primary Tap Selection ..................................................................................................... 2-36
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-1
Installation
Page 2-2
Rev. AM
Ch # 740895-04
Installation
INTRODUCTION
This chapter contains instructions for unpacking, positioning, and cabling the Indico 100 series of
generators to allow initial operation and calibration. The instructions in this chapter allows the installation
engineer to:
Install the generator and control console.
Install the optional remote fluoro control.
Connect power.
Calibrate one or two X-ray tube(s), depending on the generator model, without completing the room
interface connections. This allows for simpler installation and troubleshooting on the generator itself.
2.2.0
RECEIVING
WARNING:
THE INDICO 100 GENERATOR CONSISTS OF THE FOLLOWING ITEMS: UPPER AND
LOWER CABINETS (FACTORY ASSEMBLED), CONTROL CONSOLE, AND AN OPTIONAL
REMOTE FLUORO CONTROL.
THE COMPLETE GENERATOR WEIGHS APPROXIMATELY 250 POUNDS (115 KG) IN ITS
SHIPPING CONTAINER.
THE OPTIONAL LINE ADJUSTING TRANSFORMER IS SUPPLIED IN A SEPARATE
ENCLOSURE, THE WEIGHT OF THAT ASSEMBLY IS APPROXIMATELY 100 POUNDS (45
KG).
THE OIL TANK IS LOCATED IN THE LOWER (POWER SUPPLY) CABINET. ONE PERSON
SHOULD NOT ATTEMPT TO LIFT OR MOVE THE GENERATOR ASSEMBLY OR OPTIONAL
LINE ADJUSTING TRANSFORMER WITHOUT ADEQUATE ASSISTANCE OR PROPER
EQUIPMENT.
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-3
Installation
2.2.1
2.3.0
Inspect the pack for evidence of shipping damage. If there is evidence of shipping damage, note
this in the event that a damage claim is justified.
2.
Locate any documentation attached to the outside of the cardboard sleeve. Be sure to read and
understand this documentation before unpacking the generator. Then set this documentation
aside temporarily until it can be transferred to a storage location close to the generator for future
reference.
3.
CAUTION:
OPEN THE CARDBOARD PACK(S) CAREFULLY. SHARP TOOLS MAY DAMAGE THE
CONTENTS.
4.
5.
Unscrew the bolts that secure the generator to the shipping pallet. Carefully lift the generator
from the pallet. Refer to 2.3.1 for the procedure for lifting the generator.
6.
Inspect for internal and external shipping damage. Refer to 2.4.0 for instructions for removing the
external covers.
7.
Unscrew the leveling feet at the bottom of the generator by a minimum of 1 in. (35 mm). This
will provide the required air flow underneath the generator cabinet and allow room to make
leveling adjustments when the generator is placed in its final location.
8.
Remove and unpack the control console, the optional line adjusting transformer if used, the
optional remote fluoro control if used, and the optional hand switch kit if included, and check
these items for any damage.
9.
Remove and unpack the manuals and any other paperwork that may be packed with the
generator.
10.
Keep the shipping containers. In case of shipping damage, place the unit(s) back in its shipping
pack and notify the carrier and the customer support group at CPI Canada Inc.
Page 2-4
Rev. AM
Ch # 740895-04
Installation
Lifting straps can be used along with a hoist to raise the generator. The straps should be placed
underneath the generator cabinet and along the four sides to properly support the cabinet as it is
raised.
Remove the main access panel and the lower wiring access panel from the generator cabinet (refer
to 2.4.0 - removing the external covers). The metal cross brace found at the front of the cabinet
(below the circuit board mounting panel) may be used, in conjunction with the lip at the upper edge of
the opening for the lower wiring access panel, as lifting points. Two people (one on each side) will be
required to lift or maneuver the generator cabinet.
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-5
Installation
2.4.0
Page 2-6
Rev. AM
Ch # 740895-04
Installation
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-7
Installation
2.5.0
2.6.0
2.7.0
Verify that there is no obvious shipping damage to the tank (i.e. dents to the tank surface).
Carefully check the inside of the generator cabinet and the HT tank for evidence of any oil loss. Refer
to chapter 6 if it is suspected that there has been some loss of oil.
Verify that the clamps supporting the HT oil tank are tight.
Verify that all the connections to the tank lid are secure.
Verify that the rubber vent plug on the top of the tank is snug.
2.8.0
EQUIPMENT PLACEMENT
2.8.1
Equipment Cabinet
Place the equipment cabinet in a location that will allow the following:
2.8.2
Easy front and side access for service and sufficient clearance at the rear for room interface cables.
Refer to chapter 1C.
Air circulation - a minimum height of 1 in. (35 mm) is recommended to allow airflow underneath the
generator. Do not cover or block the cooling slots on the cabinet.
Stable footing - the leveling feet at the bottom of the cabinet will be used to prevent movement during
normal operation.
Close proximity to service disconnect boxes - cables should not be on the floor where they could be
stepped on.
Control Console
Locate the control console in its intended position and ensure that it is stable. Refer to chapter 1C:
Page 2-8
If the console is located on a shelf, supply index pins or equivalent hardware to the base of the
console to prevent slipping.
Ensure that the console is mounted at a height and angle to allow easy viewing of the displays.
If the optional CPI pedestal stand is to be used for the console mounting, follow the mounting
instructions supplied with the stand.
Leave sufficient slack in the cabling to the console to allow for future service and maintenance.
Rev. AM
Ch # 740895-04
Installation
NOTE: DO NOT LOCATE THE CONTROL CONSOLE WHERE X-RADIATION MAY BE PRESENT DURING
INSTALLATION OR OPERATION.
NOTE: IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT THE CONSOLE CABLE NOT BE DISASSEMBLED FOR SYSTEM
INSTALLATION. HOWEVER, IF THIS IS ABSOLUTELY NECESSARY TO ROUTE THE CABLE,
PLEASE ENSURE CAREFUL AND CORRECT REASSEMBLY OF THE CONNECTOR SHELL TO
AVOID ANY POSSIBILITY OF PINCHING OF THE INTERNAL WIRES BY THE SHELL.
YOU MAY CHOOSE TO TEMPORARILY LOCATE THE CONSOLE NEAR TO THE GENERATOR FOR
INITIAL PROGRAMMING AND CALIBRATION. IF THIS IS SO, PLEASE COMPLETE THE FINAL
CONSOLE INSTALLATION PER THIS SECTION WHEN THE GENERATOR INSTALLATION IS
COMPLETED.
2.8.3
2.8.4
Leveling
Adjust the leveling feet such that the generator is level and stable. This adjustment must be made for
both anchored and freestanding generator installations. As noted in 2.3.0, the leveling feet must be
unscrewed by a minimum of 1 in. (35 mm) to allow for proper airflow underneath the generator.
2.9.0
2.9.1
Control Console
1.
Route the generator end of the console cable into the generator cabinet via the access cover in
the upper part of the cabinet nearest to J4 on the generator interface board.
2.
Connect the console cable to J4 on the generator interface board. For the Rad-only console,
connect the console cable to J16 on the generator interface board.
3.
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-9
Installation
2.9.1
5.
Figure 2-3 shows the designations and functions of the connectors on the rear panel of the
control console.
Page 2-10
Rev. AM
Ch # 740895-04
Installation
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-11
Installation
2.9.2
Connect the free end of the 9 conductor remote fluoro cable (from the optional remote fluoro
control box) to J11 of the generator CPU board. Ensure that the screw locks are fully tightened to
secure the connector. Refer to figure 2-4 for the location of J11 on the generator CPU board. The
cable should be routed into the generator via the access cover in the upper part of the cabinet
closest to J11 on the generator CPU board.
2.9.3
Page 2-12
Rev. AM
Ch # 740895-04
Installation
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Ch # 740895-04
J3 PIN CONNECTIONS
RAD-ONLY CONSOLE
AND TOUCH SCREEN
CONSOLE
Hand Switch: X-Ray
No Connection
Hand Switch: Prep
No Connection
Hand Switch: Common (ground)
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
Rev. AM
Page 2-13
Installation
2.9.4
Route the X-ray tube stator cable(s) through the lower wiring access panel panel on the rear of
the generator cabinet, then route the cables towards the stator terminal blocks as shown in the
figure below.
FOR UNITS WITH A LOW SPEED STARTER, SHIELDED STATOR CABLES ARE
RECOMMENDED. FOR UNITS WITH A DUAL SPEED STARTER, SHIELDED STATOR
CABLES MUST BE USED.
THE SHIELD FOR THE STATOR CABLE(S) MUST BE PROPERLY GROUNDED AT
THE CHASSIS GROUND STUD(S) SHOWN IN FIGURE 2-6.
2.
Connect the wires to the appropriate terminal as shown. The tube thermal switch will normally be
connected to the THERMAL SWITCH connections on the stator terminal block, but may
optionally be connected to the room interface board (refer to chapter 3B).
3.
Ensure that all terminal connections are tight, then dress and secure the cables.
NOTE:
ONE TUBE ONLY GENERATORS WILL HAVE 1 STATOR TERMINAL BLOCK FITTED. THE
LOWER TERMINAL BLOCK IN FIGURE 2-6 IS ONLY FITTED ON TWO TUBE GENERATORS.
Page 2-14
Rev. AM
Ch # 740895-04
Installation
WARNING:
Refer to chapter 1C for generator power and generator power line requirements.
1.
Pass the AC mains cable through the access hole located at the lower rear of the generator.
2.
Use an appropriate cable clamp to secure the mains cable at the cabinet entrance.
3.
Temporarily remove the safety cover from the main fuses. Strip sufficient cable jacket to allow the
ground wire to reach the main ground connector located at the left side of the main fuse block.
Refer to figure 2-7.
4.
Connect the ground wire to the chassis ground connector, and connect the mains wires to the
terminals on the bottom of the main fuse holder (3 wires for 3 phase systems, 2 wires for single
phase systems). Be sure to replace the main fuse safety cover after all connections are made
and properly tightened.
5.
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-15
Installation
2.9.6
Room Equipment
Refer to chapter 3B, 3D, 3E, and 3F for connection of the room equipment (Buckys, miscellaneous inputs
and outputs, AEC, ABS, DAP, etc.). It is suggested that these items not be connected until after the initial
run-up of the generator is complete, and the tube auto calibration has been performed as described near
the end of this chapter.
2.9.7
Verify that the HT cable terminations are clean, in good condition i.e. no cracks, and coated with
vapor proof compound.
2.
Remove the plastic caps that cover the high voltage terminals on the HT tank. These should be
saved in case of a future requirement to transport the generator or HT tank.
3.
Connect the high tension cables as per the installation requirements. Use the right angle
connectors for the HT transformer end. Ensure that the cables for tube 1 (and tube 2 if used) are
plugged into the proper connectors on the HT tank. Refer to figure 2-8 and 2-9.
On two tube R&F generators, the fan may need to be removed in order to install
the tube 2 HT connectors. To do this, disconnect the AC power leads from the fan. Next,
remove and temporarily set aside the two socket - head screws and washers from the fan
mounting bracket. Slide the fan assembly forward, and then remove the fan assembly to
connect the HT cables.
To re-install the fan assembly, slide the fan assembly into position under the
inverter assembly, using the tabs on the mounting bracket to support the inside end of the
bracket. Replace the screws and washers to secure the fan assembly. Lastly, reconnect
the AC power leads to the fan.
4.
Be sure that the HT cable connectors are tight and there is no play between the connector
insulator and the screw down ring.
Page 2-16
Rev. AM
Ch # 740895-04
Installation
NOTE: PLEASE OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING IF USING METAL CENTER SECTION X-RAY TUBES
The mA feedback signals, as measured at the mA test points on the control board, represent anode mA.
X-ray emission in the tube is a result of the anode current.
The mA measured at terminals E17 - E18 of the HT tank is cathode current. In a metal center section
tube, the anode current will be less than the cathode current, the difference being body current. In a metal
center section tube, the cathode current may exceed the anode current by up to 15%. Although the
anode and cathode currents may be unequal, the anode to cathode kV regulation is not affected.
Due to the presence of body current, filament drive and emission may need to be greater than expected
for a given mA station. The power lost to body current may need to be considered relative to the
maximum generator output.
When installing a metal center section tube, it is essential that the center section of the X-ray tube be
securely grounded; otherwise premature tube failure may result.
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-17
Installation
240 VAC IS PRESENT ON THE LOW SPEED STARTER BOARD AT ALL TIMES THAT THE
GENERATOR IS SWITCHED ON. TAKE APPROPRIATE PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING
THIS BOARD
Page 2-18
Confirm the required BOOST VOLTAGE for the selected tube type per table 1 in supplement
746026, which follows chapter 2. The requirement for the vast majority of tubes in table 1 is 240
V. For tubes that require 120 V boost, this is noted along with the run voltage, boost time, etc for
that tube.
Refer to figure 2-10 (power supply auxiliary transformer). Locate this transformer under the
power input board; refer to chapter 1E for details.
If there is only one connection on the 120V tap on the power supply auxiliary transformer, the
boost voltage is set to 240 VAC.
If there are two connections on the 120V tap, the boost voltage is set to 120 VAC.
Confirm the correct boost voltage at F1 on the low speed starter board if a suitable voltmeter
is available.
Go to 2.12.3 if the boost voltage is properly set for the selected tube type and therefore does
NOT need to be changed.
Rev. AM
Ch # 740895-04
Installation
If the boost voltage tap on the power supply auxiliary transformer needs to be changed from
240V to 120V, proceed as follows:
Loosen the clamping screws for the 240V tap and for the 120V tap.
Move the boost voltage lead from the 240V tap to the 120V tap. The boost voltage lead is the
lead that connects directly to J1 on the low speed starter board. Do not disturb the other
leads on the 120V and / or 240V taps.
Ensure that the wires are positioned between the two metal clamps on the transformer
terminal block.
Retighten both of the clamping screws.
Confirm the correct boost voltage at F1 on the low speed starter board if a suitable voltmeter
is available.
3.
If the boost voltage tap on the power supply auxiliary transformer needs to be changed from
120V to 240V, proceed as follows:
Loosen the clamping screws for the 120V tap and for the 240V tap.
Move the boost voltage lead from the 120V tap to the 240V tap. The boost voltage lead is the
lead that connects directly to J1 on the low speed starter board. Do not disturb the other
leads on the 120V and / or 240V taps
Ensure that the wires are positioned between the two metal clamps on the transformer
terminal block.
Retighten both of the clamping screws.
Confirm the correct boost voltage at F1 on the low speed starter board if a suitable voltmeter
is available.
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-19
Installation
Note the required RUN VOLTAGE for the selected tube type per table 1 in Supplement 746026
which follows chapter 2. Then confirm the low speed starter run-voltage in the generator. This is
determined by the run-voltage setting on the power supply auxiliary transformer. Refer to figure
2-10.
Locate this transformer under the power input board; refer to chapter 1E for details.
Locate the run-voltage output on the transformer. This will be set to the 52V, 73V, or 94V tap,
and must match the required run-voltage for the selected tube in table 1.
Go to 2.12.4 if the run-voltage setting is correct for the selected tube type, and therefore does
NOT need to be changed.
2.
If the run-voltage setting on the power supply auxiliary transformer needs to be changed, proceed
as follows:
Loosen the clamping screws for the current run-voltage tap, and for the required run-voltage
tap.
Move the run-voltage output lead from the current tap position to the required tap position
(52V, 73V, or 94V). Ensure that the wire is positioned between the two metal clamps on the
transformer terminal block.
Retighten both of the clamping screws.
Page 2-20
Rev. AM
Ch # 740895-04
Installation
2.
If required, adjust the boost time by changing the JW1 jumper position as described above.
NOTE: CONFIRM PROPER LOW SPEED STARTER CONFIGURATION USING A SUITABLE TACHOMETER
BEFORE MAKING ANY EXPOSURES.
Select the desired tube type from table 2 in Supplement 746026 which follows Chapter 2.
Record the tube type number (housing and insert) and the binary code as per the third column in
the table. Please note that the tube compatibility applies only to the housing and inserts listed, i.e.
for the specific manufacturer(s) shown.
2.
If the desired tube type is not listed, please contact CPI product support for assistance.
3.
The generator is factory configured to support one type of stator only (for example R type
stator), therefore only stators of that type may be used with this generator. Refer to the customer
product description form in chapter 1D of this manual for compatible X-ray tubes.
REFER TO SECTION 2.13.2 IF IT IS DESIRED TO USE TUBES WITH STATOR TYPES
NOT COMPATIBLE WITH THIS GENERATOR, OR IF YOU ARE NOT CERTAIN THAT THIS
GENERATOR IS COMPATIBLE WITH THE STATOR IN YOUR TUBE.
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-21
Installation
Refer to figure 2-11. Set the DIP switch SW1 (for tube 1) with the binary code for the selected
tube. The binary code shown in the table programs the tube type (housing and insert), for
example housing type Varian Diamond with standard R stator and inserts per table 2 in
Supplement 746026 which follows Chapter 2, requires SW1-1 to be set OFF, SW1-2 OFF, SW13 ON, SW1-4 OFF and SW1-5 OFF. This programs the voltages, brake times, and boost times in
table 2.
Additionally, SW1-6 to SW1-8 may be set to give incremental increases in boost time
over the preselected values (for example to run an older tube with worn bearings). For example,
binary 000 gives zero increase, binary 001 gives 100 ms increase, binary 100 gives 400 ms
increase, and binary 111 gives a 700 ms increase in boost time. SW1-6 represents bit 1, SW1-7
bit 2, and SW1-8 represents bit 3.
EXAMPLE:
Binary 100 = decimal 4 = 400 ms incremental boost time increase:
1
Bit 3
SW1-8
0
Bit 2
SW1-7
0
Bit 1
SW1-6
5.
The example DIP switch setting shown in figure 2-11 is for the example in step 4 with an
incremental increase in boost time of 200 ms.
6.
If this is a two-tube installation, repeat steps 1 to 4 using DIP switch SW2 for the second tube.
7.
Please confirm all settings using a suitable tachometer to ensure proper anode RPM
before making any exposures.
NOTE:
FOR TUBES WHERE LOW SPEED OPERATION ONLY IS INDICATED, THE DUAL SPEED
STARTER MUST BE PROGRAMMED FOR LOW SPEED ONLY, AND WHERE HIGH SPEED
OPERATION ONLY IS INDICATED, THE DUAL SPEED STARTER MUST BE
PROGRAMMED FOR HIGH SPEED OPERATION ONLY. REFER TO THE TUBE SELECTION
SECTION IN CHAPTER 3C FOR THE PROCEDURE TO DO THIS.
NOTE THAT THE EXAMPLE DIP SWITCH SHOWN IN FIGURE 2-11 IS REPRESENTATIVE
OF ONE STYLE OF SWITCH ONLY. DEPENDING ON MANUFACTURER, YOUR DIP SWITCH
STYLE MAY VARY. PLEASE NOTE THE ON/OFF POSITIONS CAREFULLY FOR YOUR
UNIT.
Page 2-22
Rev. AM
Ch # 740895-04
Installation
Record the part number of the dual speed starter assembly in the subject generator. This is
printed on a label near the top of the dual speed starter chassis.
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-23
Installation
Locate that part number in table 2 in Supplement 746026 which follows Chapter 2, then note the
value of the H.S. SHIFT CAPAC and the L.S. SHIFT CAPAC per the table. Those are the values
of the phase shift capacitors in the dual speed starter. Only tubes requiring those capacitor
values may be connected to the dual speed starter.
3.
If it is desired to use a different tube from that shown in the compatible X-ray tubes section of the
customer product description form, confirm that the desired tube (housing and insert) is listed in
table 2 AND that the required dual speed starter part number for that tube per table 2 is the same
as is fitted in your generator.
4.
If the preceding steps confirm that the desired tube is fully compatible with the generator, you
may proceed with setting the tube type as per section 2.13.1.
5.
If in the preceding steps it is determined that the desired stator IS NOT compatible with the
generator, the phase shift capacitors in the dual speed starter will need to be changed to match
the requirements of the desired tube. Replacement capacitor kits are available to do this as noted
in the next step.
6.
Note the required H.S. SHIFT CAPAC and L.S. SHIFT CAPAC values, and the corresponding
dual speed starter part number for the desired tube per table 2. Using those capacitor values,
refer to table 2-1. From this table select the required conversion kit to convert to capacitors as
required for the selected tube. The conversion kits are available through the factory/customer
support.
IF MAKING THE ABOVE CONVERSION, PLEASE BE SURE TO CHANGE THE PART
NUMBER IDENTIFIED IN STEP 1 TO THE NEW CONFIGURATION USING AN INDELIBLE
MARKER. THIS WILL ENSURE THAT CONFIGURATION CONTROL OF THE PRODUCT IS
MAINTAINED
HIGH SPD SHIFT CAPAC
6 uF
7.5 uF
20 uF
5 uF
5 uF
3.4 uF
6 uF
5 uF / 6 uF
12.5 uF
NOTE:
Page 2-24
TABLE 2-1
LOW SPD SHIFT CAPAC
31uF
47 uF
60 uF
30 uF
45 uF
N/A
46 uF
30 / 31 uF
37.5 uF
Rev. AM
Ch # 740895-04
Installation
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-25
Installation
Page 2-26
Rev. AM
Ch # 740895-04
Installation
Turn the operator console upside down carefully to protect the front panel. Remove the 6 screws
securing the base to the molded case.
2.
Open the Console carefully such that the interconnecting cables are not strained.
3.
Locate the battery on the console CPU board, refer to figure 2-15. Measure the battery voltage
with a DVM. The top of the battery is the positive side; ground (TP2 on the board) is the negative
side.
4.
The nominal battery voltage should be approximately 3.0V, replace the battery if it is under
2.80V.
5.
Before closing the console, refer to section 2.17.0, console CPU board DIP switch settings.
6.
Re-assemble the console. DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN THE SCREWS SECURING THE BASE TO
THE MOLDED CONSOLE TOP.
Locate the battery on the console board, refer to figure 2-15. Measure the battery voltage with a
DVM. The easiest way to do is to measure the voltage across C23, the capacitor directly below
the battery. This capacitor is in parallel with the battery.
2.
The nominal battery voltage should be approximately 3.0V, replace the battery if it is under
2.80V.
3.
Before closing the console, refer to section 2.17.0, console CPU board DIP switch settings.
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-27
Installation
Disconnect all connections, including the console ground connection, from the rear of the
operator console.
2.
Turn the console upside down carefully to protect the front panel. Remove and temporarily set
aside the jackscrews from the D connectors on the rear of the console. Remove and temporarily
set aside the hardware from the console ground stud.
3.
4.
Gently remove the console bottom (the metal bottom panel with the feet attached).
5.
Re-assemble the console in the reverse order of the above. Use of a removable thread locker
(loctite or equivalent) is recommended when reinstalling the jackscrews to prevent them from
loosening if the mating connectors are removed.
Reconnect the console ground and all cables removed in step 1.
Page 2-28
Rev. AM
Ch # 740895-04
Installation
Disconnect all connections, including the console ground connection, from the rear of the
operator console.
2.
Turn the console upside down carefully to protect the front panel. Remove and temporarily set
aside the jackscrews from the D connectors on the rear of the console. Remove and temporarily
set aside the hardware from the console ground stud.
3.
4.
Gently remove the console bottom (the metal bottom panel with the feet attached).
5.
Locate the battery on the console board, refer to figure 2-15. Measure the battery voltage with a
DVM. The easiest way to do is to measure the voltage across C7, the capacitor directly to the left
of the battery. This capacitor is in parallel with the battery.
6.
The nominal battery voltage should be approximately 3.0V, replace the battery if it is under
2.80V.
7.
Re-assemble the console in the reverse order of the above. Use of a removable thread locker
(loctite or equivalent) is recommended when reinstalling the jackscrews to prevent them from
loosening if the mating connectors are removed.
Reconnect the console ground and all cables removed in step 1.
Locate the battery on the generator CPU board, refer to figure 2-15. Measure the battery voltage
with a DVM. The top of the battery is the positive side, ground (TP21 on the board) is the
negative side.
2.
The nominal battery voltage should be approximately 3.0V, replace the battery if it is under
2.80V.
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-29
Installation
Page 2-30
Rev. AM
Ch # 740895-04
Installation
Verify the settings on SW1 (If applicable, as described above). Refer to console utilities screen 2 in
chapter 3C for a description of these functions.
LANGUAGE
English
German
French
Italian
Swedish
Spanish
SW1-5
SW1-6
SW1-7
SW1-8
SW1 -4
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
SW1-3
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
SW1-2
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
SW1-1
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
NOT USED
NOT USED
OFF > LOGO NOT DISPLAYED
Verify the settings on SW1. Refer to the table below for the proper settings for this switch.
GENERATOR POWER
32 kW
40 kW
50 kW
65 kW
80 kW
100 kW
SW1-4
SW1-5
SW1-6
SW1-7
SW1-8
MAXIMUM mA
400 mA
500 mA
630 mA
800 mA
1000 mA
1000 mA
SW1 -3
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
SW1-2
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
SW1-1
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
* Refer to Resetting Factory Defaults in chapter 6 for details regarding this function.
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-31
Installation
Verify that the mains voltage and current capacity is correct for the generator installation. Refer to
the product ID label on the generator cabinet and chapter 1C of this manual.
2.
Temporarily remove the safety cover over the main input fuses in the generator.
3.
If the mains supply is compatible with the generator, switch on the main breaker and/or
disconnect switch and check for the following voltages:
NOTE: DO NOT SWITCH ON THE GENERATOR AT THIS TIME (ONLY THE AC MAINS TO THE
GENERATOR IS TO BE SWITCHED ON AT THIS TIME).
WARNING:
PLEASE NOTE THAT THE VOLTAGE MEASURED IN STEP 4 WILL NOT NECESSARILY BE THE
SAME AS THE VOLTAGE AT THE MAIN DISCONNECT BOX IN THE ROOM. THE REASON FOR
THIS IS THAT A LINE ADJUSTING TRANSFORMER MAY BE USED WITH THE GENERATOR
WHICH STEPS THE INCOMING LINE VOLTAGE TO THE GENERATOR UP OR DOWN.
GENERATORS WITH NO LINE ADJUSTING TRANSFORMER SHOULD HAVE THE SAME
VOLTAGE IN STEP 4 AS IS SUPPLIED AT THE MAIN DISCONNECT BOX IN THE ROOM. UNITS
WITH A LINE ADJUSTING TRANSFORMER SHOULD HAVE THE FOLLOWING VOLTAGES AT THE
MAIN LINE FUSES IN THE POWER SUPPLY CABINET.
VOLTAGE AT MAIN DISCONNECT BOX
(LINE ADJUSTING TRANSFORMER INPUT)
480 VAC 10 %
400 VAC 10 %
Page 2-32
Rev. AM
Ch # 740895-04
Installation
5.
Measure and record the voltage across the main line fuses in the generator. Single phase units
will only use one set of voltage measurements.
L1 phase to L2 phase: ______ VAC.
Are these voltages within specification for the unit as per chapter 1C for generators without a line
adjusting transformer, or within specification per the table above for units with a line adjusting
transformer? For 3 phase units, the phase to ground voltage should be 230 V 10 % for 400 V
units, and 277 V 10 % for 480 V units. For single phase 230 V units, the line to ground voltage
should be 115 V 10 %.
___ Check
BEFORE CONTINUING, REFER TO SECTION 2.18.3 OR 2.18.4 FOR THE PROCEDURE FOR
ADJUSTING LINE VOLTAGE TAPS ON THE ROOM INTERFACE TRANSFORMER AND THE POWER
SUPPLY AUXILIARY TRANSFORMER.
6.
Switch OFF the mains power to the generator. Verify that there is no voltage present across any
of the mains input phases. Replace the safety cover on the main input fuse block, then switch ON
the mains and generator.
7.
Verify that the red LED (DS1) located near the center of the generator interface board is lit.
_____ Check
8.
Verify that the red LED (DC BUSS OK) located on the power input board is lit.
_____ Check
Switch on the generator at the console and observe the startup sequence on the console APR
display.
2.
+5 V
+15 V
-15 V
+12 V
-12 V
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-33
Installation
On the auxiliary board verify that the following LEDs are lit:
CNTCTR CLSD
S.S. OK
+12V
-12V
+/- 35V
Note the position of the 208 / 240V tap on the power supply auxiliary transformer (this is factory
set to 240 VAC). Refer to figure 2-10, this shows the locations of the transformer taps.
2.
Based on the line voltage measured in section 2.18.1, step 4, set the tap referenced in the
previous step as follows. Refer to figure 2-16, this shows the line voltage taps schematically.
Use the 208V tap if the line voltage is 215 VAC or less.
Use the 240V tap if the line voltage is 216 VAC or higher.
3.
Note the primary voltage tap setting on the room interface transformer (this is factory set to 240
VAC). Refer to figure 2-17 and 2-18. The primary windings are connected in parallel for 200 / 240
VAC operation as per figure 2-18.
Use the 200V taps if the line voltage is 215 VAC or less.
Use the 240V taps if the line voltage is 216 VAC or higher.
Page 2-34
Rev. AM
Ch # 740895-04
Installation
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-35
Installation
Note the position of the 380 / 400V tap on the power supply auxiliary transformer (this is factory
set to 400 VAC). Refer to figure 2-10, this shows the locations of the transformer taps.
2.
Based on the line voltage measured in section 2.18.1, step 4, set the tap referenced in the
previous step as follows. Refer to figure 2-16, this shows the line voltage taps schematically.
Use the 380V tap if the line voltage is 389 VAC or less.
Use the 400V tap if the line voltage is 390 VAC or higher.
3.
Note the primary voltage tap setting on the room interface transformer (this is factory set to 400
VAC). Refer to figure 2-17 and 2-19. The primary windings are connected in series for 380 / 400
VAC operation as per figure 2-19.
Use the 380V setting (180V tap on top winding) if the line voltage is 389 VAC or less..
Use the 400V setting (200V tap on top winding) if the line voltage is 390 VAC or higher.
Page 2-36
Rev. AM
Ch # 740895-04
Installation
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-37
Installation
2.
While pressing and holding the RESET button [5], press the generator POWER ON button on the
console
3.
The generator will go through the start-up sequence, then display the message ENTER
PASSWORD.
4.
Enter the factory default password by pressing the following button sequence: [1] - [2] - [3] - [4].
5.
* GENERATOR SETUP *
APR EDITOR: DISABLED
GEN CONFIGURATION
DATA LINK
UTILITY
EXIT SETUP
APR EDITOR
This enables or disables technique factor changes. When APR EDITOR is set to ENABLED, the
technique factors may be changed. The new values may then be saved to overwrite the existing values.
Refer to chapter 3C for further information.
Page 2-38
Rev. AM
Ch # 740895-04
Installation
TUBE SELECTION
GENERATOR LIMITS
RECEPTOR SETUP
I/O CONFIGURATION
AEC SETUP
AEC CALIBRATION
TUBE CALIBRATION
DAP SETUP
DATA LINK
Used with the CPI GenWare utility software. This allows for data communication with a computer in
order to download additional tube types, transfer APR data, edit APR text, run the A2EC2 utility,
perform setup and calibration functions, and for other minor functions. Further documentation is included
with GenWare.
A computer (i.e. laptop) and a 9 pin null modem cable with socket connectors (female) on both
ends are required to run this software and interface to the generator.
NOTE: The GenWare program should be closed before exiting the DATA LINK function on the console.
Failure to do so may require that the console be switched off and then on again in order to reinitialize communication with the generator.
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-39
Installation
CAUTION:
ALWAYS VERIFY THE MANUFACTURER OF THE TUBE INSERT. IF THE X-RAY TUBE HAS
BEEN REBUILT, THE TUBE INSERT AND TUBE HOUSING MAY BE FROM DIFFERENT
MANUFACTURERS.
Step
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
NOTE:
Page 2-40
Action
From the GENERATOR SETUP menu
(section 2.19.1) select GEN
CONFIGURATION.
Select TUBE CALIBRATION.
Select the desired tube (tube 1 or tube
2) by pressing the TUBE button.
Press FOCAL SPOT to toggle between
SMALL and LARGE. Start with
SMALL.
Press and hold the X-RAY button (or
use the optional hand switch) to begin
the calibration procedure.
Press RETURN to repeat calibration on
the other focal spot or on the other
tube.
When auto-calibration is completed,
press EXIT to exit the tube auto
calibration menu.
Press EXIT to return to the
GENERATOR SETUP menu.
Press EXIT SETUP to exit out of the
setup and calibration mode and return
to the normal operation mode.
Result
The TUBE CALIBRATION menu will display.
Rev. AM
Ch # 740895-04
Installation
A SPECIAL DIAGNOSTIC MODE IS INVOKED WHEN YOU EXIT THE AUTO-CALIBRATION ROUTINE. THIS
MODE REMAINS IN EFFECT UNTIL THE GENERATOR IS SWITCHED OFF. THIS ALLOWS LIMITED
FUNCTIONALITY OF THE GENERATOR IN CASE THE AUTO CALIBRATION COULD NOT BE COMPLETED
DUE TO A FAULT.
WHILE IN THIS MODE, THE GENERATOR WILL DEFAULT THE FILAMENT CURRENT TO 2.0 AMPS FOR
ALL UNCALIBRATED MA STATIONS. ADDITIONALLY, THE MA TOLERANCE CHECK WILL BE DISABLED.
THIS ALLOWS ONE TO EXIT TO THE NORMAL OPERATING MODE WHERE THE PREP STATE MAY BE
ENTERED. THE FILAMENT AND ROTOR CIRCUITS CAN BE OBSERVED, AND AN EXPOSURE MAY BE
TAKEN AT THIS TIME. THE EXPOSURE WILL OBVIOUSLY BE INCORRECT AS THE FILAMENT CURRENT
IS SET TO 2 AMPS, BUT THIS ALLOWS KV MEASUREMENTS TO BE PERFORMED ALONG WITH OTHER
SYSTEM CHECKS TO AID IN TROUBLESHOOTING.
NOTE:
When finished all wiring, check that all connections are tight and secure.
Check that all cables are dressed neatly inside the main cabinet, and secured as necessary.
Reconnect any grounds that have been removed from covers. Then reinstall all covers before placing
the generator into service.
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-41
Installation
Page 2-42
Rev. AM
Ch # 740895-04
SUPPLEMENT
X-RAY TUBE STATOR COMPATIBILITY
TABLES
CONTENTS:
1.0 INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................................................................. 2
2.0 LOW SPEED STARTER TUBE SELECT TABLE................................................................................................ 3
3.0 DUAL SPEED STARTER TUBE SELECT TABLE .............................................................................................. 6
746026-00
Rev. D
Page 1
INTRODUCTION
This supplement contains the X-Ray Tube Stator Compatibility Tables for the Low Speed Starter and the
Dual Speed Starter.
The Dual Speed Starter table does not apply to the Indico 100L model.
Page 2
Rev. D
746026-00
TUBE TYPE
(HOUSING)
CGR Statorix
200A/240/260
550
(50/110
24 slot)
Chirana
Rotax KA 125
20/50 stator
Chirana
Rotax KA 125
20/20/20 stator
Comet DO7
25/50 stator
Comet DO9
25/50 stator
Comet DO9
25/50 stator
Comet DO10
25/50 stator
Comet DX10
25/50 stator
Comet XSTAR8
XSTAR74
25/50 stator
Dunlee PX1300
3 anode
S stator (15/30 )
Dunlee PX1400
4 anode
S stator (15/30 )
GE Maxiray 75
3 anode
23/23 equal
impedance E stator
2.5 Sec
12.5 F
LOW SPD
STARTER
PART NO.
732752-01
73 VAC
1.5 Sec
33 F
732752-00
RIK-T 30/50
1.2/2.0
52 VAC
1.5 Sec
732752-04
DX7
52 VAC
1.5 Sec
100 F
52 mH
Inductor
33 F
732752-00
DX9 0.6/2.0
DX9 1.2/2.0
DX91HS
DX92HS
DX93HS
DX10HS 0.6/1.0
DX10HS 1.0/2.0
DX101HS
DX104HS
DX105HS
XST-8
XST-74
52 VAC
1.5 Sec
33 F
732752-00
52 VAC
1.5 Sec
33 F
732752-00
52 VAC
1.5 Sec
33 F
732752-00
52 VAC
1.5 Sec
33 F
732752-00
52 VAC
1.5 Sec
33 F
732752-00
PX1302
PX1312
52 VAC
2.5 Sec
33 F
732752-00
PX1429
PX1431
PX1436
PX1482
PX1483
0.6/1.0 11
0.6/1.5 15
1.0/2.0 15
52 VAC
2.5 Sec
33 F
732752-00
73 VAC
1.5 Sec
45 F
732752-02
MN640
M641
MN641
M643
MS740
MSN742
RN620
RN640
RSN722
RSN742
RIK-T 12/50
0.8/2.0
746026-00
Rev. D
Page 3
2.0
Gilardoni
Rotagil S/AS
IAE
C52 Super
C100
20/40 stator
IAE
C52
C352
C52 Super
20/40 stator
IAE
C52
C352
20/40 stator
Philips
ROT350
ROT351
Siemens
Opti-150
S stator (14/37 )
Toshiba Rotanode
XH-106V-2
XS-RB stator
Toshiba Rotanode
XH-106V-2
XS-AL stator
Toshiba Rotanode
XH-121
XS-RB stator
Toshiba Rotanode
XH-126
Toshiba
XH-157
Page 4
TUBE TYPE
(INSERT)
0.3/1.0 11
0.6/1.0 11
0.6/1.2 11
0.6/1.5 11
0.6/1.5 12
0.6/1.25 12.5
1.0/2.0 15
AR11-30
AR30-60
RTC 600HS
RTC 700HS
RTC1000HS
RTM 101H/HS
RTM 102H/HS
RTM 90H/HS
RTM 92H/HS
73 VAC
1.5 Sec
45 F
LOW SPD
STARTER
PART NO.
732752-02
52 VAC
1.5 Sec
33 F
732752-00
52 VAC
1.5 Sec
33 F
732752-00
52 VAC
1.5 Sec
33 F
732752-00
RTM 78H/HS
AP DX104
X40
X50/AH
RO 17/50
SRO 22/50
SRO 33/100
30/52R
20/40
52 VAC
1.5 Sec
33 F
732752-00
52 VAC
1.5 Sec
33 F
732752-00
52 VAC
2.5 Sec
45 F
732752-02
E7252X
E7813X
52 VAC
1.5 Sec
33 F
732752-00
E7239X
E7242X
E7252X
E7813X
E7132X
E7239X
E7240X
E7299X
E7242FX
52 VAC
1.5 Sec
E7254X
E7254FX
E7255X
Rev. D
RUN
VOLTAGE
BOOST
TIME
SHIFT
CAPAC
33 F
732752-00
52 VAC
1.5 Sec
33 F
732752-00
73 VAC
1.5 Sec
33 F
732752-00
746026-00
2.0
Varian
Diamond
Std Rstator (16/50
)
Varian
Emerald
Std R stator
Varian
Saphire
Std R stator
Varian DX62
300-400 kHu,
STD stator (23/56 )
Varian DX62U
Universal
300-400 kHu,
configured as STD or
R stator (15/36 )
TUBE TYPE
(INSERT)
A102
A132
A142
52 VAC
1.5 Sec
33 F
LOW SPD
STARTER
PART NO.
732752-00
A102
A132
A142
A192
A272
A282
A286
A292
G256
G292
RAD13
RAD14 0.3/1.2
RAD14 0.6/1.2
RAD14 0.6/1.5
RAD 8
RAD 68
RAD 74
RAD21
RAD56 0.6/1.0
RAD56 0.6/1.2
RAD60
RAD92
RAD94
A192B
A197
A256
A272
A282
A286
A292
A192B
A197
A256
A272
A282
A286
A292
52 VAC
1.5 Sec
33 F
732752-00
52 VAC
1.5 Sec
33 F
732752-00
52 VAC
1.5 Sec
33 F
732752-00
52 VAC
1.5 Sec
33 F
732752-00
52 VAC
1.5 Sec
33 F
732752-00
52 VAC
1.5 Sec
33 F
732752-00
52 VAC
1.5 Sec
33 F
732752-00
RUN
VOLTAGE
746026-00
BOOST
TIME
Rev. D
SHIFT
CAPAC
Page 5
TUBE TYPE
(HOUSING)
CGR Statorix
200A/240/260
550
(50/110
24 slot)
Comet DO7
25/50 stator
Comet DO9
25/50 stator
Comet DO10
25/50 stator
Comet DO10
25/50 stator
Comet
DO700WX
25/50 stator
TUBE TYPE
(INSERT)
MN640
M641
MN641
M643
MS740
MSN742
RN620
RN640
RSN722
RSN742
DX7
CODE
Switches
1........5
00111
H.S.
SHIFT
CAPAC
3.4 uF
L.S.
SHIFT
CAPAC
N/A
DUAL SPD
STARTER
PART NO.
733317-07
* 735925-07
733317-01
* 735925-01
733317-01
* 735925-01
733317-01
* 735925-01
00000
1.4 sec
240
50
6 uF
31 uF
1.4 sec
240
50
6 uF
31 uF
DX9 0.6/2.0
DX9 1.2/2.0
DI104 0.3/0.8
DI104 0.6/1.0
DI104 0.6/1.3
DI104 0.6/1.8
DI106 0.3/0.8
DI106 0.6/1.0
DI106 0.6/1.3
DI700 0.6/1.0
DI700 1.0/1.8
00000
00011
420
80
150
3.0 sec
1.8 sec
240
80
6 uF
31 uF
10011
420
80
150
3.0 sec
2.2 sec
240
80
6 uF
31 uF
733317-01
* 735925-01
10011
420
80
150
3.0 sec
2.2 sec
240
80
6 uF
31 uF
733317-01
* 735925-01
746026-00
Rev. D
Page 6
TUBE TYPE
(HOUSING)
Dunlee PX1300
3 anode
S stator
(15/30 )
Dunlee PX1400
4 anode
S stator
(15/30 )
(see note 2 at
end of this table)
Dunlee PX1400
4 anode
S stator
(15/30 )
PX1302
PX1312
11100
H.S.
START
VOLTS
240
PX1429
PX1431
PX1436
PX1482
PX1483
01100
240
120
100
3.0 sec
4.5 sec
240
70
6 uF
31 uF
733317-01
* 735925-01
PX1429
PX1431
PX1436
PX1482
10000
400
120
100
3.0 sec
1.9 sec
240
70
6 uF
31 uF
733317-01
* 735925-01
PX1429
PX1431
PX1436
PX1482
PX1483
1.0/2.0 15
0.6/1.0 11
10110
340
60
100
3.0 sec
1.0 sec
240
70
20 uF
60 uF
733317-02
* 735925-02
01110
400
90
80
2.0 sec
0.9 sec
230
70
7.5 uF
47 uF
TUBE TYPE
(INSERT)
CODE
Switches
1........5
H.S.
RUN
VOLTS
120
H.S.
BRAKE
VOLTS
100
H.S.
BRAKE
TIME
3.0 sec
BOOST
TIME
2.3 sec
L.S.
START
VOLTS
240
L.S.
RUN
VOLTS
50
H.S.
SHIFT
CAPAC
6 uF
L.S.
SHIFT
CAPAC
31 uF
DUAL SPD
STARTER
PART NO.
733317-01
* 735925-01
(see note 2 at
end of this table)
Dunlee PX1400
4 anode
Q stator
(6/12 )
GE Maxiray 75
(3 anode)
23/23 equal
impedance E
stator
GE Maxiray
100 (4 anode)
23/23 equal
impedance E
stator
0.3/1.0 11
0.6/1.0 11
0.6/1.2 11
0.6/1.5 11
0.6/1.25 12.5
1.0/2.0 15
733317-03
* 735925-03
00101
400
90
80
3.0 sec
1.0 sec
230
70
7.5 uF
47 uF
733317-03
* 735925-03
746026-00
Rev. D
Page 7
TUBE TYPE
(HOUSING)
Gilardoni
Rotagil
Gilardoni
Rotagil
A/A5
IAE
C52 Super
C100
20/40 stator
IAE
C52
C352
C52 Super
20/40 stator
IAE
C52
C352
20/40 stator
IAE tubes
AND
standard R
stator tubes
Philips
ROT350
ROT351
TUBE TYPE
(INSERT)
AR11-30
AR30-60
AR20-50
AR30-100
AR40-100
RTC 600HS
RTC 700HS
RTC 1000HS
RTM 101H/HS
RTM 102H/HS
RTM 90H/HS
RTM 92H/HS
CODE
Switches
1........5
10101
H.S.
H.S.
H.S.
H.S.
START
RUN
BRAKE BRAKE
VOLTS VOLTS VOLTS
TIME
LOW SPEED OPERATION ONLY
BOOST
TIME
1.4 sec
L.S.
START
VOLTS
220
50 Hz
220
50 Hz
L.S.
RUN
VOLTS
60
50 Hz
60
50 Hz
H.S.
SHIFT
CAPAC
6 uF
L.S.
SHIFT
CAPAC
31 uF
6 uF
31 uF
DUAL SPD
STARTER
PART NO.
733317-01
* 735925-01
733317-01
* 735925-01
01101
340
150 Hz
60
150 Hz
80
3.0 sec
1.4 sec
11011
440
100
120
1.8 sec
1.0 sec
220
80
5 uF
45 uF
733317-05
* 735925-05
11011
440
100
120
1.8 sec
1.0 sec
220
80
5 uF
45 uF
733317-05
* 735925-05
5 uF
45 uF
733317-05
* 735925-05
5 uF
30 uF
6 uF
31 uF
733317-08
* 735925-08
6 uF
31 uF
RTM 78H/HS
11011
440
100
120
1.8 sec
1.0 sec
220
80
AP DX104
X40
X50/AH
Dual speed starters 733317-08 / 735925-08 are special configurations. These may be jumperconfigured to support IAE tubes that require dual speed starter 733317-05 / 735925-05 per this table, or
to support R type stators that use dual speed starter 733317-01 / 735925-01 per this table. Please
refer to note 3 at the end of this section before attempting to use this dual speed starter
configuration.
RO 17/50
00000
1.4 sec
240
50
LOW SPEED OPERATION ONLY
(See note 1 at end of this table)
SRO 22/50
SRO 33/100
746026-00
Rev. D
733317-01
* 735925-01
Page 8
TUBE TYPE
(HOUSING)
TUBE TYPE
(INSERT)
Philips
SRM
ROT350
ROT500
Siemens
BI 125/20/40
Biangulix
8500 RPM
(configured for
150 Hz
operation)
Siemens
30/52R
Opti-150
20/40
S stator
Siemens OptiTop
150/40/80HC-100L
150/40/80HC-102L
14/37 stator
Siemens Optilix
SV150/40/80C-100L
SV150/30/50C-100L
Toshiba
E7252X
XH-106V-2
E7813X
Toshiba
E7239X
XH-106V-2
E7242X
XS-AL stator
E7252X
E7813X
Toshiba
E7132X
XH-121
E7239X
E7240X
E7299X
Toshiba
E7242FX
XH-126
CODE
Switches
1........5
01111
11101
H.S.
START
VOLTS
420
H.S.
RUN
VOLTS
50
H.S.
BRAKE
VOLTS
150
H.S.
BRAKE
TIME
3.0 sec
1.8 sec
400
150 Hz
90
150 Hz
80
3.0 sec
1.9 sec
BOOST
TIME
L.S.
START
VOLTS
240
L.S.
RUN
VOLTS
50
HIGH SPEED
OPERATION
ONLY
H.S.
SHIFT
CAPAC
12.5 uF
L.S.
SHIFT
CAPAC
37.5 uF
DUAL SPD
STARTER
PART NO.
733317-10
* 735925-10
5 uF
N/A
733317-04
00000
400
90
80
3.0 sec
1.9 sec
240
50
5 uF
45 uF
733317-05
* 735925-05
01011
400
80
120
3.0 sec
1.0 sec
240
80
5 uF
30 uF
733317-06
* 735925-06
01011
400
80
120
3.0 sec
1.0 sec
240
80
5 uF
30 uF
733317-06
* 735925-06
00100
400
100
100
3.0 sec
1.2 sec
240
50
6 uF
31 uF
10111
220
60
80
3.0 sec
1.2 sec
130
50
6 uF
46 uF
733317-01
* 735925-01
733317-09
* 735925-09
1.4 sec
240
50
6 uF
31 uF
00000
00000
746026-00
Rev. D
733317-01
* 735925-01
1.4 sec
240
50
6 uF
31 uF
733317-01
* 735925-01
Page 9
TUBE TYPE
(HOUSING)
Toshiba
XH-157
Varian
B100
DX52
Std R stator
(16/50 )
Varian
B100
Q stator
(6/11 )
Varian
B130
B150
Std R stator
(16/50 )
Varian
B130
B150
Q stator
(6/11 )
Varian
B160
B180
R Stator
(16/50 )
10011
H.S.
START
VOLTS
420
H.S.
RUN
VOLTS
80
H.S.
BRAKE
VOLTS
150
H.S.
BRAKE
TIME
3.0 sec
01000
400
100
100
A102
A132
A142
11010
290
70
A192
A272
A282
A286
A292
G256
G292
A192
A272
A282
A286
A292
G256
G292
G1082
G1086
G1092
G1582
G1592
00000
400
00110
11110
TUBE TYPE
(INSERT)
E7254X
E7254FX
E7255X
A102
A132
A142
CODE
Switches
1........5
BOOST
TIME
2.2 sec
L.S.
START
VOLTS
240
L.S.
RUN
VOLTS
80
H.S.
SHIFT
CAPAC
6 uF
L.S.
SHIFT
CAPAC
31 uF
DUAL SPD
STARTER
PART NO.
733317-01
* 735925-01
3.0 sec
1.0 sec
240
60
6 uF
31 uF
733317-01
* 735925-01
60
3.0 sec
0.8 sec
150
50
20 uF
60 uF
733317-02
* 735925-02
100
100
3.0 sec
1.4 sec
240
50
6 uF
31 uF
733317-01
* 735925-01
290
70
60
3.0 sec
1.3 sec
150
50
20 uF
60 uF
733317-02
* 735925-02
400
100
150
3.0 sec
5.0 sec
240
70
6 uF
31 uF
733317-01
* 735925-01
746026-00
Rev. D
Page 10
TUBE TYPE
(HOUSING)
Varian
Diamond
Std R stator
Varian
Emerald
Std R stator
Varian
Saphire
Std R stator
(20/50 )
Varian DX62
300-400 kHu,
STD stator
(23/56 )
Varian DX62U
Universal
300-400 kHu,
configured as
STD or R
stator
(15/36 )
TUBE TYPE
(INSERT)
RAD13
RAD14 0.3/1.2
RAD14 0.6/1.2
RAD14 0.6/1.5
RAD 8
RAD 68
RAD 74
RAD21
RAD56 0.6/1.0
RAD56 0.6/1.2
RAD60
RAD92
RAD94
A192B
A197
A256
A272
A282
A286
A292
A192B
A197
A256
A272
A282
A286
A292
CODE
Switches
1........5
00100
H.S.
START
VOLTS
400
00000
H.S.
RUN
VOLTS
100
H.S.
BRAKE
VOLTS
100
H.S.
BRAKE
TIME
3.0 sec
BOOST
TIME
1.2 sec
L.S.
START
VOLTS
240
L.S.
RUN
VOLTS
50
H.S.
SHIFT
CAPAC
6 uF
L.S.
SHIFT
CAPAC
31 uF
1.4 sec
240
50
6 uF
31 uF
DUAL SPD
STARTER
PART NO.
733317-01
* 735925-01
733317-01
* 735925-01
10100
400
100
100
3.0 sec
2.3 sec
240
50
6 uF
31 uF
733317-01
* 735925-01
00000
400
100
100
3.0 sec
1.4 sec
240
50
6 uF
31 uF
733317-01
* 735925-01
00000
400
100
100
3.0 sec
1.4 sec
240
50
6 uF
31 uF
733317-01
* 735925-01
746026-00
Rev. D
Page 11
THE DUAL SPEED STARTER USES MODULATION STRATEGIES TO OBTAIN THE DESIRED OUTPUTS. MEASURED VOLTAGES MAY NOT AGREE WITH
THOSE LISTED IN THE TABLE. HOWEVER, THE CURRENTS FLOWING IN THE STATOR WINDINGS ARE EQUIVALENT TO THOSE THAT WOULD EXIST
IF THE STATOR WAS EXCITED WITH THESE VOLTAGES.
NOTE 1:
Tube types designated as low speed only or high speed only must be programmed for low speed only or high speed only operation.
Refer to chapter 3, section 3C.5.1 for details (Indico 100 only).
NOTE 2:
Two settings are shown for the Dunlee PX1400 tube with S stator. The settings with the 4.5 sec boost times are per older Dunlee data sheets. The
values with the 1.9 sec boost times are per newer Dunlee data sheets (May 2002). The installer must verify tube compatibility per the appropriate
Dunlee tube data sheet.
Dual speed starter part numbers 733317-XX are used in 400 VAC 3 generators / power supplies and in 480 VAC 3 generators / power supplies
with a line adjusting transformer.
Dual speed starter part numbers 735925-XX are used in 230 VAC 1 generators / power supplies and in 480 VAC 3 direct input generators /
power supplies (using no line adjusting transformer).
NOTE 3:
Dual speed starters 733317-08 / 735925-08 have a jumper selectable phase shift capacitor that allows selection of 5 uF and 30 uF capacitors for
operation with IAE tubes that use dual speed starter 733317-05 / 735925-05 as per table 2, or this may be set to 6 uF and 31 uF for operation with
R type stators that use dual speed starter 733317-01 / 735925-01 as per table 2. THIS STARTER IS TYPICALLY FACTORY SET TO THE 5 uF
AND 30 uF POSITION. CONFIRM PROPER CONFIGURATION PER THE SECTION CONFIGURING DUAL SPEED STARTER 733317-08 /
735925-08 IN CHAPTER 2 BEFORE PROCEEDING.
746026-00
Rev. D
Page 12
CHAPTER 3
SYSTEM INTERFACING, PROGRAMMING,
AEC/ABS CALIBRATION, AND DAP SETUP
AND CALIBRATION (INDICO 100)
3.0.0
INTRODUCTION
3.1.0
Purpose
This chapter describes the interfacing to the generator of the X-ray room imaging equipment, and
programming of the Millenia and Indico 100 family of generators. This chapter also allows the installer to
record the necessary information to complete the installation, as well as to record the programming
values. The installation of the AEC (Automatic Exposure Control) and ABS (Automatic Brightness
Stabilization) devices and their calibration are also covered in this chapter.
Chapter 3F is used in Indico 100 manuals only, and covers setup and calibration of the optional
DAP (Dose-Area Product) meter.
Title
Setup information.
System interfacing
Programming the generator
Automatic Exposure Control (AEC) calibration
Automatic Brightness Stabilization (ABS) calibration
DAP (Dose-Area Product) setup and calibration. Indico 100 only.
Ch # 740904-03
Rev. B
Page 3-1
Page 3-2
Rev. B
Ch # 740904-03
Setup Information
3A
CHAPTER 3
SECTION 3A
SETUP INFORMATION
CONTENTS:
3A.1.0 INTRODUCTION ...............................................................................................................................................3A-2
3A.2.0 INSTALLATION RECORD ................................................................................................................................3A-2
3A.2.1 X-Ray Tubes ..................................................................................................................................................3A-2
3A.2.2 Mains Supply And Fusing ..............................................................................................................................3A-3
3A.2.3 Automatic Exposure Control ..........................................................................................................................3A-3
3A.2.4 Collimator .......................................................................................................................................................3A-3
3A.2.5 Image System ................................................................................................................................................3A-3
3A.2.6 ABS Pickup Assembly....................................................................................................................................3A-4
3A.2.7 Table Type .....................................................................................................................................................3A-4
3A.2.8 Wall Receptor.................................................................................................................................................3A-4
3A.2.9 Receptor Assignment.....................................................................................................................................3A-4
3A.2.10 Miscellaneous Notes....................................................................................................................................3A-4
3A.3.0 X-RAY TUBE AND GENERATOR PARAMETER WORKSHEET.....................................................................3A-5
3A.4.0 IMAGE RECEPTOR PROGRAMMING WORKSHEET.....................................................................................3A-6
3A.5.0 I/O CONFIGURATION WORKSHEET ..............................................................................................................3A-7
Ch # 740904-04
Rev. B
Page 3A-1
3A
Setup Information
3A.1.0 INTRODUCTION
Please record the setup information for your installation in this section before programming the generator.
Enter the information appropriate for your generator model. The data tables will accommodate installations up
to a standard R&F installation with the following: tilting G.I. table with bucky, spot film device, standard image
tube with a medical T.V. system, wall bucky and an overhead tube stand, spot film camera and a digital
acquisition system.
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
l)
m)
n)
o)
p)
q)
r)
s)
t)
u)
v)
w)
x)
y)
z)
aa)
bb)
cc)
Page 3A-2
Rev. B
large =
large =
sec =
start volts =
start volts =
volts =
amps =
amps =
large =
large =
sec =
start volts =
start volts =
volts =
amps =
amps =
small =
small =
run volts =
run volts =
small =
small =
run volts =
run volts =
Ch # 740904-04
Setup Information
3A
50 Hz.
60 Hz.
Line capacity:
kVa
amps
Make: _______________________
Model: _________________
PMT _____________
yes
yes
yes
yes
Digital System
yes
3A.2.4 Collimator
Type:
Compatible with X-ray tube:
Exposure interlock (dry contacts):
Tomo/stereo by-pass:
__________________
yes
no
yes
no
yes
no
dual mode
__ yes
__ yes
__ yes
__ no
__ yes
__ yes
Ch # 740904-04
tri-mode
__ no
__ no
__ no
__ no
__ no
Rev. B
Page 3A-3
3A
Setup Information
Make: _______________________
Model: _________________
Ratio: __________
Model/Make: _______________________
Ratio: __________
Page 3A-4
Rev. B
Ch # 740904-04
Setup Information
3A
Note:
The information in this table is to be derived from the GEN CONFIGURATION menu.
TUBE 2
DEFAULT
SELECTED
TUBE SELECTED
TUBE SPEED
MAX SF KW LS
MAX LF KW LS
MAX SF KW HS
MAX LF KW HS
MAX KV
MAX SF MA
ANODE HU WARNING
ANODE HU LIMIT
SF STANDBY
LF STANDBY
SF MAX
LF MAX
FIL BOOST
FIL PREHEAT
GENERATOR LIMITS
MAX KW
MAX MA
MIN MA
MAX MAS
DEFAULT
SELECTED
Ch # 740904-04
Rev. B
Page 3A-5
3A
Setup Information
Page 3A-6
Rev. B
Ch # 740904-04
Setup Information
3A
STANDBY
PREP
GEN RDY
RAD EXP
FLUORO EXP
***INPUTS***
REMOTE EXP
-----
-----
REMOTE PREP
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
CONSOLE EXP
-----
-----
CONSOLE PREP
-----
-----
TOMO EXP
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
I/I SAFETY
-----
-----
COLL. ITLK
-----
-----
BUCKY CONTACTS
-----
-----
-----
THERMAL SW 1
-----
THERMAL SW 2
-----
DOOR ITLK
---------
-----
---------
---------
-----
-----
SPARE
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
***OUTPUTS***
BKY 1 SELECT
BKY 2 SELECT
BKY 3 SELECT
TOMO/BKY 4 SEL
TOMO/BKY STRT
ALE
COLL. BYPASS
ROOM LIGHT
SPARE
Ch # 740904-04
Rev. B
Page 3A-7
3A
Setup Information
Page 3A-8
Rev. B
Ch # 740904-04
System Interfacing
3B
CHAPTER 3
SECTION 3B
SYSTEM INTERFACING
CONTENTS:
3B.1.0 INTRODUCTION..........................................................................................................................................3B-2
3B.2.0 LOCATIONS OF INPUTS AND OUTPUTS .................................................................................................3B-3
3B.2.1 Generator Pictorial Showing Connections ...............................................................................................3B-3
3B.2.2 Low Speed / Dual Speed Starter ..............................................................................................................3B-4
3B.2.3 High Tension Transformer........................................................................................................................3B-4
3B.2.4 Generator Interface Board........................................................................................................................3B-4
3B.2.5 Generator CPU Board ..............................................................................................................................3B-4
3B.2.6 AEC Board................................................................................................................................................3B-4
3B.2.7 Console CPU Board / Touch Screen........................................................................................................3B-4
3B.2.8 I/0 Expansion Board (optional) .................................................................................................................3B-4
3B.2.9 DAP Interface Board (optional) ................................................................................................................3B-4
3B.2.10 Room Interface Board ............................................................................................................................3B-5
3B.3.0 FEATURES OF THE ROOM INTERFACE BOARD ....................................................................................3B-5
3B.3.1 Inputs ........................................................................................................................................................3B-6
3B.3.2 Outputs .....................................................................................................................................................3B-7
3B.3.3 Selecting Output Voltages ........................................................................................................................3B-7
3B.3.4 Typical Examples .....................................................................................................................................3B-9
3B.3.5 Wiring The Room Interface Terminal Plugs ...........................................................................................3B-10
3B.4.0 GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD PROGRAMMING FOR 110/220 VAC.............................................3B-11
3B.5.0 TYPICAL R&F ROOM CONNECTIONS ....................................................................................................3B-12
3B.6.0 TYPICAL ROOM CABLING AND INTERFACING .....................................................................................3B-13
Ch # 740895-05
Rev. J
Page 3B-1
3B
System Interfacing
3B.1.0 INTRODUCTION
The Indico 100 generator may be interfaced to various tables, imaging systems, tube stands, tomographic
devices, AEC pickups, Buckys, ABS pickups, X-ray tubes and collimators.
The generator interface may be programmed to supply a voltage, an isolated contact, receive a
voltage, or an external isolated contact.
All interfacing cables enter the generator at the rear of the generator cabinet.
NOTE:
WARNING
NOTE:
Page 3B-2
THE GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD HAS 110 AND 220 VAC PRESENT AT ALL TIMES
THAT THE MAIN DISCONNECT IS SWITCHED ON. USE CAUTION WHEN SERVICING THIS
BOARD.
Rev. J
Ch # 740895-05
System Interfacing
3B
ENSURE THAT ALL X-RAY TUBE HOUSINGS ARE CONNECTED TO THE GROUND STUD ON
THE HT TANK. USE A SEPARATE GROUND WIRE FOR EACH TUBE, #10 AWG (6 mm2) OR
GREATER.
Ch # 740895-05
Rev. J
Page 3B-3
3B
System Interfacing
Page 3B-4
Rev. J
Ch # 740895-05
System Interfacing
3B
TB1-TB6
LIVE CONTACT
JW1-JW5
LIVE CONTACT
24VDC
110AC
220AC
DRY CONTACT
JW6-JW8
24 VDC
DRY CONTACT
DRY CONTACT
LIVE CONTACT
DRY CONTACT
Ch # 740895-05
Rev. J
Page 3B-5
3B
System Interfacing
3B.3.1 Inputs
NOTE:
All inputs are opto coupled, select inputs may be configured to use an external +/- 24 VDC source or
may be configured to accept a closed dry contact.
Note the following inputs and jumper configurations per the table below:
The Indico 100 generator is shipped from the factory with all inputs configured for dry
contact inputs.
Page 3B-6
Rev. J
Ch # 740895-05
System Interfacing
3B
3B.3.2 Outputs
NOTE:
Outputs are via relay contacts, some of which may be configured to supply a dry contact closure or to
supply 24 VDC, 110 VAC, or 220 VAC upon closure.
Note the following outputs and jumper configurations per the table below:
To supply power to a grounded load, use TB1 pin 12 (for example) and jumper on dry contacts. This
applies also to TB1 pin 1, TB2 pin 12, TB2 pin 1 and TB3 pin 12.
The Indico 100 generator is shipped from the factory with JW1 to JW5 configured for dry
contacts, and JW6 to JW8 configured for 24 VDC output on relay closure.
NOTE:
Ch # 740895-05
Rev. J
Page 3B-7
3B
System Interfacing
Collimator lamps (24 VDC 150 watts). These exceed the 4 Amp rating of the 24 VDC supply. Contact your
generator supplier regarding the optional 24VAC / 30VDC room power kit, which may be used for
collimators and other room electromechanical devices.
Fluorescent lamps. These have high starting currents and generate transients when the tube strikes.
Some inductive loads may cause difficulties (for example some motors, under table tube fans, and
solenoids).
SOME INSTALLATIONS REQUIRE THAT THE OUTPUTS OF RELAYS K1, K2, K3, K4, K6 OR K8 DRIVE
THE INPUTS OF OPTO COUPLERS. IN INSTALLATIONS WHERE THESE RELAYS SOURCE 110 OR
220 VAC, THE LEAKAGE CURRENT THROUGH THE R-C SNUBBER ACROSS THE RELAY CONTACTS
MAY BE SUFFICIENT TO ENERGIZE THE OPTO COUPLERS WHEN THE RELAYS ARE OPEN.
IF THIS IS EXPERIENCED, THE R-C SNUBBER SHOULD BE DISCONNECTED FROM THE
CIRCUIT. CUTTING AND REMOVING THE JUMPER WIRES PER THE TABLE ON THE NEXT PAGE
WILL DISABLE THE R-C SNUBBER CIRCUIT. THE JUMPER WIRES SHOULD BE CUT AS NEAR AS
POSSIBLE TO THE PADS ON THE BOARD, THEN AS MUCH AS IS POSSIBLE OF THE WIRE JUMPER
SHOULD BE REMOVED. THIS IS NECESSARY TO WITHSTAND THE OPEN CIRCUIT VOLTAGE
ACROSS THE RELAY CONTACTS.
Page 3B-8
Rev. J
Ch # 740895-05
System Interfacing
3B
JUMPER WIRE
JW12
JW9
JW11
JW10
JW14
JW13
Wire Jumper
K2 (24 VDC)
K1 (110 VAC)
K4 (24 VDC)
K3 (220 VAC)
K6 (dry contacts)
K12 (24 VDC)
K13 (dry contacts)
K7 (24 VDC)
K2 when selected will provide 24 VDC to a load at TB1 pins 11 and 12.
K1 when selected will supply 110 VAC to a load at TB1 pins 1 and 2.
K4 when selected will supply 24 VDC to a load at TB2 pins 11 and 12.
K3 when selected will supply 220 VAC to a load at TB2 pins 1 and 2.
K6 when selected will supply closed contacts at TB3 pins 11 and 12.
K12 when selected will supply 24 VDC at TB6 pins 1 and 2.
K13 when selected will supply closed contacts at TB6 pins 11 and 12.
K7 will supply 24 VDC at TB4 pin 3 for tube 1, or 24 VDC at TB4 pin 2 for tube 2. Ground reference will
be at TB4 pin 1.
Ch # 740895-05
Rev. J
Page 3B-9
3B
System Interfacing
Page 3B-10
Remove the required mating connectors from TB1 to TB6 on the room interface board.
Back out the wire retaining screws as required.
Dress the interface cable with a minimum of 5 inch (130 mm) flying leads.
Strip each wire .25 inches (6 mm).
Insert the wire into the plug and tighten the terminal screw. Several wires may be inserted into a single
terminal connection.
Be sure the plug numbering matches the input/output signals.
Insert the plug into the room interface plug as shown in Figure 3B-4.
Leave sufficient cable to allow interface access.
To eliminate confusion, label each plug.
Cover plates are located on the rear access panels to provide strain relief for the interface cables.
Holes are provided on the shelf at the back of the cabinet, below the room interface board, for
attaching additional strain relief hardware such as C or P clamps as desired by the installer.
Rev. J
Ch # 740895-05
System Interfacing
3B
110/220 VAC is present at TB9 and TB10 at all times that the generator main disconnect is switched
ON.
110/220 VAC is present at TB9 and TB10 only when the generator itself is switched ON.
The desired selection is made using JW1 on the generator interface board. Setting the jumper to JW1 pins
1-2 selects the condition where 110/220 VAC is present at TB9 and TB10 only when the generator is
switched ON.
Setting the jumper to JW1 pins 2-3 selects 110/220 VAC to be present at TB9 and TB10 at all
times that the generator main disconnect is switched ON.
Refer to figure 3B-5, this shows the jumper position JW1 pins 1-2 which only provides for 110/220 VAC
when the generator is switched ON.
Ch # 740895-05
Rev. J
Page 3B-11
3B
System Interfacing
Page 3B-12
Rev. J
Ch # 740895-05
System Interfacing
3B
Cable assembly #1
1. Bucky 3 select (image receptor).
2. Table stepper input, indicates to the generator that a stepping table has moved to the
next step.
3. Tomo Bucky select, usually used to select a tomographic device.
Cable assembly #2
1. Bucky 1 select (image receptor), usually used to select the R&F table Bucky.
2. Collimator interlock, will prevent an exposure if the collimator inputs are not satisfied.
3. Bucky contacts, all Bucky contacts are paralleled at this connector. Diode isolation
may be required.
4. Bucky 2 select (image receptor), usually used to select vertical wall Bucky.
Cable assembly #3
1. Collimator bypass. Usually used with the collimator associated with the tomographic
device, to allow non-PBL operation in the tomographic mode.
2. Remote tomo select, used for selecting tomography operation from a remote R&F table.
3. Tomo start, will issue a start to sweep signal to a tomographic device.
4. Tomographic exposure; the generator waits for a switch closure during the tomographic
sweep.
Cable assembly #4
1. Room light. Provides a closed contact to energize the X-ray room warning light.
Maximum 250 watts.
2. Door interlock. Requires a closed dry contact to interlock the generator exposure with
the X-ray rooms entrance door.
3. Tube select indicator (source select indicator). Indicates which X-ray tube has been
selected.
4. Optional thermal switch inputs.
Cable assembly #5
1. Mag. select. Interfaces with the image intensifier to select the magnification modes.
2. Multiple-spot exposure. When multi-spot operation is selected at the spot film device,
(example: 4 on 1) and this input receives a closed dry contact, the AEC calibration will
be offset to compensate for the small fields.
Cable assembly #6
1. Interfaces to the table (conventional or remote R&F), the X-ray prep, expose and fluoro
footswitch.
2. The I.I. safety position interlock switch, used if the I.I. may be removed from the spot
film device.
3. ALE - required if an SFC or a serial changer is used.
4. Spare output.
Ch # 740895-05
Rev. J
Page 3B-13
3B
System Interfacing
Page 3B-14
Cable assembly #7
1. Must be a #10 AWG (6 mm2) wire or greater, connected from the housing of both X-ray
tubes to ground at the high tension transformer.
Cable assemblies #8
1. Pair of H.T. cables from the over table (tube-1) X-ray tube to the HT Transformer.
2. Pair of H.T. cables from the under table (tube-2) X-ray tube to the HT transformer.
Rev. J
Ch # 740895-05
3C
CHAPTER 3
SECTION 3C
PROGRAMMING THE GENERATOR
CONTENTS:
3C.1.0 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................... 3C-2
3C.1.1 Entering Into Programming Mode......................................................................................................... 3C-2
3C.2.0 GENERATOR SETUP MENU .................................................................................................................. 3C-3
3C.3.0 UTILITY MENU......................................................................................................................................... 3C-4
3C.3.1 Setting Time And Date.......................................................................................................................... 3C-4
3C.3.2 Error Log ............................................................................................................................................... 3C-4
3C.3.3 Statistics................................................................................................................................................ 3C-5
3C.3.4 Console................................................................................................................................................. 3C-5
3C.4.0 APR EDITOR............................................................................................................................................ 3C-7
3C.5.0 GENERATOR CONFIGURATION ........................................................................................................... 3C-8
3C.5.1 Tube Selection ...................................................................................................................................... 3C-9
3C.5.2 Generator Limits ................................................................................................................................. 3C-13
3C.5.3 Receptor Setup ................................................................................................................................... 3C-14
3C.5.4 I/O Configuration3C-........................................................................................................................... 3C-19
3C.5.5 AEC Setup .......................................................................................................................................... 3C-22
3C.5.6 AEC Calibration .................................................................................................................................. 3C-23
3C.5.7 Fluoro Setup ....................................................................................................................................... 3C-23
3C.5.8 Tube Calibration ................................................................................................................................. 3C-23
3C.6.0 DAP SETUP ........................................................................................................................................... 3C-23
3C.7.0 DATA LINK ............................................................................................................................................. 3C-23
3C.8.0 CONSOLE TEST MODE........................................................................................................................ 3C-24
Ch # 740904-05
Rev. H
Page 3C-1
3C
3C.1.0 INTRODUCTION
The generator is programmed using the operator control console (except touch screen, as noted below).
All programming menus are displayed on the LCD display window on the console. The ten soft key
buttons (1 to 10 in the figure below) are used to navigate through the programming screens and to select
and enter values in this section.
In this section, SELECT means to press the button adjacent to the desired function shown in the
LCD display window.
When using the touch screen console, the generator must be programmed and calibrated via
GenWare. This requires the GenWare utility software, a laptop computer (or equivalent), and a
null modem cable.
The touch screen console setup is performed via the console SYSTEM UTILITIES function. Refer
to section 7 of the touch screen operators manual for the procedure to access the SYSTEM
UTILITIES menu for console setup and the DATA LINK mode in order to communicate with
GenWare.
8
9
10
RESET
Page 3C-2
Rev. H
Ch # 740904-05
3C
Step
1.
2.
3.
Action
Start with the generator switched OFF.
While pressing and holding the RESET
button, press the generator POWER ON
button on the console.
Enter the password by pressing the button
sequence: [1] - [8] - [4] - [5].
Result
The generator will go through its start-up
sequence, then display the message
ENTER PASSWORD.
The GENERATOR SETUP menu will
now be displayed as shown in the next
section.
Error log
Statistics
Console
APR EDITOR
GEN CONFIGURATION
Tube selection
Generator limits
Receptor setup
I/O configuration
AEC setup
AEC calibration
Fluoro setup
Tube calibration
DAP Setup
DATA LINK
EXIT SETUP
Ch # 740904-05
Rev. H
Page 3C-3
3C
Action
From the UTILITY menu, select SET TIME & DATE.
Select YEAR and press the + or - buttons to set the year.
Select MONTH and press the + or - buttons to set the month.
Select DAY and press the + or - buttons to set the date.
Select HOUR and press the + or - buttons to set the hour (in 24 hour format).
Select MIN and press the + or - buttons to set the minutes.
Select EXIT to return to the UTILITY menu.
Page 3C-4
Rev. H
Ch # 740904-05
3C
3.
Action
From the UTILITY menu select ERROR
LOG.
Select ERROR # and press the + or buttons to scroll through the error log.
Result
3C.3.3 Statistics
The STATISTICS menu shows the tube exposure count, accumulated fluoro hours if applicable, and
the accumulated generator exposure count. This also allows resetting of select counters.
* STATISTICS *
TUBE 1 EXP:
500
RESET TUBE 1 EXP
TUBE 2 EXP:
600
RESET TUBE 2 EXP
FLUORO HOURS:
100
RESET FLUORO HOURS
TOTAL EXP:
1100
EXIT
Use these steps to access the statistics menu. RAD only or 1 tube generators will show a subset of
the above menu items.
Step
1.
2.
3.
Action
From the UTILITY menu select STATISTICS.
To reset the tube exposure counter, select RESET TUBE 1 EXP or RESET TUBE 2
EXP. Select RESET FLUORO HOURS to reset the fluoro exposure counter.
Select EXIT to return to the UTILITY menu.
3C.3.4 Console
The CONSOLE menus allow setting of specific console operating features to suit operator preferences,
and also for resetting of the console parameters to the factory defaults (some models).
Console utilities screen 2, which includes LOGO, LANGUAGE, and LOAD CONSOLE DEFAULTS
selections is only available when running the console software from flash memory on 31 X 42 cm
consoles. Otherwise, these selections are made via SW1 on the console as described in chapter 2.
CONSOLE utilities screen 1
* CONSOLE *
SLOW KEY REPEAT:
200MS
MED. KEY REPEAT:
150MS
FAST KEY REPEAT:
75MS
SPEAKER VOLUME: 15
EXIT
Ch # 740904-05
LCD SCREEN
APR MODE: NO
+
>>
Rev. H
Page 3C-5
3C
NO
<<
Definition of console parameters as used in this section.
SPEAKER VOLUME:
Sets the speaker volume for the control console in the range 1
to 15.
LCD SCREEN
APR MODE:
LOGO
LANGUAGE
Selects the language for status and error messages (the APR
text must be changed via the CPI GenWare utility software).
LOAD CONSOLE
DEFAULTS
Page 3C-6
Rev. H
Ch # 740904-05
3C
Action
From the UTILITY menu select CONSOLE. This accesses CONSOLE utilities
screen 1.
Select the desired parameter to change. SLOW, MED, FAST KEY REPEAT and
SPEAKER VOLUME are adjusted by pressing the + or - buttons. LCD SCREEN
and APR MODE are toggled by pressing the adjacent selection button.
Press >> to select CONSOLE utilities screen 2. This is only available on 31 X 42
cm Indico 100 consoles running the console software from flash memory. Refer
to the section Console software / EPROM in chapter 6 for details.
Select the parameter to be changed. Refer to the previous definitions.
Press the selection button for that parameter to toggle the available selections.
Select << to return to CONSOLE utilities screen 1.
Select EXIT to return to the UTILITY menu.
Select EXIT again to return to the GENERATOR SETUP menu.
If the console defaults are to be reset, the generator must be switched OFF and
then ON again. The console will prompt for a YES or NO to loading defaults
when it is powered on again. Select YES to both prompts to reset the console
and APR defaults. Selecting NO will not update the defaults.
The LOAD CONSOLE DEFAULTS setting automatically resets to NO the next
time the generator is switched on.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
ENABLED
DISABLED
The generator stores the last APR editor setting prior to being switched OFF. If the APR
editor was previously ENABLED, APR changes may subsequently be made and then
saved in normal operating mode without the need to manually set the APR editor to
ENABLED. To disable APR technique changes, the APR editor must be set to DISABLED.
Ch # 740904-05
Rev. H
Page 3C-7
3C
NOTE:
*
* The >> function is only available on generators with the DAP (Dose-Area Product) option.
Refer to section 3F for details.
Page 3C-8
Rev. H
Ch # 740904-05
3C
EXIT
The next menus show the default tube selections. The
screens, and the actual tube selections, may not be exactly as shown.
A192B 0.6/1.2
A256 0.6/1.0
A292 0.6/1.2
A272 0.3/0.6
EXIT
RAD14
RAD21
RAD56
RAD60
0.6/1.2
0.6/1.2
0.6/1.2
0.6/1.2
<<
DX93HS 0.6/1.5
DX101HS 0.6/1.3
MX75 1.0/2.0
MX100 0.6/1.25
<<
number
of
tube
selection
* TUBE 1 SELECTION *
G256 0.6/1.0
G292 0.6/1.2
G1082 0.3/1.0
RAD8 1.0/2.0
>>
* TUBE 1 SELECTION *
RAD74 0.6/1.5
RAD92 0.6/1.2
DX10HS 0.6/1.0
DX92HS 0.6/1.2
>>
* TUBE 1 SELECTION *
RO1750 0.6/1.3
>>
The following menu is only available if additional tubes have been downloaded via a computer
running CPI GenWare software.
* TUBE 1 SELECTION *
***USER DOWNLOADED TUBES DISPLAYED HERE**
<<
RETURN
Ch # 740904-05
Rev. H
Page 3C-9
3C
3.
4.
5.
Action
From the GEN CONFIGURATION menu
select TUBE SELECTION.
Select TUBE 1 or TUBE 2. This step is not
available on one tube generators; go
directly to step 3.
Select the X-ray tube type to be assigned
to that tube location by pressing the button
adjacent to the desired selection. Use the
>> and << buttons to navigate through the
tube selection menus if the desired tube is
not displayed on the current screen.
Once the desired tube has been selected,
parameters for that tube are displayed
showing the default values. DO NOT
adjust the default values at this time.
Additional tube types may be downloaded
using the CPI GenWare utility software.
Refer to section 3C.7.0 DATA LINK.
Result
When the desired tube is selected, the default limits are displayed. Please consult the X-ray tube data
sheet(s) before making any changes.
The dual speed starter operates at 60 or 180 Hz (50 or 150 Hz for some tube types) independent
of line frequency. The low speed starter operates at 50 Hz for 50 Hz mains, or 60 Hz for 60 Hz mains.
Therefore for generators equipped with the low speed starter, the 60 Hz tube ratings are automatically
derated for 50 Hz operation if required.
PLEASE DO NOT CHANGE ANY DEFAULTS UNLESS THE IMPACT OF THOSE CHANGES IS
CLEARLY UNDERSTOOD. INITIAL CALIBRATION SHOULD BE PERFORMED USING THE
DEFAULT VALUES.
NOTE:
Page 3C-10
BEFORE CHANGING X-RAY TUBE DEFAULT PARAMETERS, PLEASE FILL IN THE X-RAY
TUBE AND GENERATOR PARAMETER WORKSHEET. A BLANK FORM THAT SHOULD BE
PHOTOCOPIED IS LOCATED IN SECTION 3A 3.0. THIS ALLOWS RECORDING OF THE
DEFAULT VALUES AND THE NEW (CHANGED) VALUES.
Rev. H
Ch # 740904-05
3C
menus
appear
after
RETURN
*TUBE 1: RAD60
These
>>
0.6/1.2
12 REV 1.4*
+
-
<<
>>
*TUBE 1: RAD60
SF STANDBY: 2.5A
LF STANDBY: 2.5A
SF MAX: 5.2A
LF MAX: 5.5A
<<
0.6/1.2
12 REV 1.4*
FIL BOOST: 200MS
FIL PREHEAT: 800MS
+
RETURN
Definitions of tube limits as used in this section. These settings are tube specific, i.e. tube 1 and
tube 2 each have their own tube limit settings.
TUBE SPEED
MAX SF KW LS
MAX LF KW LS
MAX KV:
MAX SF KW HS
MAX LF KW HS:
MAX SF MA
ANODE HU WARNING
ANODE HU LIMIT
Ch # 740904-05
Rev. H
Page 3C-11
3C
SF STANDBY
LF STANDBY
SF MAX
LF MAX
FIL BOOST
FIL PREHEAT
The time that the filament is held at the required emission level
before an exposure is permitted
Typically, the boost time should be between 200 and 250 msec, and the preheat time should be in the
range of 700 - 800 ms.
If in doubt, monitor the filament feedback and be sure the filament is not being over or under driven
during an exposure.
Standby current must be below the emission point. If the standby current is too high, the lower
fluoro mA values may not calibrate properly resulting in a high mA fault error during fluoro
operation.
If the maximum filament current is increased, be careful not to exceed the tube manufacturers
specifications.
Use these steps to modify the tube defaults.
Step
Action
1.
Use the >>, <<, and RETURN buttons to navigate through the TUBE
DEFAULTS screens.
2.
Select the appropriate default value to change. Refer to the definitions on the
previous page.
3.
Use the + and - buttons to change the selected values. Pressing the TUBE
SPEED button toggles the selection between LOW, HIGH and DUAL speed
(generators with dual speed starter only).
4.
When finished altering the tube default values, press the <<, RETURN or EXIT
button(s) as required to return to the TUBE SELECTION menu (two tube
generators) or GEN CONFIGURATION menu (one tube generators).
5.
Select the second X-ray tube if desired by repeating the previous steps (two
tube generators only).
PLEASE ENSURE THAT THE SELECTED X-RAY TUBE STATOR(S) ARE COMPATIBLE
WITH THE LOW SPEED OR DUAL SPEED STARTER IN YOUR GENERATOR.
6.
Select EXIT to return to the GEN CONFIGURATION menu (two tube
generators only).
Page 3C-12
Rev. H
Ch # 740904-05
3C
MAX KW
MAX MA
MIN MA
MAX MAS
BEFORE MAKING ANY CHANGES IN THIS SECTION, PLEASE CONSULT THE X-RAY TUBE DATA
SHEETS TO ENSURE THAT THE PROPOSED CHANGES DO NOT EXCEED THE
MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDED LIMITS.
BEFORE CHANGING GENERATOR LIMITS, PLEASE FILL IN THE X-RAY TUBE AND
GENERATOR PARAMETER WORKSHEET. A BLANK FORM THAT SHOULD BE
PHOTOCOPIED IS LOCATED IN SECTION 3A 3.0. THIS ALLOWS RECORDING OF THE
DEFAULT VALUES AND THE NEW (CHANGED) VALUES.
NOTE:
Action
From the GEN CONFIGURATION menu select GENERATOR LIMITS.
Select a limit to be changed. Refer to the previous definitions.
Use the + and - buttons to change the selected values.
When finished altering the generator default values, press EXIT to return to the
GEN CONFIGURATION menu.
Ch # 740904-05
Rev. H
Page 3C-13
3C
>>
MENU 3 (Configuration A)
* RECEPTOR SETUP [sym]*
SF/LF SWITCH: MAN
AEC BACKUP: FIXED
AEC BACKUP MAS: 500
AEC BACKUP MS: 3200
DEFAULTS
+
-
<<
OR
MENU 3 (Configuration B)
* RECEPTOR SETUP [sym]*
SF/LF SWITCH: MAN
AEC BACKUP: FIXED
AEC BACKUP MAS: 500
AEC BACKUP MS: 3200
DEFAULTS
AEC CHANNEL: 1
+
-
<<
Page 3C-14
Rev. H
Ch # 740904-05
3C
>>
DENSITY:
0
+
-
<<
Definitions of receptor setup programming as used in this section follow. The selections made
when programming a receptor apply to that receptor only. Some of the functions listed are
optional.
TUBE
TOMO
FLUORO
SERIAL
INTERFACE OPTS
Ch # 740904-05
Rev. H
Page 3C-15
3C
FUNCTIONAL OPTS
RECEPTOR SYM
FLUORO HANG
Sets the time that the rotor will continue spinning after a fluoro
exposure has terminated.
RAD HANG
Sets the time that the rotor will continue spinning after a rad
exposure has terminated.
Sets the time that the exposure will continue after the fluoro
footswitch has been released. This enables a frame store
device to complete the last image.
MEMORY
Sets the default tomo backup time when tomo is selected via
the REMOTE TOMO SELECT input.
SF/LF SWITCH
AEC BACKUP
Page 3C-16
Sets the maximum backup mAs, to a limit of 500 mAs (600 mAs
for some generator models).
AEC BACKUP MS
Rev. H
Ch # 740904-05
3C
DEFAULTS
AEC CHANNEL
NOTE:
TECHNIQUE
FOCUS
FILM SCREEN
LEFT FIELD
Selects the left field on the AEC device when AEC is selected.
CENTER FIELD
RIGHT FIELD
KV
MA
MS
DENSITY
Ch # 740904-05
Rev. H
Page 3C-17
3C
RECEPTOR
1
RECEPTOR
2
RECEPTOR
3
RECEPTOR
4
RECEPTOR
5
RECEPTOR
6
TECHNIQUE
FOCUS
FILM SCREEN
LEFT FIELD
CENTER FIELD
RIGHT FIELD
KV
MA
MS
DENSITY
DO NOT SWITCH OFF THE GENERATOR WHILE IN *RECEPTOR SETUP
DEFAULTS* MENUS 4 AND 5. DOING SO WILL CAUSE THE UPDATED RECEPTOR
NOTE:
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Page 3C-18
Action
From the GEN CONFIGURATION menu select RECEPTOR SETUP.
Select the desired image receptor to be programmed.
Use the << and >> buttons to navigate through the screens. As noted earlier,
the RECEPTOR SETUP DEFAULTS menus (if enabled) are accessed by
selecting DEFAULTS in screen 3.
Select the appropriate parameter to change. Refer to the definitions on the
previous pages in this section.
Certain selections are toggled (press the selection button again to change the
value), other parameters must be selected via the adjacent selection button.
The values are then changed using the + and - buttons.
When finished setting the parameters and/or defaults for the current receptor,
press the
<< or EXIT button(s) as required to return to the GEN
CONFIGURATION menu.
Reselect RECEPTOR SETUP, then select the next receptor to be
programmed.
When finished programming all receptors, return to the GEN
CONFIGURATION menu as per step 6.
Rev. H
Ch # 740904-05
3C
CONSOLE PREP:
TOMO EXP:
REM. TOMO SEL.:
I/I SAFETY:
<<
COLL. ITLK:
BUCKY CONTACTS:
SPARE:
THERMAL SW 1:
<<
THERMAL SW 2:
DOOR ITLK:
MULTI SPOT EXP:
<<
BKY 1 SELECT:
BKY 2 SELECT:
BKY 3 SELECT:
TOMO/BKY 4 SEL:
<<
>>
* INPUTS [sym] *
...---.........
........ ---...
---............
...---...-----
>>
* INPUTS [sym] *
...---...-----.........---...
------...-----------...-----
STANDBY STATE
>>
* OUTPUTS [sym] *
---------------------------------------------------------
STANDBY STATE
>>
* INPUTS [sym] *
-----...--------- ...-------............
STANDBY STATE
STANDBY STATE
>>
Ch # 740904-05
Rev. H
Page 3C-19
3C
TOMO/BKY STRT:
ALE:
COLL. BYPASS:
<<
>>
* OUTPUTS [sym] *
-----------------------------
ROOM LIGHT:
SPARE:
<<
STANDBY STATE
STANDBY STATE
RETURN
The STATE button on the upper right hand side of the menu selects the current state. The word STATE
will be preceded by the description of the state: for example, STANDBY.
The arrow in the lower middle area points to one of the five states described below. Moving to the
next state is accomplished by pressing the STATE button. The states are as follows:
STANDBY
Sets the state of the I/O when the generator is in standby or idle
mode. Standby mode also defines the state when the generator
is in fluoroscopic hangover.
PREP
Sets the state of the I/O when the generator first enters PREP
mode.
GEN RDY
Sets the state of the I/O when the generator has completed
PREP mode and is ready to expose.
RAD EXP
FLUORO EXP
Pressing one of the buttons next to the selected function on the left of the display selects that function.
The logic level of the selected state is then changed by pressing the selection button again (low = off /
inactive, high = on / active).
For inputs, a logic low means that the input is ignored during that state. A Logic high requires
that the input be satisfied before the generator will advance to the next state. If multiple inputs are
programmed high, for example if REMOTE PREP and CONSOLE PREP are both high in the prep state,
then both inputs will need to be active before the generator will enter the prep state.
Setting an output to logic low causes the relay associated with that output to be de-energized
during the selected state. Logic high will cause the associated relay to be energized during the selected
state.
Certain functions have states indicated by a dotted line. The dotted line indicates invalid states,
which cannot be altered. Only states shown by a solid line can be changed. Refer to figure 3C-2 for
examples of a TYPICAL input configuration.
Page 3C-20
Rev. H
Ch # 740904-05
3C
REMOTE EXP:
NOTE:
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Action
From the GEN CONFIGURATION menu, select I/O CONFIGURATION.
Select the desired receptor to be programmed.
Select the desired input(s) or output(s) to program. Use the >>, <<, and RETURN
buttons to navigate through the screens.
Press the STATE button to cycle through and select the desired state to program.
Select the function to be programmed (example REMOTE EXP). Press the
selection button again to change the logic level for that state. States with dashed
lines (...) CANNOT BE CHANGED.
Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each state in the selected I/O function.
Repeat steps 3 to 6 for each input or output to be programmed.
When finished the I/O programming for the current receptor, press the << or EXIT
button(s) as required to return to the GEN CONFIGURATION menu.
Reselect I/O CONFIGURATION, then select the next receptor to be programmed.
When finished programming all receptors, return to the GEN CONFIGURATION
menu as per step 8.
Ch # 740904-05
Rev. H
Page 3C-21
3C
YES
YES
YES
CHAMBER TYPE:
FILM SCREEN 1 :
FILM SCREEN 2 :
FILM SCREEN 3 :
>>
ION
YES
YES
YES
MENU 2 (Some models only). Do not adjust these values at this time.
* AEC SETUP*
C FIELD COMP:
L FIELD COMP:
R FIELD COMP:
<<
0
0
+
-
Definitions of AEC SETUP parameters as used in this section. Some of the functions listed are
optional.
Page 3C-22
CHANNEL
LEFT FIELD
Enables or disables the left field for the selected AEC channel
(NO is disabled).
CENTER FIELD
RIGHT FIELD
CHAMBER TYPE
FILM SCREEN 1
FILM SCREEN 2
FILM SCREEN 3
R FIELD COMP
C FIELD COMP
L FIELD COMP
Rev. H
Ch # 740904-05
3C
4.
5.
6.
Action
From the GEN CONFIGURATION menu select AEC SETUP.
Select the AEC channel to be setup. Pressing the CHANNEL button will scroll
through the available AEC channels.
Select the desired parameter to change for that AEC channel. DO NOT adjust
the R, C, or L field compensation settings at this time (if available); these are
part of the AEC calibration procedure.
Press the selection button for that parameter to toggle the available selections.
Repeat steps 2 to 4 to program each AEC channel.
When finished the AEC SETUP, press EXIT to return to the GEN
CONFIGURATION menu.
NOTE: The GenWare program should be closed before exiting the DATA LINK function on the console.
Failure to do so may require that the console be switched off and then on again in order to reinitialize communication with the generator.
Ch # 740904-05
Rev. H
Page 3C-23
3C
To enter this special mode, press and hold button 5 (figure 3C-1) while pressing the generator
POWER ON button.
The part number and revision of the boot loader software will be displayed for approximately 5
seconds after power-up.
A special utility menu will be entered next, with the following options.
CONSOLE TEST
FLASH LOAD
MAIN APPLICATION
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Page 3C-24
Action
From the special UTILITY MENU, select CONSOLE TEST.
The logo will be displayed for several seconds in normal video, and then in
reverse video. The LCD contrast may be adjusted at this time.
After the logo display is finished, a prompt is displayed asking if you wish to
test the RAM. Press YES or NO to proceed with the RAM test.
Testing the RAM by pressing YES will erase the contents of the RAM. If
the RAM is erased, you will need to restore the console defaults, and use
GenWare to restore the APR data.
At the prompt ARE YOU DOING ESS?, press NO.
A serial loop back test is performed next. Pressing START to test ch. A will test
serial channel A (the port connected to J5, the generator interface).
Testing serial channel B (the port connected to J2, the data link) requires a
special loop back connector. This may be made by simply connecting a wire
jumper from pin 2 to pin 3 of a 9 pin female D connector. Plug this loop back
connector into J2 on the console for this test.
Press START if using a loop back connector. Press SKIP to omit this test if a
loop back connector is not available.
The 7 segment LEDs in the radiographic and fluoroscopic display window are
tested next. The individual segments of the first LED will be lit in sequence.
Confirm that only one segment lights at one time on the LED being tested.
If all segments plus the decimal point light sequentially on the first LED being
tested, press PASSED to test the next LED.
Repeat step 7 to test all 7 segment LEDs.
Rev. H
Ch # 740904-05
3C
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
The backlight LEDs for the radiographic kV, mAs, mA, etc indicators are lit
next. The term EYE on the LCD display refers to the X-ray exposure indicator,
which should light during this sequence.
Press PASSED when finished this test.
The backlight LEDs for the fluoroscopic ABS, kV, mA, etc indicators are lit next.
The term REMOTE on the LCD display refers to the optional remote fluoro
control, which is also tested at this time, if fitted.
Press PASSED when finished this test.
The image receptor LEDs and the prep LED are tested next.
Press PASSED when finished this test.
The technique selector LEDs, focus, and film screen LEDs are tested next.
Press PASSED when finished this test.
The fluoro magnification, dose, ABS, pulsed fluoro, fluoro exposure, and AEC
field select LEDs are tested next.
Press PASSED when finished this test.
All LEDs and displays are lit next.
Press YES or NO when finished this test.
All LEDs and displays are turned off next.
Press YES or NO when finished this test.
The buttons on the console are tested next. Press each button as prompted.
The external prep and external X-ray buttons (hand switch) are tested next.
Press the hand switch as requested. If no hand switch is used, the console
prep and X-ray button may be pressed at the external prep and exposure
prompt.
The fluoro foot switch is tested next. Press the foot switch if applicable, press
SKIP if a foot switch is not used.
The console prep and X-ray buttons are tested next. Press each button as
prompted.
Speaker 1 is tested next. The speaker volume will continuously be ramped
from 1 (low) to 8 (maximum).
Press PASSED when finished this test.
Speaker 2 is tested next. The speaker volume will continuously be ramped
from 1 (low) to 8 (maximum).
Press PASSED when finished this test.
This completes the console self test. Note any tests that failed, and discontinue
use of the suspected faulty equipment until repairs are made.
Ch # 740904-05
Rev. H
Page 3C-25
3C
Page 3C-26
Rev. H
Ch # 740904-05
AEC Calibration
3D
CHAPTER 3
SECTION 3D
AEC CALIBRATION
CONTENTS:
3D.1.0 INTRODUCTION..............................................................................................................................................3D-2
3D.1.1 AEC Limitations: Minimum Response Time ................................................................................................3D-3
3D.1.2 AEC Limitations: Maximum Exposure Times ..............................................................................................3D-4
3D.1.3 Film/Screen Response vs. kVp....................................................................................................................3D-5
3D.1.4 AEC Calibration Range ................................................................................................................................3D-6
3D.1.5 Multiple Spot Compensation ........................................................................................................................3D-7
3D.2.0 PRECALIBRATION SETUP ............................................................................................................................3D-8
3D.2.1 AEC Setup Worksheet .................................................................................................................................3D-8
3D.2.2 AEC Precalibration Checks........................................................................................................................3D-10
3D.2.3 AEC Chamber Installation ..........................................................................................................................3D-10
3D.2.4 AEC Pickup Connections (Overview) ........................................................................................................3D-12
3D.2.5 AEC Board (Solid State Chambers)...........................................................................................................3D-13
3D.2.6 AEC Board (Ion Chambers) .......................................................................................................................3D-15
3D.2.7 AEC Board (Universal AEC Board) ...........................................................................................................3D-17
3D.2.8 AEC Board (Universal AEC Board With Short AEC Time Compensation) ..............................................3D-19
3D.3.0 PRECALIBRATION NOTES: .........................................................................................................................3D-21
3D.4.0 AEC USING A PMT........................................................................................................................................3D-22
3D.5.0 AEC FIELD BALANCE...................................................................................................................................3D-23
3D.6.0 AEC CALIBRATION (TABLE BUCKY)..........................................................................................................3D-23
3D.6.1 Break point calibration worksheet ..............................................................................................................3D-28
3D.7.0 SHORT AEC TIME COMPENSATION (IF APPLICABLE) ...........................................................................3D-30
3D.8.0 AEC DENSITY CALIBRATION......................................................................................................................3D-31
3D.9.0 RLF COMPENSATION ..................................................................................................................................3D-35
3D.10.0 MULTIPLE SPOT COMPENSATION..........................................................................................................3D-38
3D.11.0 AEC CALIBRATION (WALL BUCKY) .........................................................................................................3D-40
3D.12.0 AEC CALIBRATION (AUX, SFD, ETC).......................................................................................................3D-43
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-1
3D
AEC Calibration
3D.1.0 INTRODUCTION
This section covers interfacing and calibration of the various AEC board assemblies that are used in Millenia
and Indico 100 X-ray generators for ion chambers, solid state chambers, or PMT pickups; and in CMP 200
X-ray generators for ion and solid state chambers.
THE GENERATOR IS FACTORY CONFIGURED FOR SPECIFIC AEC DEVICE(S). REFER TO
THE COMPATIBILITY STATEMENT / PRODUCT DESCRIPTION IN CHAPTER 1D (MILLENIA AND
INDICO 100), OR CHAPTER 1 (CMP 200) FOR THE FACTORY CONFIGURED AEC COMPATIBILITY OF
THIS GENERATOR.
The introduction in this section contains background information relevant to AEC operation. It is strongly
suggested that this be read and understood prior to beginning AEC calibration.
AEC calibration requires that a calibration curve be established which relates optical density to various kV
breakpoints.
The 75 kV knee breakpoint is calibrated at the slowest film screen combination. The remaining kV
breakpoints are calibrated next, then the breakpoint calibration is repeated at the next highest film speed,
with the highest film speed being calibrated last.
After breakpoint calibration, density setup is done at the slowest film speed, and then RLF
compensation and multiple spot compensation are done if desired.
Page 3D-2
Rev. J
Ch # 740904-06
AEC Calibration
3D
Figure 3D-1: Relative timing of AEC ramp vs exposure command and kVp
2 to 3 is the reaction time of the solid state / ion chamber to start a current flow.
Time = 1 to 3 ms.
4 to 5 is the generator shut down time including cable discharge time etc.
Time = 1.5 to 3.0 ms.
FOR AEC BOARDS WITH SHORT AEC TIME COMPENSATION (FIGURE 3D-9 AND 3D-11)
AEC TECHNIQUES SHOULD HAVE MINIMUM EXPOSURE TIMES GREATER THAN 5 MS. FOR
ALL OTHER AEC BOARDS MINIMUM EXPOSURE TIMES SHOULD BE GREATER THAN 15
MS.
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-3
3D
AEC Calibration
50 ms to 500 ms.
500 ms to 1000 ms.
1000 ms and above.
Care must be exercised when using table buckys with low kV values because most tabletops and grids
absorb considerable radiation in the range of 60 - 65 kVp. This will adversely affect AEC operation.
Figure 3D-2 shows the effect of kVp, optical density, and radiation. Note particularly the nonlinear change in
density at 85-90 kVp.
Page 3D-4
Rev. J
Ch # 740904-06
AEC Calibration
3D
Low kV:
Knee kV:
High kV:
50, 55, 65 kV
75 kV
85, 95, 110, 130 kV.
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-5
3D
AEC Calibration
The AEC board allows for a 0 to a maximum of 10 volt ramp at the comparator input. All AEC signals
must fit within this range (for all film / screens, densities, and techniques).
Most X-ray applications require the use of two or more different film screen combinations, all of which
will require different exposure doses.
Using the slowest film screen combination, the required film input dose will be determined.
Once this value is determined (during AEC calibration), the density calibration is performed to allow
100% (double the dose) and 50% (half the dose) values. These are typical values, and will determine
the maximum required range of the AEC reference voltage (the output from the D/A converter).
Figure 3D-4 illustrates the different windows required for various film screen combinations.
Page 3D-6
Rev. J
Ch # 740904-06
AEC Calibration
3D
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-7
3D
AEC Calibration
RECEPTOR 1
RECEPTOR 2
RECEPTOR 3
RECEPTOR 4
1.
2.
3.
+%:
-%:
Chamber type:
Regulatory AEC dose
requirements?
Is film processing maintained?
Assigned receptor name:
Are all cassettes similar?
Additional notes:
Additional notes:
Table 3D-1: AEC setup worksheet
ALL RECEPTORS MUST HAVE THE SAME NUMBER OF DENSITY STEPS AND THE SAME DENSITY DOSE
CHANGE PER STEP (DENSITY SETTINGS ARE COMMON TO ALL FILM SCREENS AND RECEPTORS).
Page 3D-8
Rev. J
Ch # 740904-06
AEC Calibration
3D
Note:
The example below is supplied for reference only. It does not represent an actual installation.
FUNCTION
Film/Screen
RECEPTOR 1
RECEPTOR 2
RECEPTOR 3
Lanex/reg
RECEPTOR 4
1.
Lanex/reg
Lanex/reg
PMT/I.I.
2.
Lanex/med
Lanex/chest
1.2
1.1
1.4
Grid ratio/SID:
12:1
8:1
10:1
10:1
60 - 120
65 - 140
80 - 110
70 - 120
Density steps
+%:
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
-%:
6.25
6.25
6.25
6.25
Chamber type:
Ion
Solid state
Ion
PMT
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Table
Wall
SFD
Digital
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
3.
Density dose
change
(per step)
Additional notes:
Additional notes:
Table 3D-2: Sample AEC setup worksheet
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-9
3D
AEC Calibration
CHECK:
2.
CHECK:
Refer to AEC board pictorials, figure 3D-8 to 3D11 for input channel designations
3.
AEC Ch 1_____________________________
AEC Ch 2_____________________________
AEC Ch 3_____________________________
AEC Ch 4_____________________________
4.
CHECK:
5.
CHECK:
6.
CHECK:
7.
8.
Page 3D-10
Rev. J
Ch # 740904-06
AEC Calibration
3D
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-11
3D
AEC Calibration
Table Bucky
Wall Bucky
Spot film Bucky
Aux - digital acquisition
Refer to Figure 3D-7 for typical AEC connections. This is a simplified view only, refer to figures 3D-8 to 3D11 for AEC board layouts used in Millenia and Indico 100 generators. Refer to chapter 1E for the AEC board
location in your generator.
Page 3D-12
Rev. J
Ch # 740904-06
AEC Calibration
3D
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-13
3D
AEC Calibration
PIN
1
NOTE: PINS 1, 2, AND 3 ON THE
2
CIRCULAR CONNECTOR ARE
3
ALL CONNECTED IN PARALLEL.
4
5
6
Connector shell
Table 3D-4: Pin outs for 6 pin circular connector
FUNCTION
Anode
Cathode, left
Cathode, right
Cathode, middle
Ground
PIN
2
3
5
4
1
Table 3D-5: Pin outs for 5 pin in-line connector
If the AEC input signal has excessive electrical noise superimposed on the signal, it is suggested that
jumpers JW1 to JW4 as appropriate be temporarily installed. If this improves the signal to noise ratio, the
jumper(s) should be left in. Excessive signal to noise ratio generally shows up as inconsistent AEC exposure
times at low mAs values.
It is the responsibility of the installer to determine the need for these jumper(s).
Page 3D-14
Rev. J
Ch # 740904-06
AEC Calibration
3D
Made in Canada
AEC DEDICATED ION CHAMBER
R79
J14
J5
JW2 JW1
J4
J13
JW4 JW3
J3
J12
JW6 JW5
J2
J11
R1
J1
R2
R3
R4
ML_IONBD.CDR
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-15
3D
AEC Calibration
R79 adjusts the output of the high voltage bias supply. This is only fitted on versions of this board intended
for use with ion chambers that require a separate high voltage bias supply. R79 adjusts the value of the
+300 / +500 VDC, and the +45 VDC outputs, and should be set as per the ion chamber manufacturer
specifications.
The following tables show the pin outs for both the 9 pin D connectors and for the 12 pin in-line connectors
on the AEC board in figure 3D-9. The 9 pin connectors are compatible with most models of AID ionization
chambers. However, the installer should verify compatibility of the pin outs with the chamber(s) being used.
FUNCTION
+300 VDC output
PIN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
NOTE
Only provided on configurations of this board that
require the +300 VDC output.
See note below.
FUNCTION
+500 VDC output
+ or - 300 VDC output
+45 VDC output
+12 VDC output
-12 VDC output
-24 VDC output
Ground
Start command output
Left field select
Middle field select
Right field select
Signal input
PIN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
NOTE
The +500, + or -300, and +45 VDC outputs are
only provided on configurations of this board
designed to interface to ion chambers requiring
these voltage outputs.
+12, -12, -24 VDC outputs are typically used as
the DC supply for a pre-amplifier, often part of
the ion chamber. -24 VDC is not available on
CMP 200.
Page 3D-16
Rev. J
Ch # 740904-06
AEC Calibration
3D
Refer to the end of subsection 3D.2.7 for the procedure for adjusting R10, R19, and R24.
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-17
3D
AEC Calibration
PIN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
NOTE
+500, +300, +50 VDC outputs are provided for
ion chamber use if required. +12, -12, -24 VDC
outputs are typically used as the DC supply for
a pre-amplifier, often part of the ion chamber.
The start command, and left, middle, right
field select outputs are jumper configured to
be active high or active low as per the AEC
chamber requirements. The signal input is
jumper configured to accept a positive going
or negative going ramp or DC signal as per
the AEC chamber output.
FUNCTION
+500 VDC output
+300 VDC output
+50 VDC output
+12 VDC output
-12 VDC output
-24 VDC output
Ground
Start
Left
Middle
Right
Signal input
PIN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
NOTE
Not used for solid state AEC chambers
Not used for solid state AEC chambers
Not used for solid state AEC chambers
Not used for solid state AEC chambers
Not used for solid state AEC chambers
Not used for solid state AEC chambers
Connect pin 8 to pin 7 (ground). Connect the
common anodes for left, middle, right to pin 8.
Connect cathode (left) to LEFT, cathode middle
to MIDDLE, and cathode right to RIGHT.
Cable shield (if used) connects to pin 8.
Not used for solid state AEC chambers
Page 3D-18
Rev. J
Ch # 740904-06
AEC Calibration
3D
R10 adjusts the high voltage supply output for the PMT when ABS operation is selected. This is
described in chapter 3E.
R24 adjusts the high voltage supply output when AEC channel 1, 2, or 3 is selected. AEC channels 1, 2,
3 are normally used with an AEC chamber.
R24 will be used to adjust the +500, +300 and +50 VDC bias voltage outputs if required for ion
chamber(s) connected to AEC channels 1, 2 or 3. Refer to the AEC chamber manufacturers
recommendations to adjust this voltage.
R19 adjusts the high voltage supply output when AEC channel 4 is selected. AEC channel 4 is normally
used for digital acquisition or spot film work using a PMT pickup for AEC control. This will typically be the
same PMT used for ABS control during fluoroscopy operation.
Refer to 3D.4.0 for further details if using a PMT for AEC control on AEC channel 4.
3D.2.8 AEC Board (Universal AEC Board With Short AEC Time Compensation)
The AEC board shown below has short AEC time compensation, and is factory configured to be compatible
with most makes / models of AEC chambers (ion and solid state) on the market. This assembly also
contains a low current, high voltage supply for a photo multiplier tube (PMT). The PMT supply is located on
the upper board, which also contains the connectors to interface to the AEC pickup device(s).
Figure 3D-11: Universal AEC board with short AEC time compensation
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-19
3D
AEC Calibration
3D.2.8 AEC Board (Universal AEC Board With Short AEC Time Compensation) Cont
In order to clearly show the adjustment pots on the lower (AEC) board, the upper board which
contains the AEC and PMT interface connectors and the high voltage supply is shown shifted from
its actual position.
AEC board input / output assignment:
The following potentiometers are used for short AEC exposure time compensation:
Refer to tables 3D-8 and 3D-9 for the connector pin outs. Refer to the end of subsection 3D.2.7 for the
procedure for adjusting R10, R19, and R24.
Page 3D-20
Rev. J
Ch # 740904-06
AEC Calibration
3D
When using PMTs or photo diodes for AEC from the output of an image intensifier, there is normally
no need to iterate all the kV break points. It is usually sufficient to use the 75 kV breakpoint
calibration value for that film screen at all kV breakpoints. If doing this, the calibration values should
be confirmed at all kV breakpoints using the acquired digital images.
During AEC calibration, all AEC exposures should be done using mA values such that the
exposures are in the 30 to 100 ms range UNLESS STATED OTHERWISE.
During AEC calibration, always ensure that the central ray is centered relative to the image receptor.
Prior to placing the absorbers, ensure that the collimator is opened sufficiently to irradiate ALL fields
on the AEC pickup device.
The recommended absorber in table 3D-12 is water. This should be in a plastic container of uniform
thickness. Lexan of a similar thickness is also a suitable absorber.
Ensure that the absorber is positioned to fully cover the X-ray field. The absorber must extend a
minimum of 3/8 in. (10 mm) beyond the X-ray field.
All components and assemblies used during AEC calibration must be those that will be used during
procedures, and must be positioned as they will be in actual use of the X-ray room.
During AEC calibration, if exposure times do not change if the mA is varied, it may be that the input
signal level to the AEC board may be too high. If this is experienced, check the ramp voltage at the
output of the first gain stage (the first operational amplifier output) on the AEC board for the subject
AEC channel. This voltage must never exceed 10 V. If this voltage does exceed 10 V, reduce the
input signal level as required.
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-21
3D
AEC Calibration
SWITCH OFF THE GENERATOR BEFORE CONNECTING A PMT, AND USE APPROPRIATE
HIGH VOLTAGE PRECAUTIONS WHEN MEASURING THE PMT HIGH VOLTAGE.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Page 3D-22
Action
Connect the PMT output to J7 on the generator interface board (the ABS input) as
shown in figure 3D-12. If the PMT for AEC on channel 4 configuration was factory
ordered, the generator will be pre-wired as shown above. The ABS input is at J7-12, and
the signal will be divided for the AEC board via the resistor from J7-12 to J7-10.
Appropriate high voltage shielded cable should be used for the PMT signal connections.
Set the PMT voltage to approximately -650 VDC for AEC operation using R19 on the
AEC interface board. AEC channel 4 must be selected in order for R19 to be active.
USE ONLY TP5 ON THE AEC INTERFACE BOARD (FIGURE 3D-10, 3D-11) FOR
THE HV METER GROUND WHEN MEASURING PMT HIGH VOLTAGE. CONNECT
THE GROUND LEAD FIRST BEFORE MEASURING THE HIGH VOLTAGE. DO NOT
ATTEMPT TO MEASURE THIS WITHOUT A SUITABLE METER.
Configure AEC channel 4 as per 3D.6.0 steps 6 to 14, but use the following settings in
the AEC SETUP menu: Select ION chamber, and enable FILM SCREEN 1 only, and
CENTER FIELD only. If AEC SETUP menu screen 2 is available, set C FIELD COMP to
0 (this is model dependent, refer to AEC SETUP in chapter 3C).
Enter the calibration value 45 into EACH of the kV breakpoints. The procedure for
setting the 75 kV knee breakpoint is detailed in 3D.6.0, step 16. The remaining
breakpoints are set in a similar manner (refer to the balance of 3D.6.0 for details on
accessing those breakpoint settings).
Adjust the channel 4 gain adjustment potentiometer on the AEC board to achieve the
desired I.I. input dose at the 75 kV knee breakpoint, using absorber thickness per table
3D-12.
The PMT voltage that was set in step 2 may need to be adjusted up or down if the gain
adjustment potentiometer does not provide the desired adjustment range in step 5.
Repeat the exposures at other kV breakpoints that cover the desired kV operating
range, checking the I.I. input dose at each kV breakpoint. Use absorber thickness per
table 3D-12.
Readjust the breakpoint calibration values in step 7, if necessary, to achieve the desired
I.I. input dose at those kV values. DO NOT READJUST THE AEC GAIN POT OR PMT
VOLTAGE.
Rev. J
Ch # 740904-06
AEC Calibration
3D
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-23
3D
AEC Calibration
Action
SETUP FOR AEC CALIBRATION
IF THE AEC BOARD BEING CALIBRATED HAS SHORT AEC TIME COMPENSATION
(FIGURE 3D-9 OR 3D-11), THE SHORT EXPOSURE TIME COMPENSATION MUST FIRST BE
DISABLED.
TO DO THIS, ADJUST ALL SHORT AEC EXPOSURE TIME COMPENSATION
POTENTIOMETERS TO ZERO, I.E. SUCH THAT THE WIPERS ON EACH POT ARE GROUNDED.
VERIFY THE CORRECT SETTINGS BY USING AN OHMMETER ON LOW OHMS RANGE AND
ENSURING A NEAR ZERO OHMS READING FROM THE WIPER OF EACH SHORT AEC TIME
COMPENSATION POT TO GROUND. REFER TO TABLE 3D-14 FOR THE SHORT AEC TIME
COMPENSATION POTENTIOMETER DESIGNATIONS.
FAILURE TO PRESET THESE POTS WILL RESULT IN DIFFICULTY IN PERFORMING
AEC CALIBRATION.
1.
Set up the X-ray tube stand as shown in figure 3D-13.
2.
Align the tube stand and table Bucky such that the central ray is centered relative to the
image receptor.
3.
Open up the collimator to expose all three fields of the AEC pickup. Ensure that the
central ray remains centered relative to the image receptor.
4.
Place the R probe at the film plane, i.e. behind the grid. If this cannot be done, then
place the probe on the table top. Ensure that the R-probe is located as close as possible
to the central ray, but not blocking any pickup areas on the AEC device. The R meter
must be set to measure in the micro-R range.
5.
Place the absorber (with thickness selected for 75 kV per table 3D-12) in the X-ray field,
ensuring that the radiation is COMPLETELY blocked by the absorber.
6.
Place the generator into the programming mode. Refer to section 3C.1.1.
7.
From the GENERATOR SETUP menu select GEN CONFIGURATION.
8.
From the GEN CONFIGURATION menu select AEC SETUP.
9.
Set up the AEC parameters in the AEC SETUP menu FOR EACH ACTIVE AEC
CHANNEL. Refer to AEC SETUP in chapter 3C.
10.
Set up the image receptors in the RECEPTOR SETUP menu such that each receptor
has the desired AEC channel assigned to it. Refer to RECEPTOR SETUP in chapter
3C.
11.
In the RECEPTOR SETUP menu, set MEMORY to NO for each image receptor. This
will ensure that the next receptor being calibrated will not remember the techniques from
the previous receptor.
The MEMORY function may be reset as desired after AEC calibration is completed.
12.
In the RECEPTOR SETUP menu, ensure that the AEC BACKUP MAS and AEC
BACKUP MS are set sufficiently high that the generator backup timer will not terminate
the exposure.
13.
From the GEN CONFIGURATION menu select AEC CALIBRATION.
14.
From the AEC CALIBRATION menu select FILM SCREEN 1 (the slowest film screen
combination).
CAUTION:
NOTE:
BE SURE TO USE THE SAME CASSETTE FOR EACH EXPOSURE AT THAT FILM SPEED.
Page 3D-24
Rev. J
Ch # 740904-06
AEC Calibration
3D
FOR THE CMP 200 AND THE INDICO 100 RAD-ONLY CONSOLE, LCD SCREEN DETAILS
NOT RELEVANT TO AEC CALIBRATION WILL DIFFER SLIGHTLY FROM THE EXAMPLES IN
THIS SECTION. HOWEVER, THE AEC CALIBRATION MENUS WILL APPEAR AS SHOWN IN
THIS SECTION.
RLF COMPENSATION AND MULTI-SPOT COMPENSATION IS NOT AVAILABLE ON CMP200.
The following screens are used for AEC calibration
* AEC CALIBRATION *
FILM SCREEN 1
FILM SCREEN 2
FILM SCREEN 3
DENSITY SETUP
EXIT
*TUBE?
0%HU
50KV: 84.0:
55KV: 78.0:
65KV: 66.0:
75KV: 54.0
3200MS <<
*TUBE?
0%HU
110KV: 34.0:
130KV: 28.0:
RLF COMPENSATION
MULT. SPOT COMP:
3200MS <<
Step
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
85KV: 42.8
95KV: 38.0
+
>>
+
-
0%
Action
75 KV KNEE BREAKPOINT CALIBRATION:
Select the table Bucky image receptor.
Select the 75 kV knee breakpoint and enter the value 45 using the + or - buttons
adjacent to the LCD display.
Select the appropriate mA for the first film speed being calibrated per table 3D-12,
remembering that the slowest film screen used in that installation must be calibrated first
(example 320 mA for 100 speed film). Select large focus, center field.
Make an exposure and note the dose and mAs.
Referring to table 3D-11, select the estimated dose required for the film speed being
calibrated i.e. 1025 25 R (see note on next page regarding conversion of R to Gy if
desired) at the 75 kV knee breakpoint for 100 speed film.
Note that the dose values in the table are based on the R-probe being located at
the film plane. If the probe was placed in front of the grid the dose values shown
in the tables must be increased accordingly. The dose in front of the grid will
typically be approximately double the dose at the film plane.
Adjust the required gain potentiometer on the AEC board (see note below) while taking
exposures until the dose noted in the previous step is obtained.
CHANNEL 1 ON THE AEC BOARD IS TYPICALLY USED FOR THE TABLE
BUCKY AEC CHAMBER. YOUR INSTALLATION MAY USE A DIFFERENT
CHANNEL ON THE AEC BOARD.
REFER TO TABLE 3D-10 FOR THE AEC BOARD GAIN POTENTIOMETER
(GAIN POT) DESIGNATIONS FOR THE VARIOUS AEC BOARDS.
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-25
3D
AEC Calibration
CHANNEL 1
R1
R1
R1
R1
CHANNEL 2
R2
R2
R26
R2
CHANNEL 3
R3
R3
R27
R3
CHANNEL 4
R4
R4
R28
R4
FILM SPEED
100
200
400
800
Step
21.
Action
Load a test cassette with fresh film and install it in the image receptor. Using the same
technique as in the previous step, expose the film and develop it.
22.
Measure the optical density. The desired value should have been previously recorded in
a copy of table 3D-1.
23.
If the measured O.D. is not within 5% of the desired value, adjust the gain pot (as per
step 20) to increase or decrease the density, then repeat the previous two steps.
24.
Once the desired film density is achieved, record the mAs, dose, calibration number and
O.D. in a copy of table 3D-13.
FOR EACH BREAKPOINT IN THE REMAINDER OF THIS SECTION, START WITH THE
APPROXIMATE DOSE AS PER TABLE 3D-12. AFTER THAT DOSE IS ACHIEVED, A FILM MUST
BE EXPOSED AND THE O.D. VERIFIED. FURTHER DOSE ITERATIONS MAY BE REQUIRED TO
ACHIEVE THE DESIRED OPTICAL DENSITY.
DO NOT READJUST THE AEC BOARD GAIN POT AFTER THE 75KV KNEE
BREAKPOINT IS CALIBRATED. DOSE / DENSITY ADJUSTMENTS WILL ONLY BE DONE
BY ADJUSTING THE CALIBRATION VALUES FOR THE OTHER KV BREAKPOINTS.
25.
26.
27.
28.
Page 3D-26
55 KV BREAKPOINT CALIBRATION:
Change the absorber thickness per table 3D-12. As before, ensure that the absorber
fully blocks the X-ray field.
Select the 55 kV breakpoint.
Make an exposure and note the dose. Use mA values as per table 3D-12.
Adjust the 55 kV calibration numbers using the + or - buttons such that the actual dose
is equal to the target dose at 55 kV for the selected film speed per table 3D-12.
DO NOT READJUST THE AEC BOARD GAIN POT.
Rev. J
Ch # 740904-06
3D
AEC Calibration
Absorber
15 cm H2O
10 cm H2O
10 cm H2O
10 cm H2O
20 cm H2O
25 cm H2O
20 cm H2O
20 cm H2O
Dose
1025 /R
1808 /R
1832 /R
1436 /R
1088 /R
848 /R
1060 /R
1008 /R
mAs
59.2 mAs
54 mAs
128 mAs
44 mAs
24 mAs
16 mAs
54 mAs
44 mAs
Generator mA
320 mA
320 mA
320 mA
320 mA
200 mA
200 mA
320 mA
320 mA
Absorber
15 cm H2O
10 cm H2O
10 cm H2O
10 cm H2O
20 cm H2O
25 cm H2O
20 cm H2O
20 cm H2O
Dose
518 /R
904 /R
916 /R
718 /R
544 /R
484 /R
530 /R
504 /R
mAs
30 mAs
26 mAs
64 mAs
22 mAs
12 mAs
8 mAs
27 mAs
22 mAs
Generator mA
250 mA
250 mA
250 mA
250 mA
250 mA
250 mA
250 mA
250 mA
Absorber
15 cm H2O
10 cm H2O
10 cm H2O
10 cm H2O
20 cm H2O
25 cm H2O
20 cm H2O
20 cm H2O
Dose
259 /R
452 /R
458 /R
359 /R
272 /R
424 /R
265 /R
252 /R
mAs
14.8 mAs
13 mAs
32 mAs
11 mAs
6 mAs
4 mAs
13.5 mAs
11 mAs
Generator mA
200 mA
200 mA
200 mA
200 mA
200 mA
200 mA
200 mA
200 mA
Absorber
15 cm H2O
10 cm H2O
10 cm H2O
10 cm H2O
20 cm H2O
25 cm H2O
20 cm H2O
20 cm H2O
Dose
129 /R
226 /R
229/R
179 /R
136 /R
212 /R
132 /R
126 /R
mAs
7.4 mAs
6.5 mAs
16 mAs
5.5 mAs
3 mAs
2 mAs
6.7 mAs
5.5 mAs
Generator mA
100 mA
100 mA
100 mA
100 mA
100 mA
100 mA
100 mA
100 mA
For SIDs other than 40 in. (100 cm) multiply the dose by the factor [new SID / 40 in. (100 cm)]
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-27
3D
AEC Calibration
SPEED =
#1 BK. POINT = 75 kV
#2 BK. POINT = 55 kV
#3 BK. POINT = 50 kV
#4 BK. POINT = 65 kV
#5 BK. POINT = 110 kV
#6 BK. POINT = 130 kV
#7 BK. POINT = 85 kV
#8 BK. POINT = 95 kV
mAs
mAs
mAs
mAs
mAs
mAs
mAs
mAs
FILM SCREEN 2
SPEED =
#1 BK. POINT = 75 kV
#2 BK. POINT = 55 kV
#3 BK. POINT = 50 kV
#4 BK. POINT = 65 kV
#5 BK. POINT = 110 kV
#6 BK. POINT = 130 kV
#7 BK. POINT = 85 kV
#8 BK. POINT = 95 kV
mAs
mAs
mAs
mAs
mAs
mAs
mAs
mAs
FILM SCREEN 3
SPEED =
#1 BK. POINT = 75 kV
#2 BK. POINT = 55 kV
#3 BK. POINT = 50 kV
#4 BK. POINT = 65 kV
#5 BK. POINT = 110 kV
#6 BK. POINT = 130 kV
#7 BK. POINT = 85 kV
#8 BK. POINT = 95 kV
mAs
mAs
mAs
mAs
mAs
mAs
mAs
mAs
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
DOSE =
DOSE =
DOSE =
DOSE =
DOSE =
DOSE =
DOSE =
DOSE =
CAL. NO. =
CAL. NO. =
CAL. NO. =
CAL. NO. =
CAL. NO. =
CAL. NO. =
CAL. NO. =
CAL. NO. =
O.D. =
O.D. =
O.D. =
O.D. =
O.D. =
O.D. =
O.D. =
O.D. =
DOSE =
DOSE =
DOSE =
DOSE =
DOSE =
DOSE =
DOSE =
DOSE =
CAL. NO. =
CAL. NO. =
CAL. NO. =
CAL. NO. =
CAL. NO. =
CAL. NO. =
CAL. NO. =
CAL. NO. =
O.D. =
O.D. =
O.D. =
O.D. =
O.D. =
O.D. =
O.D. =
O.D. =
DOSE =
DOSE =
DOSE =
DOSE =
DOSE =
DOSE =
DOSE =
DOSE =
CAL. NO. =
CAL. NO. =
CAL. NO. =
CAL. NO. =
CAL. NO. =
CAL. NO. =
CAL. NO. =
CAL. NO. =
O.D. =
O.D. =
O.D. =
O.D. =
O.D. =
O.D. =
O.D. =
O.D. =
Page 3D-28
Rev. J
Ch # 740904-06
AEC Calibration
3D
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
Action
Load the test cassette with fresh film and install it in the image receptor. Using the same
technique, expose the film and develop it.
Measure the optical density. The optical density should be as per step 22.
If the measured O.D. is not within 5% of the desired value, adjust the 55 kV calibration
number using the + or - buttons, then repeat the previous two steps.
DO NOT READJUST THE AEC BOARD GAIN POT.
Once the desired film density is achieved, record the required values in a copy of table
3D-13.
50 KV BREAKPOINT CALIBRATION:
If special techniques are NOT used which require the 50 kV range, simply enter the 55
kV calibration number into the 50 kV breakpoint using the + and - buttons.
Note that at approximately 55 kV and under, the film screen sensitivity becomes too low
for practical AEC operation when used with a Bucky.
If the 50 kV range IS used, the 50 kV breakpoint must be calibrated. To do this, select
the 50 kV breakpoint. The 50 kV step will use the same absorber as used for the 55 kV
step.
Repeat steps 27 to 32 to calibrate the 50 kV breakpoint if desired, substituting 50 kV
where applicable in place of 55 kV.
65 KV BREAKPOINT CALIBRATION:
Select the 65 kV breakpoint. Use absorber thickness per table 3D-12 for the 65 kV
breakpoint.
Repeat steps 27 to 32 to calibrate the 65 kV breakpoint, substituting 65 kV where
applicable in place of 55 kV.
IN THE FOLLOWING STEPS, SELECT >> AND << AS REQUIRED TO NAVIGATE
BETWEEN THE TWO BREAKPOINT SCREENS (SCREEN 1 LISTS BREAKPOINTS
50 KV TO 95 KV, SCREEN 2 SHOWS BREAKPOINTS 110 AND 130 KV).
110 KV BREAKPOINT CALIBRATION:
Select the 110 kV breakpoint. Use absorber thickness per table 3D-12 for the 110 kV
breakpoint. Use the appropriate mA for this breakpoint as per table 3D-12.
Repeat steps 27 to 32 to calibrate the 110 kV breakpoint, substituting 110 kV where
applicable in place of 55 kV.
130 KV BREAKPOINT CALIBRATION:
If special high kV techniques are NOT used which require the 130 kV range, enter the
110 kV calibration number into the 130 kV breakpoint using the + and - buttons.
If the 130 kV range IS used, the 130 kV breakpoint must be calibrated. To do this, select
the 130 kV breakpoint. Use absorber thickness per table 3D-12 for the 130 kV
breakpoint.
Repeat steps 27 to 32 to calibrate the 130 kV breakpoint if desired, substituting 130 kV
where applicable in place of 55 kV.
85 KV BREAKPOINT CALIBRATION:
Select the 85 kV breakpoint. Use absorber thickness per table 3D-12 for the 85 kV
breakpoint.
Repeat steps 27 to 32 to calibrate the 85 kV breakpoint, substituting 85 kV where
applicable in place of 55 kV.
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-29
3D
AEC Calibration
Action
95 KV BREAKPOINT CALIBRATION:
Select the 95 kV breakpoint. Use absorber thickness per table 3D-12 for the 95 kV
breakpoint.
Repeat steps 27 to 32 to calibrate the 95 kV breakpoint, substituting 95 kV where
applicable in place of 55 kV.
Select << to return to the AEC CALIBRATION menu.
Action
FILM SCREEN 2 BREAKPOINT CALIBRATION:
Select FILM SCREEN 2.
Repeat steps 16 to 48 as described for film screen 1 except:
WHEN CALIBRATING THE 75 KV KNEE BREAKPOINT FOR FILM SCREEN 2, DO
NOT ADJUST THE AEC BOARD GAIN POT. DOSE ADJUSTMENTS MUST ONLY
BE MADE BY VARYING THE BREAKPOINT CALIBRATION NUMBERS.
FILM SCREEN 2 MUST BE THE NEXT HIGHEST FILM SPEED AFTER FILM
SCREEN 1.
Step
51.
52.
Action
FILM SCREEN 3 BREAKPOINT CALIBRATION:
Select FILM SCREEN 3.
Repeat steps 16 to 48 as described for film screen 1 except:
WHEN CALIBRATING THE 75 KV KNEE BREAKPOINT FOR FILM SCREEN 3, DO
NOT ADJUST THE AEC BOARD GAIN POT. DOSE ADJUSTMENTS MUST ONLY
BE MADE BY VARYING THE BREAKPOINT CALIBRATION NUMBERS.
FILM SCREEN 3 MUST BE THE HIGHEST FILM SPEED.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Page 3D-30
Action
THIS SECTION ONLY APPLIES FOR AEC BOARDS WITH SHORT AEC EXPOSURE
TIME COMPENSATION (FIGURE 3D-9 OR 3D-11) IF AEC EXPOSURES LESS
THAN APPROXIMATELY 15 MS ARE REQUIRED.
Select the image receptor to be short AEC time compensated, i.e. table Bucky.
Select the highest film speed used on the selected receptor, and then select the 75 kV
breakpoint.
Set the mA per table 3D-12 for the film speed being used. Reinstall the absorber as per
table 3D-12 for the 75 kV breakpoint.
Make an exposure and confirm the dose (or mAs) readings as previously recorded in
table 3D-13.
Reduce the absorber thickness such as to decrease the AEC exposure time to
approximately 10 ms.
Adjust the short AEC time compensation pot for the AEC channel being calibrated such
that the dose (or mAs) is approximately the same as previously recorded (step 4). The
short AEC time compensation potentiometer designations are given in table 3D-14.
Rev. J
Ch # 740904-06
AEC Calibration
3D
CHANNEL 1
R11
R91
CHANNEL 2
R12
R92
CHANNEL 3
R13
R93
CHANNEL 4
R14
R94
Step
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Action
Reduce the absorber thickness again such as to decrease the AEC exposure time to
approximately 6 ms (but not less).
Adjust the short AEC time compensation pot for the AEC channel being calibrated such
that the dose (or mAs) is approximately the same as it was in step 6.
The short AEC time compensation adjustments affect the AEC calibration at longer
exposure times. Therefore, it may now be necessary to readjust the gain pot for the AEC
channel being calibrated to restore the dose (or mAs) values to the values previously
recorded in table 3D-13. Ensure that the absorber thickness and mA values are as per
table 3D-12 when readjusting the AEC gain pot.
Films should be exposed and developed, and the O.D. checked at the 75 kV breakpoint
at AEC exposure times of approximately 6 ms and approximately 100 ms. If the film
density is not acceptable at both short and long AEC exposure times, it will be
necessary to iterate the adjustments of both the short AEC time compensation pot and
the AEC gain pot by repeating steps 3 to 8.
Repeat steps 1 to 10 for each image receptor (AEC channel) to be short AEC time
compensated.
DENSITY SETUP
EXIT
*TUBE?
0%HU
-8: -7: -6: -5: 62%
3200MS EXIT
*DENS. SETUP*
*TUBE?
0%HU
-4: 50%
-3: 37%
-2: 25%
-1: 12%
3200MS <<
*DENS. SETUP*
+
>>
+
>>
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-31
3D
AEC Calibration
*DENS. SETUP*
*TUBE?
0%HU
+5: 62%
+6: +7: +8: 3200MS <<
*DENS. SETUP*
+
>>
+
RETURN
Up to eight density plus and eight density minus steps are available. If 8 density steps are not
required, the unwanted density steps may be programmed out per the procedure below. For example, if
only 5 density steps are desired, then density steps 6, 7, 8 may be deprogrammed.
Once the desired number of density steps are known, the relative minimum and maximum dose
values must be determined. Typically the minimum density step will result in half (50%) of the nominal
dose and the maximum density step will typically give double the nominal dose (100% increase). The
nominal dose is the value that was recorded at 0 density in table 3D-13.
The relative dose change per density step must be determined next. To do this, note the relative
minimum and maximum dose as determined above (i.e. 50% at min density and 100% increase at max
density), then calculate the number of - density steps and the number of + density steps that will be
required.
The relative dose change between density steps will then be the minimum density (i.e. 50) divided
by the number of density minus steps or the maximum density (i.e. 100) divided by the number of
density plus steps. This will yield the required dose increment for each density minus step and for each
density plus step respectively.
For 8 density steps, this gives a dose decrease of 6.25% per density minus step (8 steps x 6.25%
per step = 50% dose at -8 density) or a dose increase of 12.5% per density plus step (8 steps x 12.5%
per step = 100% dose increase at +8 density).
Refer to table 3D-15 for two typical examples of density steps vs. calibration numbers. For 8 minus
density steps the dose decrease is 6.25% per step, and for 8 + density steps the dose increase is 12.5%
per step as per the example calculation above.
For 5 minus density steps the dose decrease is 10% per step, and for 5 + density steps the dose
increase is 20% per step.
Page 3D-32
Rev. J
Ch # 740904-06
AEC Calibration
3D
CALIBRATION NUMBER (- 8
DENSITY
CALIBRATION NUMBER (- 5
DENSITY = HALF THE DOSE, +8
STEP
DENSITY = HALF THE DOSE, +5
DENSITY = DOUBLE THE DOSE)
DENSITY = DOUBLE THE DOSE)
50
44
38
31
-5
50
25
-4
40
19
-3
30
13
-2
20
6
-1
10
0 DENSITY: SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
13
+1
20
25
+2
40
38
+3
60
50
+4
80
63
+5
99
75
88
99
Table 3D-15: Example density values
Step
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Action
Reselect FILM SCREEN 1. Use absorber thickness per table 3D-12 for the 75 kV
breakpoint.
Reselect the 75 kV knee breakpoint.
Select << to return to the AEC CALIBRATION menu.
Select DENSITY SETUP.
Referring to table 3D-13, note the dose at 75 kV for film screen 1. This will be referred to
as the 0 density dose.
Select the highest density minus step desired i.e. - 8 from the density setup menu. If it is
not intended to use this step, select the highest density minus step to be used i.e. - 5,
then set the unused steps to - to disable those steps. To disable density steps, press the
- button to scroll down until the - symbol is displayed.
Set the calibration number for the highest density minus step to the desired relative
density value (example 50, this will give approximately 1/2 the 0 density dose).
Make an exposure and confirm that the measured dose is approximately the desired
value.
If the measured dose is not as expected, adjust the calibration number for that density
step and repeat step 8.
Select the next density step (i.e. - 7) and enter the appropriate calibration number for
that step. Refer to table 3D-15 and the notes preceding table 3D-15. Repeat steps 8 and
9.
Repeat the previous step for each remaining density minus step. Use the >> and <<
buttons to navigate through the DENS SETUP menu in order to access all the density
steps in this procedure.
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-33
3D
AEC Calibration
15.
16.
Page 3D-34
Action
Set the calibration number for the highest density plus step to the desired relative
density value (example 100, this will result in approximately double the 0 density dose).
Repeat step 8 and 9.
Select the next lowest density step (i.e. 7) and enter the appropriate calibration number
for that step. Refer to table 3D-15 and notes preceding table 3D-15. Repeat steps 8 and
9.
Repeat the previous step for each remaining density plus step. Use the >> and <<
buttons to navigate through the DENS SETUP menu in order to access all the density
steps.
When the density setup is complete and verified via dose measurements, use the <<
and EXIT buttons to return to the AEC CALIBRATION menu.
Rev. J
Ch # 740904-06
AEC Calibration
3D
If perfect, film would provide linear density changes with linearly increasing exposure times. In reality, at
longer exposures, film effectively becomes slower. This effect is known as reciprocity law failure. To
compensate, exposure times must be increased at longer exposures.
This compensation is achieved by increasing the AEC reference voltage at longer exposure times.
RLF compensation is applied to three ranges (50-500 ms, 500-1000 ms, and 1000- 1500 ms) as shown
below.
The examples below are not meant to represent actual RLF compensation percentages in your
installation. Actual values will need to be determined per the procedure following.
Between 0 and 50 ms no RLF compensation is applied. Per figure 3D-14, the AEC reference voltage is
constant at 1 unit between 0 and 50 ms.
At 50 ms, RLF compensation = 10% is applied. This means that the reference voltage will increase by
10% between 50 ms and 500 ms in a linear fashion. At 500 ms the reference voltage is then 1.0 X 1.10
= 1.10 units.
At 500 ms, RLF compensation = 20% is applied. This means that the reference voltage will increase by
20% between 500 ms and 1000 ms in a linear fashion. At 1000 ms the reference voltage is then 1.10 X
1.20 = 1.32 units.
At 1000 ms, RLF compensation = 30% is applied. This means that the reference voltage will increase by
30% between 1000 ms and 1500 ms in a linear fashion. At 1500 ms the reference voltage is then 1.32 X
1.30 = 1.72 units
The rate of increase of the reference voltage beyond 1500 ms will be constant, up to limit of the B.U.T.
(backup timer).
The compensation curve resulting from the RLF values described above is depicted in the graph below.
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-35
3D
AEC Calibration
DENSITY SETUP
EXIT
*TUBE?
0%HU
50KV: 84.0:
55KV: 78.0:
65KV: 66.0:
75KV: 54.0
3200MS <<
*TUBE?
0%HU
110KV: 34.0:
130KV: 28.0:
RLF COMPENSATION
MULT. SPOT COMP:
3200MS <<
*TUBE?
0%HU
50MSEC: 0%
500MSEC: 4%
1000MSEC: 0%
3200MS
Page 3D-36
85KV: 42.8
95KV: 38.0
+
>>
0%
+
-
+
-
<<
Rev. J
Ch # 740904-06
AEC Calibration
3D
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
Action
Place the absorber (with thickness selected for 75 kV per table 3D-12) in the X-ray field,
ensuring that the radiation is COMPLETELY blocked by the absorber.
Select the slowest film screen combination to compensate. This will normally be FILM
SCREEN 1.
Select >>.
Select RLF COMPENSATION.
From the LF COMP menu, select 50MSEC and set the value to 0 using the + or buttons.
Select mA appropriate to the film speed i.e. 100 mA for 100 speed film.
Make an exposure and adjust the mA if necessary to give an exposure time of
approximately 50 ms.
Load a test cassette with fresh film and install it in the image receptor.
Make an exposure using the same techniques. Record the mAs, then develop the film.
Note the O.D. This should be within 10% of the O.D. that was noted during AEC
calibration.
Make an exposure and reduce the mA to give an exposure time of approximately 500
ms.
Make an exposure using the same techniques. Record the mAs.
Enter an RLF offset at 50MSEC to give a mAs increase of approximately 10%.
Load a test cassette with fresh film and install it in the image receptor. Make an
exposure and develop the film.
If the measured O.D. is not within 5% of the value in step 10, adjust the 50 ms RLF
offset value as appropriate using the + and - buttons.
Repeat steps 14 and 15 until the required O.D. is achieved.
Make an exposure and reduce the mA to give an exposure time of approximately 1000
ms.
Select the 500MSEC RLF adjustment and set the value to 0 using the + or - buttons.
Make an exposure using the same techniques. Record the mAs.
Enter an RLF offset at 500MSEC to give a mAs increase of approximately 20%.
Load the test cassette with fresh film and install it in the image receptor. Make an
exposure and develop the film.
If the measured O.D. is not within 5% of the value in step 10, adjust the 500 ms RLF
offset value as appropriate using the + and - buttons.
Repeat steps 21 and 22 until the desired density is achieved.
THE FOLLOWING STEPS ONLY APPLY IF TECHNIQUES ARE USED RESULTING
IN AEC EXPOSURE TIMES GREATER THAN APPROXIMATELY 1500 MS.
Make an exposure and reduce the mA such as to give an exposure time of
approximately 1500ms.
Select the 1000MSEC RLF adjustment and set the value to 0 using the + or - buttons.
Make an exposure using the same techniques. Record the mAs.
Enter an RLF offset at 1000MSEC to give an mAs increase of approximately 30%.
Load the test cassette with fresh film and install it in the image receptor. Make an
exposure and develop the film.
If the measured O.D. is not within 5% of the value in step 10, adjust the 1000 ms RLF
offset value as appropriate using the + and - buttons.
Repeat steps 28 and 29 until the desired density is achieved.
Select << as required to return to the AEC CALIBRATION menu.
Repeat steps 2 to 31 for FILM SCREEN 2 and FILM SCREEN 3 if required.
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-37
3D
AEC Calibration
*TUBE?
0%HU
110KV: 34.0:
130KV: 28.0:
RLF COMPENSATION
MULT. SPOT COMP:
3200MS <<
85KV: 42.8
95KV: 38.0
+
>>
0%
+
-
Multiple spot compensation may be required when doing multiple exposures on a single film. In this
mode of serial recording, the X-ray field is usually coned down to a small area. Due to the lack of scatter
and possible AEC field cutoff, an AEC density offset may be added if required. This offset is known as
multiple spot compensation.
In order to activate the multiple spot compensation feature, the R & F table must supply a closed dry
contact when the SFD is operated in multi-spot mode. The multi-spot input to the generator is at TB5
pins 11 and 12 on the room interface board.
Page 3D-38
Rev. J
Ch # 740904-06
AEC Calibration
3D
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
Action
Place the absorber (with thickness selected for 85 kV per table 3D-12) in the X-ray field,
ensuring that the radiation is COMPLETELY blocked by the absorber.
Select the slowest film screen combination to compensate. This will normally be FILM
SCREEN 1.
Select >>.
Select MULT SPOT COMP.
Enter the value 0% using the + and - buttons.
Select 85 kV via the kV + or - buttons in the radiography section of the console.
Select mA appropriate to the film speed per table 3D-13.
Load the test cassette with fresh film and install it in the SFD.
Make an exposure and record the mAs, then develop the film.
Verify that the film is evenly exposed, and that the O.D. is the desired value
Enable the SFD multi-spot function, then make several exposures and record the mAs.
Develop the film and record the O.D. for each exposure.
If the measured optical densities are not within 5% of the desired value, enter a multispot compensation offset percentage that increases or decreases the mAs as
appropriate using the + and - buttons.
Repeat steps 8 to 13 until the desired O.D. is achieved on all exposures.
Select << as required to return to the AEC CALIBRATION menu.
Repeat steps 2 to 15 for FILM SCREEN 2 and FILM SCREEN 3 if required.
Select EXIT to return to the GEN CONFIGURATION menu.
Select EXIT, then EXIT SETUP to return to the normal operating mode.
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-39
3D
AEC Calibration
If the wall Bucky is dedicated to chest radiography, a focused grid with a 10:1 or 12:1 ratio should be
used along with an SID of 72 in. (180 cm).
If the wall Bucky will be used for conventional as well as chest radiography, then two grids should ideally
be used. See the note at the bottom of this page.
A reasonable compromise if a single grid must be used is a 10:1 ratio, 60 in. (150 cm) grid.
NOTE:
Page 3D-40
SINCE MOST WALL BUCKYS ARE USED AT 40 AND 72 IN. (100 AND 180 CM) SID, THE GRID
MUST BE CHOSEN WITH CARE WITH RESPECT TO CUT-OFF. A TYPICAL GRID WILL HAVE
AN 8:1 RATIO, WITH 85 LINE PAIR / INCH OR 10:1 RATIO WITH 150 LINE PAIR / INCH
(STATIONARY). TYPICALLY, 400 SPEED FILM SCREEN WILL BE USED WITH 90 SECOND
PROCESSING.
Rev. J
Ch # 740904-06
AEC Calibration
3D
NOTE:
A 10:1 ratio 60 in. (150 cm) focused grid will exhibit the following absorption when measured 5 in. (13
cm) from center:
At 72 in. (180 cm) absorption = 18%
At 40 in. (100 cm) absorption = 40%
A 12:1 ratio 60 in. (150 cm) focused grid will exhibit the following absorption when measured 5 in. (13
cm) from center:
At 72 in. (180 cm) absorption = 20%
At 40 in. (100 cm) absorption = 50%
A 10:1 ratio 72 in. (180 cm) focused grid will exhibit the following absorption when measured 5 in. (13
cm) from center:
At 40 in. (100 cm) absorption = 65%
A 12:1 ratio 72 in. (180 cm) focused grid will exhibit the following absorption when measured 5 in. (13
cm) from center:
At 40 in. (100 cm) absorption = 75%
A 10:1 ratio 40 in. (100 cm) focused grid will exhibit the following absorption when measured 5 in. (13
cm) from center:
At 72 in. (180 cm) absorption = 65%
A 12:1 ratio 40 in. (100 cm) focused grid will exhibit the following absorption when measured 5 in. (13
cm) from center:
At 72 in. (180 cm) absorption = 75%
BREAKPOINT CALIBRATIONS MAY HAVE BEEN DONE FOR ALL THREE FILM SCREEN
COMBINATIONS DURING TABLE BUCKY AEC CALIBRATION. IF SO, THE REMAINING
IMAGE RECEPTORS MUST USE THE CALIBRATION CURVES PREVIOUSLY ESTABLISHED
FOR THOSE FILM SCREENS.
IF AN UNUSED FILM SCREEN COMBINATION IS AVAILABLE FOR WALL BUCKY
USE, IT IS SUGGESTED THAT TWO RECEPTOR SELECTOR BUTTONS ON THE CONSOLE
BE ASSIGNED TO SELECT THE WALL BUCKY. THE FIRST WALL BUCKY SELECTOR
SHOULD BE USED FOR 40 IN. (100 CM) SIDS WITH THE APPROPRIATE PREVIOUSLY
CALIBRATED FILM SCREEN. THE SECOND WALL BUCKY SELECTOR SHOULD THEN BE
USED WITH THE PREVIOUSLY UNCALIBRATED FILM SCREEN AT 72 IN. (180 CM) SIDS.
THIS METHOD WILL ALLOW THE GRID TO BE OPTIMIZED FOR EACH SID, AS A
SEPARATE DEDICATED FILM SCREEN WITH ITS OWN CALIBRATION CURVE CAN BE
ASSIGNED TO THE 72 IN. (180CM) SID.
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-41
3D
AEC Calibration
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
14.
15.
16.
Page 3D-42
Action
USE OF ONE FILM SCREEN FOR BOTH SIDS USING PREVIOUSLY CALIBRATED
FILM SCREENS
Set up the X-ray tube stand as shown in figure 3D-15.
Align the tube stand and wall Bucky such that the central ray is centered relative to the
image receptor.
Open up the collimator to expose all three fields of the AEC pickup. Ensure that the
central ray remains centered relative to the image receptor.
Place the R probe at the film plane, i.e. behind the grid. If this cannot be done, then
attach the probe to the front of the Bucky. Ensure that the R-probe is located directly
under the central ray. The R meter must be set to measure in the micro-R range.
Place the absorber (with thickness selected for 75 kV per table 3D-12) in the X-ray field,
ensuring that the radiation is COMPLETELY blocked by the absorber.
Select the wall Bucky image receptor.
Select the slowest film screen used for the wall Bucky, then select the appropriate mA
for that film screen per table 3D-12 (example 320 mA for 100 speed film). Select 75 kV,
large focus, center field.
Make an exposure and note the dose and mAs.
Referring to table 3D-13, select the previously established dose required at the 75 kV
knee breakpoint for the film speed being calibrated.
Note that the dose values in the table are based on a specific R-probe placement
during table Bucky calibration (either at the film plane, or alternately in front of the
Bucky). If the probe placement for wall Bucky calibration is not the same as it was
for table Bucky calibration, use the estimated dose correction factor in this
subsection under GRID ABSORPTION.
Adjust the required gain potentiometer on the AEC board (see note below) while taking
exposures until the dose noted in the previous step is obtained.
CHANNEL 2 ON THE AEC BOARD IS TYPICALLY USED FOR THE WALL
BUCKY AEC CHAMBER. YOUR INSTALLATION MAY USE A DIFFERENT
CHANNEL ON THE AEC BOARD. DO NOT READJUST THE GAIN POT FOR
THE CHANNEL THAT WAS PREVIOUSLY CALIBRATED (FOR TABLE BUCKY).
REFER TO TABLE 3D-10 FOR THE AEC BOARD GAIN POTENTIOMETER
(GAIN POT) DESIGNATIONS FOR THE VARIOUS AEC BOARDS.
Load the test cassette with fresh film and install it in the image receptor. Using the same
technique, expose the film and develop it.
Measure the O.D. The desired value should have been previously recorded in a copy of
table 3D-1.
If the measured O.D. is not within 5% of the desired value, adjust the gain pot (as per
step 10) to increase or decrease the density, then repeat the previous two steps.
Change the SID to 40 in. (100 cm) and repeat steps 11 to 13. Adjust the gain pot if
necessary to achieve an acceptable compromise between both SIDs.
Verify the O.D. at a range of different kVs.
USE OF TWO FILM SCREENS (ONE FOR EACH SID) USING ONE PREVIOUSLY
CALIBRATED FILM SCREEN AND ONE UNCALIBRATED FILM SCREEN
Select the wall bucky image receptor via the selector configured for the 40 in. (100 cm)
SID.
Repeat steps 1 to 13 at the 40 in. (100 cm) SID position using the appropriate previously
calibrated film screen.
Rev. J
Ch # 740904-06
AEC Calibration
3D
21.
Action
Verify the O.D. at a range of different kVs.
Switch the generator OFF. Re-enter the programming mode as detailed in the TABLE
BUCKY AEC calibration section.
Select the wall Bucky image receptor via the selector configured for the 72 in. (180 cm)
SID.
Calibrate the film screen assigned to this SID as per the table Bucky procedure. The
calibration pot is NOT to be adjusted during this procedure (this was calibrated in the
preceding procedure). All breakpoints, including the 75 kV knee breakpoint, are to be
calibrated by adjusting the calibration numbers ONLY.
When complete, exit the AEC CALIBRATION and GEN CONFIGURATION menu.
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-43
3D
AEC Calibration
Page 3D-44
Rev. J
Ch # 740904-06
ABS Calibration
3E
CHAPTER 3
SECTION 3E
ABS CALIBRATION
CONTENTS:
3E.1.0 INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................................................................3E-2
3E.1.1 Overview of ABS Operation ...................................................................................................................3E-2
3E.1.2 Image Intensifier Light Output................................................................................................................3E-3
3E.1.3 ABS Pickup Devices ..............................................................................................................................3E-4
3E.1.4 Required Test Equipment ......................................................................................................................3E-5
3E.2.0 ABS PICKUP INSTALLATION / WIRING ..................................................................................................3E-5
3E.2.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................3E-5
3E.2.2 ABS Jumper Matrix. ...............................................................................................................................3E-6
3E.2.3 PMT (Photo Multiplier Tube) ..................................................................................................................3E-7
3E.2.4 Photo Diode ...........................................................................................................................................3E-7
3E.2.5 DC Proportional .....................................................................................................................................3E-8
3E.2.6 Composite Video....................................................................................................................................3E-8
3E.3.0 FLUORO SETUP AND CALIBRATION.....................................................................................................3E-8
3E.3.1 Fluoro Setup Menu Structure.................................................................................................................3E-9
3E.3.2 High Level Fluoro (HLF).......................................................................................................................3E-11
3E.3.3 Dose Limits / PF Setup ........................................................................................................................3E-14
3E.3.4 ABS Defaults........................................................................................................................................3E-20
3E.3.5 I.I. Input Dose Calibration ....................................................................................................................3E-24
Ch # 740904-07
Rev. H
Page 3E-1
3E
ABS Calibration
3E.1.0 INTRODUCTION
3E.1.1 Overview of ABS Operation
Refer to figure 3E-1, this is a block diagram of the ABS system.
X-rays pass through the patient and excite the input cesium phosphor of the image intensifier
(I.I.). This will cause the output of the I.I. to fluoresce and project the image to the TV camera via the
collimating lens. A sample of the light output is then sensed by a photodiode or photomultiplier tube
(PMT), or composite or proportional video will be fed back from the camera.
The feedback signal is processed by the ABS circuits on the generator interface board. The
result, regardless of the type of ABS sensor used, will be a DC voltage proportional to the brightness of
the image. This DC signal is then processed by the generator CPU board. The CPU compares the
feedback voltage with a reference value determined by dose rate, mA, kVp, and mA ranges set during
ABS calibration. The CPU will attempt to maintain constant image brightness by varying the kVp and / or
mA output of the power supply according to a predetermined algorithm.
Page 3E-2
Rev. H
Ch # 740904-07
ABS Calibration
3E
Ch # 740904-07
Rev. H
Page 3E-3
3E
ABS Calibration
Photo-multiplier tube
HIGH VOLTAGE
TO J7 PIN 1 OF UNIVERSAL
AEC INTERFACE BOARD
TO J7 PIN-12
TO J7 PIN-7
GENERATOR
INTERFACE BOARD
Photo Diode
Page 3E-4
Rev. H
Ch # 740904-07
ABS Calibration
3E
3E.2.1 Overview
The generator has been factory configured to be compatible with one of the following ABS pickup types.
Field reconfiguration to accept other ABS pickup types, listed below, is possible if required.
Refer to chapter 1E for the AEC board and generator interface board location in your generator.
Ch # 740904-07
Rev. H
Page 3E-5
3E
ABS Calibration
J7
OUT
J8
OUT
Photo Diode
(negative output)
Photo Diode
(positive output)
Photo Diode
0-5 VDC neg/pos
Proportional DC
0-5 VDC positive
Proportional DC
0-5 VDC positive
Proportional DC
0-5 VDC negative
Proportional DC
0-5 VDC negative
Composite video
terminated 75
Composite video
high impedance
Via optional
expansion board in
digital system
J7
OUT
J7
OUT
J7
OUT
J7
OUT
J8
OUT
J7
OUT
J8
OUT
J8
OUT
IN
J8
IN
OUT
Via
J13
OUT
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
PINS
1-2
PINS
1-2
PINS
1-2
PINS
2-3
PINS
2-3
PINS
2-3
PINS
2-3
PINS
1-2
PINS
1-2
PINS
3-4
PINS
3-4
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
PINS
1-2
IN
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
OUT
OUT
PINS
1-2
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
PINS
1-2
PINS
2-3
PINS
2-3
IN
IN
PINS
2-3
PINS
2-3
PINS
2-3
PINS
2-3
PINS
2-3
PINS
2-3
PINS
2-3
PINS
2-3
PINS
2-3
PINS
2-3
PINS
2-3
PINS
1-2
Page 3E-6
Rev. H
Ch # 740904-07
ABS Calibration
WARNING:
CAPACITORS
3E
ARE
a negative DC voltage to positive DC voltage for increasing light flux. The required dose is set for
0 volts. The output will be negative for reduced light due to increased patient absorption, then
swinging positive for increased light due to reduced patient absorption.
4. Position the jumpers on the generator interface board as per table 3E-1 for Photo Diode. Please
ensure that the correct configuration is selected per your photo diode type as detailed above.
Ch # 740904-07
Rev. H
Page 3E-7
3E
ABS Calibration
3E.2.5 DC Proportional
1. Dress the signal cable from the camera to allow it to connect to J7 on the generator interface board.
Wire to J7 as per figure 3E-3. Alternately, the DC proportional signal output may be connected to
BNC connector J8 on the generator interface board.
2. Ensure that there is sufficient slack in the cable such that the cabinet door (Millenia generators) does
not strain this cable when opening and closing. Secure the cable in place such as to prevent
mechanical stress on the connections.
3. Position the jumpers on the generator interface board as per table 3E-1 for Proportional DC,
selecting the correct configuration depending on whether the input is at J7 or J8 and whether the
polarity is negative or positive.
3E.2.6 Composite Video
1. Dress the composite video output from the camera to allow it to connect to J8 on the generator
interface board.
2. Ensure that there is sufficient slack in the cable such that the cabinet door (Millenia generators) does
not strain this cable when opening and closing. Secure the cable in place such as to prevent
mechanical stress on the terminations.
3. Position the jumpers on the generator interface board as per table 3E-1 for Composite Video,
selecting the correct configuration depending on whether the video is 75 ohm-terminated or high
impedance (it must be determined beforehand whether the 75 ohm termination must be made at the
generator).
Composite video ABS is not recommended with pulsed fluoro applications.
3E.3.0 FLUORO SETUP AND CALIBRATION
Before the ABS system can be calibrated, the imaging system must be functional and properly set up.
Please verify the following:
Page 3E-8
Rev. H
Ch # 740904-07
ABS Calibration
3E
*FLUORO SETUP*
DOSE LIMITS
ABS SETUP
MIN FLUORO KV:
I/I MODES:
FL-RAD KV XFER:
50
2
6
+
-
>>
EXIT
*FLUORO SETUP*
ABS DEFAULT: OFF
FL TIMER MODE: 10MIN
<<
LOOP GAIN: 60
NOMINAL DOSE:
DOSE 1: 100
DOSE 2: 100
<<
*ABS SETUP*
AUTO MA/KV CURVE: 1
ABS CHANNEL: 5
80
+
-
5.0MA:
6.0MA:
125KV
125KV
125KV
125KV
<<
125KV
125KV
>>
5.0MA:
6.0MA:
125KV
125KV
125KV
125KV
<<
125KV
125KV
RETURN
FILE: V_A_ABS.CDR
Ch # 740904-07
Rev. H
Page 3E-9
Page 3E-10
Rev. H
125KV
125KV
125KV
125KV
<<
125KV
125KV
125KV
125KV
<<
1.0MA:
2.0MA:
3.0MA:
4.0MA:
1.0MA:
2.0MA:
3.0MA:
4.0MA:
LOOP GAIN: 60
NOMINAL DOSE:
DOSE 1: 100
DOSE 2: 100
<<
<<
PF MA:
PF MS:
>>
20
6
+
-
2
6
+
-
125KV
125KV
+
-
125KV
125KV
+
-
3 PPS:
7.5 PPS:
15 PPS:
30 PPS:
<<
<<
125
125
125
125
KV
KV
KV
KV
*ABS SETUP*
FL SIGNAL GAIN: 20
PF SIGNAL GAIN: 20
+
FILE: V_B_ABS.CDR
RETURN
RETURN
*HLF SETUP*
HLF ABS DEF. : NONE
HLF: OFF
20
HLF MAX MA:
HLF DEFAULT: OFF
+
HLF ABS RANGE: HIGH
HLF MA/KV CURVE: 0
<<
<<
*FLUORO SETUP*
ABS DEFAULT: OFF
FL TIMER MODE: 10MIN
HIGH LEVEL FLUORO
ABS Calibration
>>
5.0MA:
6.0MA:
>>
5.0MA:
6.0MA:
*ABS SETUP*
AUTO MA/KV CURVE: 1
ABS CHANNEL: 5
80
+
>>
*PF SETUP*
50
I/I MODES:
FL-RAD KV XFER:
*FLUORO SETUP*
PF: ON
PF DEFAULT:
ON
PPS DEFAULT: NONE
DOSE LIMITS
ABS SETUP
PULSED FLUORO
MIN FLUORO KV:
EXIT
3E
CPI Canada Inc.
Ch # 740904-07
ABS Calibration
3E
WARNING:
USE OF HIGH LEVEL FLUORO MAY CAUSE INCREASED TUBE HEATING. PLEASE
ENSURE THAT THE X-RAY TUBE THERMAL SWITCH IS FUNCTIONING PROPERLY, THAT
THE THERMAL SWITCH IS PROPERLY CONNECTED TO THE GENERATOR, AND THAT
THE GENERATOR THERMAL INTERLOCK CIRCUITS ARE FUNCTIONING NORMALLY.
HLF
HLF DEFAULT
HLF MAX MA
Sets the maximum allowed HLF mA. The maximum HLF mA range
is 10 to 20 mA. This may be used to set the maximum HLF dose
limit.
Ch # 740904-07
Rev. H
Page 3E-11
3E
ABS Calibration
Page 3E-12
Action
From the FLUORO SETUP menu, select HIGH LEVEL FLUORO.
In the HLF SETUP menu, set the HLF parameters described on the previous page as
required.
The parameters HLF, HLF DEFAULT, HLF ABS RANGE, and HLF ABS DEF are set
by toggling the buttons adjacent to these functions.
HLF MA/KV CURVE and HLF MAX MA are set by pressing the adjacent button to
select these functions, then by using the + or - buttons to select the desired value.
Rev. H
Ch # 740904-07
ABS Calibration
3E
F
L
U
O
R
O
F
L
U
O
R
O
40
50
60
70
80
40
50
60
FLUORO kV
70
80
FLUORO kV
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
M 4
A 2
0
F
L
U
O
R
O
F
L
U
O
R
O
40
50
60
70
80
40
50
60
FLUORO kV
80
FLUORO kV
70
F
L
U
O
R
O
F
L
U
O
R
O
40
50
60
70
80
40
50
FLUORO kV
60
70
80
FLUORO kV
Ch # 740904-07
Rev. H
Page 3E-13
3E
ABS Calibration
Page 3E-14
Rev. H
Ch # 740904-07
ABS Calibration
3E
NOTE:
CAUTION:
4.
5.
6.
7.
6.
7.
8.
Action
Set up the radiation probe as per figure 3E-7 in the position indicated Max. Patient
Input Dose. Refer to the note above re focal spot to radiation probe distance. No
absorber is required at this point in the setup.
Temporarily unplug the ABS pickup at J7 or J8 of the generator interface board.
Temporarily de-energize the I.I. power supply, or cover the I.I. with approximately 1/16
in. (1.6 mm) lead.
Enter into the generator programming mode. Refer to chapter 3C, section 3C.1.1.
From the GENERATOR SETUP menu select GEN CONFIGURATION.
From the GEN CONFIGURATION menu select FLUORO SETUP. Select a
fluoroscopic image receptor.
Select ABS SETUP. Select AUTO MA/KV CURVE, then use the + or - buttons to
select auto mA/kV curve 1.
Select << to return to the FLUORO SETUP menu.
Ch # 740904-07
Rev. H
Page 3E-15
3E
ABS Calibration
Action
Record the maximum permissible input
dose values for ABS, non-ABS (manual),
and PF (optional) modes of fluoroscopy as
per local regulations.
Result
Maximum permitted input dose:
ABS mode:______________ R/Min.
Non ABS mode:__________ R/Min.
PF mode:_______________ R/Min.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Page 3E-16
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
Rev. H
Ch # 740904-07
ABS Calibration
3E
24.
Action
While observing the dosimeter, make a
fluoroscopy exposure. Adjust the kV via
the fluoro section of the console such that
the maximum permitted dose as recorded
in step 9 for non-ABS mode is not
exceeded.
Record the kV value as determined in the
previous step for the 6.0 mA setting.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
Ch # 740904-07
Result
Rev. H
Page 3E-17
3E
ABS Calibration
PF
PF DEFAULT
PPS DEFAULT
NONE defaults the PPS rate to the last selected value. If the last
used PPS was 15, the PPS will default to 15 when PF is reselected.
Selecting one of the available PPS rates (3, 7.5, 15, or 30 PPS) will
default the PPS to that value when PF is selected.
The PF SETUP menu displays 60 Hz based PPS rates only. For
systems with 50 Hz based sync input, select the PPS rate nearest
to the desired PPS (2.5, 6.25, 12.5, or 25 PPS).
PF MA
PF MS
Step
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
Page 3E-18
Action
Set PF, PF DEFAULT, and PPS
DEFAULT as appropriate. These items
are set by selecting the button adjacent to
the desired parameter, then toggling the
button to make the desired selection.
Set the PF MA and PF MS by pressing the
button adjacent to the desired selection,
then setting the desired value using the +
or - buttons adjacent to the LCD display.
Select << to return to the FLUORO
SETUP menu.
From the FLUORO SETUP menu, select
DOSE LIMITS.
From the DOSE LIM - ABS menu, press
>> two times.
Select a fluoroscopic image receptor.
Ensure that pulsed fluoro is ON.
Rev. H
Result
Ch # 740904-07
ABS Calibration
3E
44.
45.
46.
47.
Action
Set the default kV for each PPS station in
the DOSE LIM - PF menu to the maximum
permissible value as per local regulations.
To do this, select the desired PPS in the
LCD display, then use the + or - buttons
adjacent to the LCD display to set the
maximum kV.
Select 3 PPS in the fluoro control section
of the console.
While observing the dosimeter, make a
pulsed fluoroscopy exposure. Adjust the
kV via the fluoro section of the console
such that the maximum permitted dose as
recorded in step 9 for PF mode is not
exceeded.
Record the kV value as determined in the
previous step for the 3 PPS setting.
48.
49.
Result
50.
Ch # 740904-07
Rev. H
Page 3E-19
3E
ABS Calibration
3.
Page 3E-20
Action
From the FLUORO SETUP menu, select MIN FLUORO KV. Press the + or - buttons
to select the minimum kV to be allowed in fluoro.
Select I/I MODES. Press the + or - buttons to select the number of magnification
modes in the I.I. (2 corresponds to 2 mag modes plus normal mode). If this is set to 0,
the console and remote fluoro control will not display the mag status. This may be
desired if an external mag mode control and display are used.
Select FL-RAD KV XFER. Press the + or - buttons to select the desired fluoro - rad kV
transfer curve.
This allows selection of one-of-seven fluoro to rad kV transfer curves (Millenia) or oneof-ten fluoro to rad kV transfer curves (Indico 100). When in fluoro operation with ABS
on, the fluoro kV value is transferred to the RADIOGRAPHY section of the console at
the end of the fluoro exposure. This presets the rad kV in preparation for a rapid
follow-on radiographic exposure for digital acquisition or spot film work. Selecting 0
disables this function.
Graphs of the fluoro kV to rad kV transfer function are shown on the next two pages.
Rev. H
Ch # 740904-07
ABS Calibration
3E
50
60
70
80
90
CURVE 2
150
140
130
R 120
A 110
D 100
90
80
k
V 70
60
50
40
40
50
60
70
FLUORO kV
50
60
70
80
90
50
60
70
60
70
80
90
80
90
FLUORO kV
CURVE 5
50
CURVE 4
150
140
130
R 120
A 110
D 100
90
80
k
V 70
60
50
40
40
FLUORO kV
150
140
130
R 120
A 110
D 100
90
80
k
V 70
60
50
40
40
90
FLUORO kV
CURVE 3
150
140
130
R 120
A 110
D 100
90
80
k
V 70
60
50
40
40
80
CURVE 6
150
140
130
R 120
A 110
D 100
90
80
k
V 70
60
50
40
40
50
60
70
FLUORO kV
80
90
FLUORO kV
FILE: ABS_CURVES1.CDR
Ch # 740904-07
Rev. H
Page 3E-21
3E
ABS Calibration
CURVE 7
150
140
130
R 120
A 110
D 100
90
80
k
V 70
60
50
40
40
50
60
70
80
150
140
130
R 120
A 110
D 100
90
80
k
V 70
60
50
40
40
50
60
70
FLUORO kV
50
60
70
80
CURVE 10 *
FLUORO kV
90
FLUORO kV
CURVE 9 *
150
140
130
R 120
A 110
D 100
90
80
k
V 70
60
50
40
40
80
150
140
130
R 120
A 110
D 100
90
80
k
V 70
60
50
40
40
50
60
70
80
90
FLUORO kV
FILE: ABS_CURVES2.CDR
Page 3E-22
Rev. H
Ch # 740904-07
ABS Calibration
3E
Action
From the FLUORO SETUP menu select >>. The above menu will display.
Select ABS DEFAULT. Toggle to select NONE, OFF, or ABS.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
M
A
4.5
4
3.5
3
2.5
2
1.5
1
0.5
0
kV linear mA
mA leading kV
kV leading mA #1
kV leading mA #2
40
50
60
70
80
KV
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-07
Rev. H
Page 3E-23
3E
ABS Calibration
Ensure that the collimator is adjusted to only expose the I.I. input.
The central ray from the X-ray tube must coincide with the center of the I.I.
The required I.I. input dose must be known before proceeding.
Page 3E-24
Rev. H
Ch # 740904-07
ABS Calibration
3E
11.
12.
13.
Action
Reconnect the ABS pickup plug that was temporarily disconnected from J7 or J8 of
the generator interface board in an earlier step.
Re-energize the I.I. power supply or remove the lead that was temporarily installed in
an earlier step.
Set up the radiation probe as per figure 3E-7 in the position indicated I.I. Input Dose.
This must be able to read dose values as low as 2 to 3 mR / min.
Set up the absorber as shown in figure 3E-7. 1 1/2 (40 mm) of aluminum or 20 cm of
water is recommended. Ensure that the absorber covers the full input field of the I.I.
Ensure that the ABS is switched off. Select 75 kV and 1.5 mA.
Ensure that the I.I. is in the NORMAL mode (MAG = 0). Ensure that an anti-scatter
grid, if used, is properly installed.
Make a fluoro exposure and measure the I.I. input dose.
Adjust the fluoro kV to achieve the desired input dose.
Connect a DVM or scope to TP8 and ground of the generator interface board.
FOR GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARDS WITH ABS GAIN ADJUST
POTENTIOMETER R48 (no pulsed fluoro option):
Adjust R48 on the generator interface board to achieve 1.50 VDC at the test points
connected to in the previous step.
FOR GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARDS WITH DIGITAL ABS GAIN ADJUST
POT (units with pulsed fluoro option):
From the ABS SETUP menu, select >>.
Select FL SIGNAL GAIN, then use the + or - buttons to adjust the digital gain pot
to achieve 1.50 VDC at the test points connected to in the previous step.
Select PF SIGNAL GAIN, then use the + or - buttons to adjust the I.I. input dose
to achieve the desired frame rate dose.
Setting the PF signal gain to 0 causes the generator to use the FL SIGNAL GAIN
setting with PF. This may be used when a conditioned ABS signal is provided to the
generator where the continuous and PF signal levels are scaled to be equal.
Select << to return to the ABS SETUP menu.
From the ABS SETUP menu, select LOOP GAIN. Press the + or - buttons to select
the initial value of 100.
ENSURE THAT THE DOSE IS SET TO 0 ON THE CONSOLE.
From the ABS SETUP menu, select NOMINAL DOSE. Press the + or - buttons to
select a value of 200.
Switch the ABS on. The LED adjacent to the ABS switch will light.
NOTE: STEPS 14 TO 16 APPLY ONLY IF USING A PMT. IGNORE THESE STEPS
FOR OTHER ABS PICKUP DEVICES
WARNING: SWITCH OFF THE GENERATOR AND ENSURE THAT ALL
CAPACITORS ARE DISCHARGED BEFORE MAKING AND REMOVING THE PMT
CURRENT MEASURING EQUIPMENT
Ch # 740904-07
Rev. H
Page 3E-25
3E
ABS Calibration
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
Page 3E-26
Action
Connect a micro ammeter in series with the PMT signal output. Alternately, if a micro
ammeter is not available, follow this procedure:
Temporarily connect a resistor of known value (100K is suggested) from either
end of R61 on the generator interface board to ground. A DVM can then be used
to measure the voltage developed by the PMT current across this resistor.
However, this is not the preferred method of measurement.
Adjust the PMT high voltage using R10 (refer to figure 3E-6) on the AEC interface
board while pressing the fluoro footswitch such that the PMT current is 20 5 uA at
the desired I.I. input dose. This corresponds to a voltage of 2.00 0.50 VDC for a
100K resistor if using the voltmeter method in the above step. The high voltage should
be approximately -750 VDC at this point.
The PMT high voltage is adjusted to yield the PMT current noted in this step. The
approximate value of PMT voltage is stated for reference only. The PMT voltage does
not normally need to be measured in this step, however, if it is desired to do so for
troubleshooting purposes please note the following:
USE TP5 ONLY ON THE AEC INTERFACE BOARD FOR THE HV METER
GROUND WHEN MEASURING PMT HIGH VOLTAGE. CONNECT THE GROUND
FIRST BEFORE MEASURING THE HIGH VOLTAGE. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO
MEASURE THIS WITHOUT A SUITABLE METER.
Disconnect the meter (and resistor if applicable) that was connected in step 3.
Reconnect the PMT signal lead if required.
Verify stability of the ABS system with continuous fluoroscopy. Check stability with
and without the absorber. The ABS should quickly stabilize without hunting or settling
on the wrong kV value.
If the ABS is unstable, try reducing the sensitivity of the ABS pickup device first. If this
does not work, try reducing the LOOP GAIN. However, be aware that reducing the
loop gain increases the hysterisis (deadband), consequently the kV may stabilize on
any value within the deadband range.
Initiate fluoro operation and measure the input dose to the I.I. If this value is not as
desired adjust the NOMINAL DOSE using the + or - buttons as required. Record the
nominal dose calibration value as indicated in the LCD display in the next step.
Record the NOMINAL DOSE calibration
value as determined in the previous step.
Nominal Dose (cal value): _______
Record the desired dose 1 and dose 2
Desired dose values:
input values.
Dose 1:______________ mR / Min
Dose 2:______________ mR / Min
To disable the ability to make incremental dose changes, set the DOSE 1 and DOSE
2 calibration values the same as the nominal dose value. If doing so, skip steps 21 to
25.
Initiate fluoro operation and measure the input dose to the I.I. Adjust to the desired
dose 1 value by altering the NOMINAL DOSE calibration value as required using the
+ or - buttons.
When the desired dose 1 value has been achieved, enter the new NOMINAL DOSE
value in the DOSE 1 location using the + or - buttons.
Rev. H
Ch # 740904-07
ABS Calibration
3E
24.
25.
26.
27.
Action
Initiate fluoro operation and measure the input dose to the I.I. Adjust to the desired
dose 2 value by altering the NOMINAL DOSE calibration value as required using the +
or - buttons.
When the desired dose 2 value has been achieved, enter the new NOMINAL DOSE
value in the DOSE 2 location using the + or - buttons.
Reset the original NOMINAL DOSE value by entering the value recorded in step 19 of
this table into the NOMINAL DOSE location using the + or - buttons.
Verify each dose (nominal, dose 1, and dose 2) by initiating fluoro operation and
measuring the I.I. input dose.
Press <<, then EXIT to exit out of FLUORO SETUP mode. Press EXIT, then EXIT
SETUP to return to the normal operating mode.
This completes the fluoro calibration.
Ch # 740904-07
Rev. H
Page 3E-27
3E
ABS Calibration
Page 3E-28
Rev. H
Ch # 740904-07
DAP Setup
3F
CHAPTER 3
SECTION 3F
DAP SETUP AND CALIBRATION
CONTENTS:
3F.1.0 INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................................................................3F-2
3F.2.0 DAP INTERFACING ..................................................................................................................................3F-2
3F.2.1 DAP Compatibility ..................................................................................................................................3F-2
3F.2.2 DAP Installation......................................................................................................................................3F-2
3F.3.0 DAP SETUP...............................................................................................................................................3F-3
3F.3.1 DAP Setup Menu ...................................................................................................................................3F-3
3F.3.2 DAP SETUP Menu Items .......................................................................................................................3F-4
3F.4.0 DAP CALIBRATION ..................................................................................................................................3F-6
3F.4.1 Equipment Required ..............................................................................................................................3F-6
3F.4.2 DAP calibration overview .......................................................................................................................3F-7
3F.4.3 DAP Calibration Procedure ....................................................................................................................3F-7
3F.4.4 DAP Calculation Worksheet.................................................................................................................3F-10
Ch # 740895-09
Rev. C
Page 3F-1
3F
DAP Setup
3F.1.0 INTRODUCTION
This section details setup and programming of the DAP (Dose-Area Product) meter, optional on Indico
100 X-ray generators.
Any references made to tube 2 or the ability to switch tubes in this section apply to two tube generators
only.
INTERCONNECT CABLE
736145-00
736146-00
Contact VacuTEC for this cable assembly.
736148-00
Switch OFF the AC line voltage to the generator at the main disconnect switch. Allow sufficient
time for all capacitors in the generator to discharge.
2.
Install the DAP chamber as per the manufacturers instructions. The interconnect cable to the
generator must be as per 3F.2.1.
3.
Route the DAP interconnect cable(s) through the access covers in the upper part of the generator
cabinet, then route the cables toward the DAP interface board.
4.
Plug the cable from DAP device 1 (for tube 1) into J2, and the cable from DAP device 2 (for tube
2) into J3 of the DAP interface board. Tighten the screw locks on the connectors to secure the
cables.
5.
Proceed with DAP setup and calibration as per the remainder of this procedure.
Page 3F-2
Rev. C
Ch # 740895-09
DAP Setup
3F
<<
EXIT
Ch # 740895-09
Rev. C
Page 3F-3
3F
DAP Setup
* DAP SETUP *
DAP
0mGycm2
TEST VALUE 1: 1000
DEVICE TYPE 2:
0
+
>>
On the Indico 100 Rad-only console, the DAP function is located under the MENU button.
MENU 2 (DAP SETUP)
TUBE 1
0%HU
* DAP SETUP *
0mGycm2
CAL. VALUE 2: 10
DAP RATE DISPLAY: ON
TEST VALUE 2: 1000
ACC ALARM (mGycm2):
100000
+
2
RATE ALARM (mGycm /S):
1000
4mAs
<<
DAP
>>
MAG:0
RATE ALARM and DAP RATE DISPLAY are not used on Indico 100 Rad-only units.
MENU 3 (DAP RESET AND TEST)
DAP = 0mGycm2
DAP TEST: OK
[ 200 PULSES ]
RESET
EXIT
TEST
On the Indico 100 Rad-only console, the EXIT function is located under the MENU button.
DAP
Page 3F-4
Rev. C
Ch # 740895-09
DAP Setup
3F
DAP MODE
DEVICE TYPE
0 = PTW PX-T11020.
1 = Gammex RMI 841S.
2 = VacuTec VacuDAP 2004.
3 = Scanditronix 120-131.
CAL. VALUE
TEST VALUE
Sets the alarm level for accumulated DAP. The console will
present an audible alarm, and a visual warning via the LCD
display when the accumulated dose exceeds this limit.
Sets the alarm level for the maximum DAP rate. The console
will present an audible alarm, and a visual warning via the
LCD display when the current dose rate exceeds this limit.
DAP
RESET
TEST
Ch # 740895-09
Rev. C
Page 3F-5
3F
DAP Setup
Page 3F-6
Rev. C
Ch # 740895-09
DAP Setup
3F
CTM
TUBE 1
DAP chamber 1
70 cm
TUBE 2
Ch # 740895-09
Rev. C
Page 3F-7
3F
DAP Setup
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Page 3F-8
Action
Set up the dosimeter as per figure 3F-1.The probe should be centered relative
to the central ray from the X-ray tube, and sufficiently far off the table top to
minimize scatter radiation. Do not use any absorber during this procedure.
Open the collimator such that the field size at the location of the probe is
approximately 12 cm X 12 cm. Ensure that the probe is fully irradiated.
Temporarily set the DAP MODE to IND. Refer to section 3F.3.2.
Enter DAP SETUP menu 1 or menu 2 as required to display the CAL. VALUE
1 parameter for DAP device 1, or the CAL. VALUE 2 parameter for DAP
device 2.
Select the desired DAP device to calibrate by selecting tube 1 or tube 2 via an
appropriate image receptor. Start with the over-table tube.
Set the generator to 70 kV, 100 mA, 20 ms.
Press DAP to access the RESET / TEST menu, then press RESET to reset the
DAP display to zero. Press EXIT to return to DAP SETUP menu 1 or menu 2.
Make an X-ray exposure and note the dose per the dosimeter. Record the mR
or mGy value in a copy of table 3F-1. Convert the mR value to mGy, if
necessary.
Note the DAP value as displayed on the console, and record the value in a
copy of table 3F-1.
Replace the dosimeter with an X-ray cassette and film if available. The film
plane must be at the same location as the dosimeter was in step 8.
If using an image sensor such as an I.I., or flat panel, or other non-film image
sensor, the image pickup plane must be at the same location as the dosimeter
was in step 8.
THE IMPORTANCE OF THIS STEP CANNOT BE OVERSTATED: THE
IRRADIATED AREA MEASUREMENT MUST BE MADE AT A POINT THAT
IS THE SAME DISTANCE FROM THE X-RAY SOURCE AS THE DOSE WAS
MEASURED AT.
Ensure that the collimator field at the measurement plane is smaller than the
active area of the image pick-up device (film, I.I., or other). Refer to figure 3F-2.
Do not readjust the collimator from the setting that was used in step 8.
Make another exposure using the same settings as in step 6.
Develop the film (if used).
Measure the irradiated image area. For film, measure the length and width of
the exposed area, and record the results in table 3F-1. Refer to figure 3F-2.
If using a digital imaging system, some systems have a cursor available that
allows measurement of the length and width of the area in question. If the
digital imaging system does not allow image size measurement, it is suggested
that an X-ray opaque item of known dimensions be placed at the image plane.
(A collimator test tool would be useful in this application). The length and width
of the irradiated area can then be extrapolated by comparison to the size of the
reference object. Record the length and width of the irradiated area at the
measurement plane in table 3F-1.
Calculate the irradiated image area, in cm2. Use the length and width recorded
in table 3F-1.
Calculate the dose-area product by multiplying the area from table 3F-1 X the
dose in mGy from table 3F-1. Record the resulting value at step 3 in table 3F-1.
Rev. C
Ch # 740895-09
DAP Setup
3F
18.
19.
20.
21.
EXPOSED
AREA
ILLUMINATED
COLLIMATOR
FIELD
13.6
DEVELOPED FILM
Ch # 740895-09
Rev. C
Page 3F-9
3F
DAP Setup
2.
ACTION
RESULT
Measured dose:
_____________ mR
_____________ mGy
3.
_____________
(mGycm2)
DAP
DAP
4.
_____________
(mGycm2)
5.
_____________ % error
THIS TABLE IS REPEATED BELOW FOR THE SECOND ITERATION OF THE DAP CALIBRATION.
STEP
1.
2.
ACTION
RESULT
Measured dose:
_____________ mR
_____________ mGy
3.
_____________
(mGycm2)
DAP
DAP
4.
_____________
(mGycm2)
5.
_____________ % error
Page 3F-10
Rev. C
Ch # 740895-09
DAP Setup
3F
2.
ACTION
RESULT
Measured dose:
____23.3_____ mR
____0.203____ mGy
3.
4.
5.
____-8.9______ % error
(36.44 - 40)
-3.56
X 100 =
X 100 = -8.9 %
40
40
Ch # 740895-09
Rev. C
Page 3F-11
3F
DAP Setup
Page 3F-12
Rev. C
Ch # 740895-09
Acceptance Testing
CHAPTER 4
ACCEPTANCE TESTING
CONTENTS:
4.1.0
INTRODUCTION
This section details acceptance testing, which verifies that the generator is performing within limits. It is
recommended that this be done whenever the generator is reconfigured, or component(s) are replaced
which may affect the X-ray output. Examples of such components are the X-ray tube, HT tank, generator
CPU board, generator interface board, AEC board, control board 1 and control board 2 in the HF power
supply (Millenia) or the control board (Indico 100), and the filament supply board(s).
Ch # 740904-08
Rev. J
Page 4-1
Acceptance Testing
WARNING:
WARNING:
WARNING:
1. ALWAYS ENSURE THAT THE EQUIPMENT UNDER TEST AND ALL ASSOCIATED TEST
EQUIPMENT IS PROPERLY GROUNDED.
2. ENSURE THAT THE HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES ARE INTACT / UNDAMAGED AND
PROPERLY CONNECTED BEFORE ATTEMPTING EXPOSURES.
ENSURE THAT THE FOLLOWING ITEMS ARE COMPLETED PRIOR TO PERFORMING THE
ACCEPTANCE TESTING:
4.2.0
The generator is interfaced to room equipment noted in the product description / compatibility
statement.
The tube auto calibration has been done as per chapter 2 of this manual.
The receptors have been programmed as per chapter 3C of this manual.
If the installation has AEC, verify that all receptors have been calibrated as per chapter 3D of this
manual.
If the installation has ABS, verify that the imaging system has been calibrated as per chapter 3E of
this manual.
Acceptance testing shall only be started after the installation is complete i.e.; generator in final
position and installed as per the previous chapters of this manual.
Page 4-2
kV measuring device such as a Dynalyzer (or equivalent). This will be required for verifying kV and
mA calibration during preventative maintenance or if recalibration is necessary, for example after
replacing the generator CPU board or control board 1 in the HF power supply. See note on page 11
regarding use of a Dynalyzer on Indico 100 generators.
Storage oscilloscope.
mA / mAs meter.
Radiation meter 0-1000 mR and 1-15 R/min.
Lead diaphragm or equivalent to collimate the beam.
General purpose DVM.
Strobe or reed tachometer.
Current probe 0 to 20 amps AC.
A set of HVL filters.
Calculator.
Rev. J
Ch # 740904-08
Acceptance Testing
4.3.0
4.3.1
For the touch screen console, check the console functionality by pressing the equivalent switch position
on the touch screen for the functions described in section 4.3.1 and 4.3.2. Verify the correct response on
the touch screen console for each function that is tested.
Step
1.
Action
Press the power ON then power OFF buttons
on the console.
Press power ON again to switch the unit on.
Press each of the receptor buttons that are
active (those that have been enabled during
generator configuration).
Result
Check
Ch # 740904-08
Rev. J
Page 4-3
Acceptance Testing
4.3.1
4.3.2
Action
Select 60 kV, 50 mA, 100 ms.
Press the PREP button.
Press the X-ray button.
15.
16.
Result
The adjacent LED lights.
Check
Page 4-4
Step
1.
2.
Action
Press the power ON button on the console.
Select an active fluoro receptor.
3.
4.
Rev. J
Result
Unit switches on.
A: The fluoro display area of the
console lights.
B: The remote fluoro control
panel lights (if used).
The dose display on the LCD
display changes as the switch is
toggled.
A: The MAG display on the
console LCD and remote
fluoro display changes (IF I/I
MODES IS ENABLED
DURING GENERATOR
CONFIGURATION) as the
MAG button is toggled.
B: The Mag display on the
console LCD and remote
fluoro display increases if
MAG + button is pressed,
decreases if MAG - button on
the remote fluoro control is
pressed (IF I/I MODES IS
ENABLED DURING
GENERATOR
CONFIGURATION.
Check
Ch # 740904-08
4.3.3
Acceptance Testing
Action
Press the ABS button on the console to enter
ABS mode.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Result
A: The LED adjacent to the
button lights.
B: The LED adjacent to the ABS
button on the remote fluoro
control (if used) lights.
The ABS indicator LEDs
adjacent to the ABS buttons on
the console and the remote
fluoro control (if used) switch off.
kV increases if kV + is pressed.
kV decreases if kV - is pressed.
Confirm tracking of the kV
displays on the console and the
remote fluoro control.
mA increases if mA + is pressed.
mA decreases if mA - is
pressed.
Confirm tracking of the mA
displays on the console and the
remote fluoro control.
The accumulated time indicator
will light, then extinguish on the
console as the switch is toggled.
The ACC indicator will light, then
extinguish on the remote fluoro
control as the switch is toggled.
The pulse fluoro indicator will
light, then extinguish as the
switch is toggled.
Unit switches off.
Check
WARNING:
NOTE:
Ch # 740904-08
Rev. J
Page 4-5
Acceptance Testing
4.3.3
Step
1.
Action
Ensure unit is switched OFF.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Page 4-6
Rev. J
Result
DS1 on generator interface
board is lit.
One or more LEDs on the
driver/auxiliary board in HF
power supply are lit. Millenia
generators only.
Check
Ch # 740904-08
Acceptance Testing
7.
Receptor 1 Ch # _______
Receptor 2 Ch # _______
Receptor 3 Ch # _______
Receptor 4 Ch # _______
Receptor 5 Ch # _______
Receptor 6 Ch # _______
N/A
THE MILLENIA AND INDICO 100 FAMILY OF GENERATORS ARE FITTED WITH A LOW SPEED
STARTER, OR OPTIONAL DUAL SPEED STARTER. USE SECTION 4.3.4 OR 4.3.5, AS
APPLICABLE, FOR YOUR GENERATOR.
4.3.4
2.
3.
Action
Result
Connect a current probe to the common lead
of tube 1.
A 60 Hz waveform dropping to
Switch ON the console.
less than half amplitude after
Press and hold the PREP button.
prep complete.
Measure the rotor boost time.
Should be approximately 1.5 sec.
Use a strobe or reed tachometer and verify
that the tube(s) reach operating speed at the
end of boost.
Speed 3300 RPM.
FOLLOW STEPS 4 TO 6 IF TUBE 2 IS USED (LOW SPEED STARTER)
Ch # 740904-08
Rev. J
Check
Page 4-7
Acceptance Testing
4.3.4
5.
6.
7.
4.3.5
A 60 Hz waveform dropping to
less than half amplitude after
prep complete.
Should be approximately 1.5 sec.
Speed 3300 RPM.
N/A
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Page 4-8
Action
Connect a current probe to the common lead
of tube 1.
Switch ON the console.
Select 70 kVp, minimum mA, 50 ms.
Press and hold the PREP button.
Measure the rotor boost time.
Result
Check
A 60 Hz waveform dropping to
less than half amplitude after
prep complete.
Should agree with the value in
the dual speed starter table in
chapter 2.
A 180 Hz waveform dropping to
less than half amplitude after
prep complete.
Should agree with the value in
the dual speed starter table in
chapter 2.
Rev. J
Ch # 740904-08
Acceptance Testing
10.
11.
12.
13.
Action
Select 100 kVp, maximum mA, 50 ms, small
focus.
Press and hold the PREP button.
Measure the rotor boost time.
4.4.0
4.4.1
Result
A 180 Hz waveform dropping to
less than half amplitude after
prep complete.
Should agree with the value in
the dual speed starter table in
chapter 2.
Check
Measurement of kVp, mA, and time may be done via test points at the generator CPU board as per figure
4-2. These are direct feedback voltages and are scaled to represent the actual kVp and X-ray tube
current AS LONG AS THE GENERATOR IS CALIBRATED.
REFER TO NOTES ON PAGE 11.
NOTE:
Ch # 740904-08
Rev. J
Page 4-9
Acceptance Testing
4.4.1
TP8
TP6
TP7
TP9
TP11
TP13
TP10
TP12
TP14
TP15
TP24
TP25
TP22
TP23
TP16
TP17
TP18
TP19
TP20
TP21
FILE: ML_CPU1.CDR
KVP
- +
TP8
1VOLT = 20 KV
TP10
1 VOLT = 100 mA
TP6
RAD mA
AEC RAMP
- +
- +
TP7
TP12
TP9
FLUORO mA TP11 - +
TP13 + ABS
TP14
1 VOLT = 2.5 mA
TP15
Page 4-10
Rev. J
Ch # 740904-08
Acceptance Testing
X-RADIATION.
USE
NOTE:
IF USING TEST POINTS TP6 & 8, TP7 & 10, TP11 & 14 IN FIGURE 4-2 FOR
ACCEPTANCE TESTING, THE SCALING FACTORS SHOWN MUST BE
VERIFIED USING AN APPROPRIATE CALIBRATED REFERENCE STANDARD.
THE ACTUAL MEASURED SCALING VALUES SHOULD THEN BE USED IN THIS
PROCEDURE.
NOTE:
Refer to figure 4-2 for test point locations referenced in the following section(s).
Step
1.
2.
3.
4.
Action
SEE NOTE ABOVE RE USE OF TEST
POINTS FOR VERIFYING CALIBRATION
Connect scope probe channel 1 input to TP6
and TP8 (kVp)
Connect scope probe channel 2 input to TP7
and TP10 (Rad mA).
Adjust scope gains as required. Use the KV
signal to trigger the scope.
Switch ON the generator and after initialization
select the following radiographic technique:
kVp = 100, mA = 100, Time = 50 ms
Select an off-table receptor.
Make an exposure and measure the kVp at
TP6 and TP8 and the Rad mA at TP7 and
TP10. Using scaling factors in figure 4-2,
verify the following results:
Repeat step 3 but set the values to
kVp = 65, mA = 200.
Result
Check
N/A
N/A
Ch # 740904-08
Rev. J
Page 4-11
Acceptance Testing
4.4.1
Action
Repeat step 3 but set the values to
kVp = 125, mA = 200.
6.
Result
kVp = 125 KV 3%.
mA = 200 mA 4% (Millenia).
mA = 200 mA 4% (Indico 100).
Time = 50 ms 2 ms.
Check
7.
A: 10 ms (2 mAs)
B: 20 ms (4 mAs)
C: 63 ms (12 mAs)
D: 100 ms (20 mAs)
Select 75 kVp.
Select the mAs shown below (2 point
operation).
Measure time at 75% of the peak kVp
waveform.
8.
A: 2 mAs 5%.
B: 4 mAs 5%.
C: 12 mAs 5%.
D: 20 mAs 5%.
NOTE: The time associated with
each mAs setting will vary
depending on generator
configuration.
Use the time displayed in the
LCD window as the reference for
the measurements below.
time per LCD disp (2% + 1ms).
time per LCD disp (2% + 1ms).
time per LCD disp (2% + 1ms).
time per LCD disp (2% + 1ms).
Page 4-12
50 kVp
60 kVp
80 kVp
100 kVp
125 kVp
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
Rev. J
Ch # 740904-08
Acceptance Testing
Action
Select 75 kVp, 50 ms (3 point operation).
Result
Check
50 mA
100 mA
200 mA
400 mA
800 mA
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
50 mA (5% + 1 mA).
100 mA (5% + 1 mA).
200 mA (5% + 1 mA).
400 mA (5% + 1 mA).
800 mA (5% + 1 mA).
4.4.2
2.
3.
Action
Place the generator into the fluoro mode of
operation.
Connect scope probe channel 1 input to TP6
and TP8 (kVp).
Connect scope probe channel 2 input to TP11
and TP14 (fluoro mA).
Use the kV signal to trigger the scope.
Place imaging system into non-ABS mode or
cover the I.I. input with lead.
Set 3 mA fluoro.
Select the kV values shown below using the
remote fluoro control if fitted, or the fluoro
section of the console.
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
50 KV
65 KV
80 KV
100 KV
110 KV
Result
Check
N/A
N/A
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
Ch # 740904-08
Rev. J
Page 4-13
Acceptance Testing
4.4.2
Action
Select 70 kVp fluoro.
Select the fluoro mA values shown below:
A:
B:
C:
D:
5.
6.
Page 4-14
1.0 mA
2.0 mA
4.0 mA
6.0 mA
Result
A:
B:
C:
D:
Rev. J
Check
1.0 mA 20%.
2.0 mA 20%.
4.0 mA 15%.
6.0 mA 15%.
Ch # 740904-08
Acceptance Testing
4.6.0
4.7.0
4.8.0
Ch # 740904-08
Rev. J
Page 4-15
Acceptance Testing
4.9.0
Page 4-16
Rev. J
Ch # 740904-08
SUPPLEMENT
REPRODUCIBILTY, LINEARITY,
& HVL TESTING
CONTENTS:
1.0 INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................................................................. 2
2.0 EQUIPMENT SETUP........................................................................................................................................... 3
3.0 REPRODUCIBILITY............................................................................................................................................. 3
4.0 LINEARITY........................................................................................................................................................... 7
5.0 H.V.L. EVALUATION ........................................................................................................................................... 9
740917-00
Rev. A
Page 1
INTRODUCTION
This supplement describes reproducibility, linearity, and half - value layer (HVL) tests which may be used
to verify performance of medical X-ray generators.
Page 2
NOTE:
WARNING:
SOME EXPOSURES IN
GENERATOR KVP. THE
OPERATION AT THAT
SEASONED TO ENSURE
PROBLEMATIC.
Rev. A
740917-00
EQUIPMENT SETUP
1.
Place the radiation probe above the table approximately 25 cm (10). Select an SID of
approximately 100 cm (40).
2.
Place a lead diaphragm over the detector and adjust its height so that the X-ray beam covers the
detector but does not over radiate the sides of the R probe. Refer to figure 1.
3.0
REPRODUCIBILITY
Calculate reproducibility as follows:
1.
Using kV and mA/ms or mAs values per tables 1 to 4, make a series of 5 exposures.
2.
Record each of the measured mR values in the appropriate table. Refer to step 3 before
beginning step 2.
3.
Record the preselected mAs for each series of exposures in the header of each table. For 3 point
generators, this is the calculated mAs value where mAs = mA X time in seconds (example for
160 mA and 125 ms, mAs = 160 X 0.125 = 20 mAs).
740917-00
Rev. A
Page 3
REPRODUCIBILITY (Cont)
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
If linearity is to be measured, it is suggested that dose measurements be taken at this time for
entry into tables 6 and 7. Refer to 4.0 LINEARITY for details.
IN TABLES 1 TO 4, 3 POINT MEANS THAT FOR GENERATORS WHERE KV, MA, AND TIME
SELECTION IS AVAILABLE, THE KV, MA AND MS VALUES SHOWN SHOULD BE USED. FOR
GENERATORS WHERE 2 POINT OPERATION ONLY IS AVAILABLE, THE KV AND MAS VALUES
SHOWN SHOULD BE USED.
3 point = Minimum kV, maximum mA, 100 ms.
2 point = Minimum kV, maximum mAs.
EXP No.
DOSE (mR)
mAs = __________
DIFFERENCE2
DIFFERENCE
1
2
3
4
5
mR =
________
S = __________
S
= _________ (not to exceed 0.045)
mR
Table 1: Reproducibility
Page 4
Rev. A
740917-00
REPRODUCIBILITY (Cont)
3 point = Maximum kV, minimum mA, 100 ms.
2 point = Maximum kV, minimum mAs.
EXP No.
DOSE (mR)
mAs = __________
DIFFERENCE2
DIFFERENCE
1
2
3
4
5
mR =
________
S = __________
S
= _________ (not to exceed 0.045)
mR
Table 2: Reproducibility
3 point = 50% of maximum kV, 250 ms, mA to give 100 - 500 R (1 - 5 Gy) dose.
2 point = 50% of maximum kV, mAs to give 100 - 500 R (1 - 5 Gy) dose.
EXP No.
DOSE (mR)
mAs = __________
DIFFERENCE2
DIFFERENCE
1
2
3
4
5
mR =
________
S = __________
S
= _________ (not to exceed 0.045)
mR
Table 3: Reproducibility
740917-00
Rev. A
Page 5
REPRODUCIBILITY (Cont)
3 point = 80% of maximum kV, 250 ms, mA to give 100 - 500 R (1 - 5 Gy) dose.
2 point = 80% of maximum kV, mAs to give 100 - 500 R (1 - 5 Gy) dose.
EXP No.
DOSE (mR)
MAS = __________
DIFFERENCE2
DIFFERENCE
1
2
3
4
5
mR =
________
S = __________
S
= _________ (not to exceed 0.045)
mR
Table 4: Reproducibility
EXAMPLE
mAs = _20_
EXP No.
DOSE (mR)
DIFFERENCE
DIFFERENCE2
249.0
4.4
19.36
245.0
0.4
0.16
244.0
0.6
0.36
242.0
2.6
6.76
243.0
1.6
2.56
mR =
_244.6_
S = _2.70_
S
= _0.011_ (not to exceed 0.045)
mR
Table 5: Reproducibility
Page 6
Rev. A
740917-00
LINEARITY
1.
Record two additional series of dose measurements for entry into tables 6 and 7:
For table 6, use settings per table 3 EXCEPT use an mA (or mAs) value adjacent to the mA
(or mAs) setting used in table 3.
For table 7, use settings per table 4 EXCEPT use an mA (or mAs) value adjacent to the mA
(or mAs) setting used in table 4.
Record the mAs in the header of tables 6 and 7 as per 3.0 step 3.
1.
2.
Record the preselected mAs and the average dose values taken from tables 3 and 4, and from
tables 6 and 7, at the top of the next page.
3.
Using the appropriate mAs and mR values, calculate X3, X4, X6, and X7 in tables 8 and 9.
4.
mAs = __________
EXP No.
DOSE (mR)
1
2
3
4
5
mR = ________
Table 6: Linearity
mAs = __________
EXP No.
DOSE (mR)
1
2
3
4
5
mR = ________
Table 7: Linearity
740917-00
Rev. A
Page 7
LINEARITY (Cont)
Record the mAs and mR values taken from tables 3, 4, 6, and 7 below.
Table 3
mAs3 = _____
mR3 = _____
Table 4
mAs4 = _____
mR4 = _____
Table 6
mAs6 = _____
mR6 = _____
Table 7
mAs7 = _____
mR7 = _____
mR3
X3 =
= ________
mAs3
mR6
X6 =
= ________
mAs6
X3 - X6
L =
mR4
X4 =
= ________
mAs4
mR7
X7 =
= ________
mAs7
X4 - X7
L =
Page 8
Rev. A
740917-00
H.V.L. EVALUATION
1.
Be sure the X-ray source assembly (X-ray tube and beam limiting device) is fully assembled and
functional.
2.
3.
Set the generator as follows: 3 point generators, 80 kV, 200 mA, 50 ms, large focus. For 2 point
generators use 80 kV, 200 mA if this can be set, and 10 mAs.
4.
Take a series of three exposures and record the mR values in table 10. Calculate and record the
average of the three exposures.
5.
Place 2 mm of Al on top of the lead diaphragm (total of 2 mm added), repeat the exposure and
record the mR value in table 10.
6.
Place an additional 1 mm of Al on top of the lead diaphragm (total of 3 mm added), repeat the
exposure; and record the mR value in table 10.
7.
Place an additional 3 mm of Al on top of the lead diaphragm (total of 6 mm added), repeat the
exposure; and record the mR value in table 10.
8.
The relative transmission for the average of the three mR values where no Al was added is
assigned a value of 1.00. Using that base, assign relative transmission values to the remaining
mR values. For example, if the average mR value was 247 and has a relative transmission factor
of 1.00, then 162 mR will have a relative transmission of 162 / 247 = 0.66.
9.
Plot the relative transmission values in figure 1. This should produce a straight line on the graph
since the X-axis is logarithmic.
10.
Interpolate to determine the HVL. The Al thickness at a relative transmission of 0.5 will be the
required HVL value.
11.
Repeat steps 4 to 10: 3 point generators, 100 kV, 200 mA, 50 ms, large focus. For 2 point
generators use 100 kV, 200 mA if this can be set, and 10 mAs. Use table 11 to record the values
and figure 2 to plot the results
12.
740917-00
Rev. A
Page 9
DOSE (mR)
RELATIVE TRANSMISSION
0
0
0
0 (Average of three readings)
1.00
2
1
3
Table 10: HVL dose values 80 kVp
Page 10
Rev. A
740917-00
DOSE (mR)
RELATIVE TRANSMISSION
0
0
0
0 (Average of three readings)
1.00
2
1
3
Table 11: HVL dose values 100 kVp
740917-00
Rev. A
Page 11
DOSE (mR)
RELATIVE TRANSMISSION
249
244
247
247
1.00
162
.66
131
.53
70
.28
Page 12
Rev. A
740917-00
Troubleshooting
CHAPTER 5
TROUBLESHOOTING
CONTENTS:
SECTION
TITLE
5.1.0 INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2.0 STATUS AND ERROR CODES (NON-TOUCH SCREEN)................................................................................... 5-2
5.2.1 Operator Messages (Non-Touch Screen) .......................................................................................................... 5-2
5.2.2 Limit Messages (Non-Touch Screen)................................................................................................................. 5-2
5.2.3 Error Messages (Non-Touch Screen) ................................................................................................................ 5-3
5.3.0 STATUS AND ERROR CODES (TOUCH SCREEN) .......................................................................................... 5-10
5.3.1 Operator Messages (Touch Screen)................................................................................................................ 5-10
5.3.2 Limit Messages (Touch Screen)....................................................................................................................... 5-10
5.3.3 Error Messages (Touch Screen) ...................................................................................................................... 5-11
5.4.0 MISCELLANEOUS FAULTS................................................................................................................................ 5-18
5.4.1 Erratic Console Faults ...................................................................................................................................... 5-18
5.1.0
INTRODUCTION
The Millenia and Indico 100 console will display status messages on the LCD display during normal and
abnormal operation of the generator. This chapter contains tables of those messages and suggests actions to
be taken by service personnel to correct any malfunctions that may occur.
Section 5.2.0 details status and error messages for generators with the standard (non-touch screen console).
Refer to section 5.3 for status and error messages for the touch screen console.
Rev. G
Page 5-1
Troubleshooting
5.2.0
5.2.1
5.2.2
DESCRIPTION
Displayed during power up sequence.
Displayed when prep state is active.
Displayed when generator is ready to expose
Displayed during both a rad and fluoro exposure.
The optional DAP (Indico 100 only) is in its warm up state, and not ready to
make DAP measurements.
CAL LIMIT
PROBLEM
Requested kV not allowed as tube kV limit
has been reached.
Requested kV not allowed as generator kV
limit has been reached.
Requested mA not allowed as tube mA limit
has been reached.
Requested mA not allowed as generator
mA limit has been reached.
Requested parameter not allowed as tube
kW limit has been reached.
Requested parameter not allowed as
generator kW limit has been reached.
Requested mAs not allowed as tube mAs
limit has been reached.
Requested mAs not allowed as generator
mAs limit has been reached.
Requested ms not allowed as generator ms
limit has been reached.
Requested parameter not calibrated.
FL TIMER WARN
GEN KV LIMIT
TUBE MA LIMIT
GEN MA LIMIT
TUBE KW LIMIT
GEN KW LIMIT
TUBE MAS LIMIT
GEN MAS LIMIT
GEN MS LIMIT
INVALID PARAM
Page 5-2
Rev. G
ACTION
None.
None.
None.
None.
None.
None.
None.
None.
None.
Recalibrate X-ray tube
or select a calibrated
parameter.
Select another density
or program requested
density step.
Wait for anode to cool.
Reset fluoro timer.
Select valid
parameter.
Ch # 740904-09
Troubleshooting
5.2.3
MESSAGE
APR MEMORY ERROR
PROBLEM
APR data has been
corrupted.
Generator CPU EPROM
has been corrupted.
E001
E003
E004
E005
PS CONTACT ERR
E006
ROTOR FAULT
E007
FILAMENT FAULT
Rev. G
ACTION
See note 1 near end
of this section.
Call product support
for new generator
CPU EPROM.
Re-initialize
generator CPU
NVRAM using
generator factory
defaults.
Reset time and date.
Call product support.
Power unit off and
retry rotor start.
Page 5-3
Troubleshooting
5.2.3
Page 5-4
ERROR CODE
E008
MESSAGE
KV/MA FAULT
PROBLEM
Power supply has detected
a fault in the kV or mA
output during an exposure
and immediately terminated
the exposure. This may be
caused by arcing in the Xray tube, arcing of the HV
cables, or HT tank.
E009
PS NOT READY
E011
HIGH MA FAULT
E012
LOW MA FAULT
E013
MANUAL TERMIN
E014
E015
E016
Rev. G
ACTION
1. If arcing of the Xray tube is
suspected, check
condition of tube.
The X-ray tube
may be damaged
or simply require
seasoning.
Refer to chapter 6
for tube
seasoning
procedure.
2. If failure of HT
tank is suspected,
contact product
support.
Retry exposure.
Recalibrate X-ray
tube. *
Recalibrate X-ray
tube. *
1. Re-take exposure
if necessary.
2. Check for faulty
switch contacts or
wiring.
1. Check exposure
technique
settings.
2. Check that correct
AEC chamber is
energized.
1. Check exposure
technique
settings.
2. Check that correct
AEC chamber is
energized.
1. Check exposure
technique
settings.
2. Increase tomo
back up time if
necessary.
Ch # 740904-09
Troubleshooting
MESSAGE
NOT CALIBRATED
PROBLEM
Selected mA not calibrated
for selected kV.
Generator has been in prep
state too long.
Selected parameters will
cause X-ray tube to exceed
its programmed anode heat
limit.
X-ray tube # 1 too hot and
its thermal switch has
opened.
X-ray tube # 2 too hot and
its thermal switch has
opened.
Door is open.
Collimator is not ready.
Generator did not receive a
Bucky contact closure in a
reasonable time after start
of Rad expose state.
II safety is not ready.
Spare input is not ready.
Prep input active during
power on initialization
phase.
X-ray input active during
power on initialization
phase.
Fluoro input active during
power on initialization
phase.
Communication error
detected with remote fluoro
control unit.
E018
PREP TIMEOUT
E019
E020
THERMAL INT #1
E021
THERMAL INT #2
E022
E023
E024
DOOR INTERLOCK
COLLIMATOR ERR
CASSETTE ERROR
E025
E026
E028
II SAFETY INT
SPARE INT
PREP SW CLOSED
E029
X-RAY SW CLOSED
E030
FLUORO SW CLOSED
E031
E032
E033
Rev. G
ACTION
Recalibrate X-ray
tube.
Reduce length of
time in prep state.
Reduce parameters
or wait for tube to
cool.
Wait for X-ray tube #
1 to cool.
Wait for X-ray tube #
2 to cool.
Close door.
Check collimator.
Check for grid
movement and drive
signal to Bucky.
Check II safety.
Check spare input.
Check prep switch
and input for short
circuit.
Check X-ray switch
and input for short
circuit.
Check fluoro switch
and input for short
circuit.
1. Check remote
fluoro control cable
for damage and
proper connection.
2. Turn power off
and then on to
Reset Generator.
1. Check console
cable for damage
and proper
connection.
2. Turn power off and
then on to reset
generator.
Replace lithium
battery.
Page 5-5
Troubleshooting
5.2.3
Page 5-6
ERROR CODE
E034
MESSAGE
+12VDC ERROR
E035
-12VDC ERROR
E036
+15VDC ERROR
E037
-15VDC ERROR
E038
E039
E040
E041
E042
E043
KV ERROR
E044
COMM ERROR
E045
NOT SUPPORTED
E046
MODE INHIBITED
E047
FL TIMER LIMIT
E048
FOCUS MISMATCH
Received communication
message not valid and
ignored.
Received message valid,
but not supported by this
system.
Received message valid,
but not allowed during
present state.
Fluoro Timer has exceeded
time limit.
Focus selected does not
match current focus enabled
by power supply.
E049
NOT ENABLED
Rev. G
PROBLEM
+12VDC rail is out of
tolerance.
-12VDC rail is out of
tolerance.
+15VDC rail is out of
tolerance.
-15VDC rail is out of
tolerance.
Generator detects corrupt
calibration data.
Generator detects corrupt
AEC data.
ACTION
Check +12VDC rail.
Check -12VDC rail.
Check +15VDC rail.
Check -15VDC rail.
Re-calibrate X-ray
tube(s).
Reprogram AEC data
or set factory
defaults.
Reprogram fluoro
data or set factory
defaults.
Reprogram receptor
data or set factory
defaults.
Reprogram tube data
or set factory
defaults.
Switch OFF
generator. Prevent
further use of
generator. Call
product support.
Reset error.
Reset error.
Reset error.
Ch # 740904-09
Troubleshooting
MESSAGE
GEN DATA ERROR
PROBLEM
Generator detects corrupt
generator limit data.
E051
E052
HIGH SF CURRENT
E053
HIGH LF CURRENT
E054
E055
NO FIELDS ACTIVE
E056
NO TUBE SELECTED
E057
E058
E059
Rev. G
ACTION
Reprogram generator
limit data or set
factory defaults.
1. Check that X-ray
tube is pointing at
correct AEC
device.
2. Check AEC cable
for damage and
proper
connection.
Check small focus
filament board.
Re-adjust AEC
calibration including
density to operate
within AEC range (O
to 1OVDC).
Select AEC field(s).
Program receptor(s)
with tube number.
1. Check that P.T.
ramp does not
exceed P.T.
reference during
prep state.
2. Check AEC device
for proper
operation.
Call product support.
Page 5-7
Troubleshooting
5.2.3
Page 5-8
ERROR CODE
E060
MESSAGE
EXP KV HIGH
PROBLEM
KV exceeds high KV
tolerance level.
E061
EXP KV LOW
KV exceeds low KV
tolerance level.
E062
EXP_ SW ERROR
E063
FACTORY DEFAULTS
E066
NO SYNC PULSE
E070
E071
DAP OVERFLOW
Rev. G
ACTION
1. Check the output
of the kV
reference DAC on
the generator
CPU board.
2. Measure the
output of the
generator with a
dynalyzer or a
non-invasive kVp
meter.
1. Check the output
of the kV
reference DAC on
the generator
CPU board.
2. Measure the
output of the
generator with a
dynalyzer or a
non-invasive kVp
meter.
Call product support.
Ch # 740904-09
Troubleshooting
MESSAGE
DAP DEVICE ERROR
PROBLEM
The DAP device is not
functional.
E073
E100
CAL_MAX MA ERR
E101
CAL_DATA LIMIT
E102
E103
CAL_MAN TERM
E104
CAL_NO MA
E105
CAL_MIN MA ERR
Rev. G
ACTION
1. Check the DAP
wiring.
2. Check the DAP
interface board.
Reset factory
defaults.
Repeat auto
calibration and/or
decrease standby
current.
1. Check to see if
the filament
standby current is
too low.
2. Retry auto
calibration.
1. Check to see if
the maximum
filament current
limit can be
increased.
2. Retry auto
calibration.
Retry auto
Calibration.
Check power supply
Interface cables
between HF power
supply and generator
CPU board.
Reduce filament
standby current on
primary and/or
secondary filament.
Page 5-9
Troubleshooting
5.3.0
5.3.1
5.3.2
DESCRIPTION
Indicates that the generator is ready to make an exposure.
Indicates that the console is unable to communicate with the generator.
Ensure that the generator is switched on, and that the console cable is properly
connected to J2 on the rear of the console.
Indicates that the console has re-established communication with the
generator.
PROBLEM
Anode has exceeded programmed warning
level.
Requested parameter not calibrated.
Generator kV limit
Generator kW limit
Generator mA limit
Generator mAs limit
Generator ms limit
Page 5-10
Rev. G
ACTION
Wait for the anode to
cool.
Recalibrate X-ray tube
or select a calibrated
parameter.
Deselect the tomo
receptor.
Reset fluoro timer.
Select another density
or program requested
density step.
Re-evaluate technique
factors. Allow
generator to cool if
possible. If exposures
are continued, serious
generator damage
may result due to
overheating.
None.
None.
None.
None.
None.
Ch # 740904-09
Troubleshooting
PROBLEM
Generator PPS limit has been reached.
Generator detected invalid parameter within
received message, message ignored.
Request operator to select tomo table.
Tube kV limit
Tube kW limit
Tube mA limit
Tube mAs limit
5.3.3
ACTION
None.
Select valid
parameter.
Select the tomo
receptor
Wait for the tube
housing to cool.
None.
None.
None.
None.
ERROR CODE
E001
MESSAGE
Generator CPU EPROM
checksum error
PROBLEM
Generator CPU EPROM
has been corrupted.
E003
E004
E005
E006
Rotor Fault
ACTION
Call product support
for new generator
CPU EPROM.
Re-initialize
generator CPU
NVRAM using
generator factory
defaults.
Reset time and date.
Call product support.
Power unit off and
retry rotor start.
Rev. G
Page 5-11
Troubleshooting
5.3.3
MESSAGE
Filament Fault
PROBLEM
Power supply has detected
filament current <2 amps.
E008
mA Fault
E009
E011
E012
E013
Manually Terminated
Exposure
E014
Page 5-12
Rev. G
ACTION
1. Check for open
filament in X-ray
tube.
2. Check for poor
connections in the
cathode cable.
3. Check fuses on
filament board(s).
1. If arcing of the Xray tube is
suspected, check
condition of tube.
The X-ray tube
may be damaged
or simply require
seasoning.
Refer to chapter 6
for tube
seasoning
procedure.
2. If failure of HT
tank is suspected,
contact product
support.
Retry exposure.
Recalibrate X-ray
tube. *
Recalibrate X-ray
tube. *
1. Re-take exposure
if necessary.
2. Check for faulty
switch contacts or
wiring.
1. Check exposure
technique
settings.
2. Check that correct
AEC chamber is
energized.
Ch # 740904-09
Troubleshooting
MESSAGE
AEC mAs Exceeded Exposure Terminated
PROBLEM
AEC exposure exceeded
allowed back up mAs.
E016
E017
E018
Uncalibrated Exposure
Parameter
Preparation Timeout
E019
E020
E021
E022
E023
E024
Door Interlock
Collimator Interlock Error
Cassette Interlock Error
E025
E026
E027
E028
E029
E030
Rev. G
ACTION
1. Check exposure
technique
settings.
2. Check that correct
AEC chamber is
energized.
1. Check exposure
technique
settings.
2. Increase tomo
back up time if
necessary.
Recalibrate X-ray
tube.
Reduce length of
time in prep state.
Reduce parameters
or wait for tube to
cool.
Wait for X-ray tube #
1 to cool.
Wait for X-ray tube #
2 to cool.
Close door.
Check collimator.
Check for grid
movement and drive
signal to Bucky.
Check II safety.
Check spare input.
Wait for receptor to
be ready, then retry
exposure.
Check prep switch
and input for short
circuit.
Check X-ray switch
and input for short
circuit.
Check fluoro switch
and input for short
circuit.
Page 5-13
Troubleshooting
5.3.3
MESSAGE
Remote Fluoro
Communication Error
PROBLEM
Communication error
detected with remote fluoro
control unit.
E032
Console Communication
Error
E033
E034
E035
-12VDC Error
E036
+15VDC Error
E037
-15VDC Error
E038
E039
E040
E041
E042
E043
E044
Invalid Communication
Message
Received communication
message not valid and
ignored.
Page 5-14
Rev. G
ACTION
1. Check remote
fluoro control cable
for damage and
proper connection.
2. Turn power off
and then on to
Reset Generator.
1. Check console
cable for damage
and proper
connection.
2. Turn power off and
then on to reset
generator.
Replace lithium
battery.
Check +12VDC rail.
Check -12VDC rail.
Check +15VDC rail.
Check -15VDC rail.
Re-calibrate X-ray
tube(s).
Reprogram AEC data
or set factory
defaults.
Reprogram fluoro
data or set factory
defaults.
Reprogram receptor
data or set factory
defaults.
Reprogram tube data
or set factory
defaults.
Switch OFF
generator. Prevent
further use of
generator. Call
product support.
Reset error.
Ch # 740904-09
Troubleshooting
MESSAGE
Communication Message
Not Supported
PROBLEM
Received message valid,
but not supported by this
system.
Received message valid,
but not allowed during
present state.
Fluoro Timer has exceeded
time limit.
Focus selected does not
match current focus enabled
by power supply.
E046
Mode Inhibited
E047
E048
E049
Not Enabled
E050
E051
E052
E053
E054
E055
E056
Receptor Disabled
Rev. G
ACTION
Reset error.
Reset error.
Re-adjust AEC
calibration including
density to operate
within AEC range (O
to 1OVDC).
Select AEC field(s).
Program receptor(s)
with tube number.
Page 5-15
Troubleshooting
5.3.3
MESSAGE
AEC Stop Signal In Wrong
State
PROBLEM
AEC stop signal (P.T. stop
signal) is active low
indicating exposure is
finished during prep state.
E058
E059
E060
E061
Low kV Error
KV exceeds low KV
tolerance level.
E062
E063
Page 5-16
Rev. G
ACTION
1. Check that P.T.
ramp does not
exceed P.T.
reference during
prep state.
2. Check AEC device
for proper
operation.
Call product support.
Ch # 740904-09
Troubleshooting
MESSAGE
No Sync Signal
PROBLEM
Pulsed fluoro has been
requested, but no sync
pulse is present.
E067
E070
E071
E072
E073
E100
E101
E102
E103
Rev. G
ACTION
1. Check that the
imaging system is
active, and cables
are connected
properly.
2. Check JW22 on
the generator
interface board.
Re-evaluate
technique factors.
Allow generator to
cool if possible. If
exposures are
continued, serious
generator damage
may result due to
overheating.
Call product support
for new GAL U29.
Reset the DAP.
Page 5-17
Troubleshooting
5.3.3
MESSAGE
Calibration Error - No mA
PROBLEM
No mA feedback detected
during auto calibration.
E105
ACTION
Check power supply
Interface cables
between HF power
supply and generator
CPU board.
Reduce filament
standby current on
primary and/or
secondary filament.
The generator purges the existing X-ray tube auto calibration data before starting the auto calibration
routine and saving new calibration data. Therefore, auto calibration should be a last resort during
general troubleshooting, and should only be done to recalibrate the tube. For example, if a low mA
fault is presented, you should ensure that the generator is fully functional, and actually needs
recalibration. If calibration is attempted on a partially functional generator, the auto calibration routine
may be aborted before any calibration is done, and the generator will inhibit further exposures until the
selected mA is calibrated for the selected kV.
1.
For an APR MEMORY ERROR fault, the console factory defaults must be restored or the APR must
be restored via GenWare. The procedure for resetting console factory defaults is described in
chapter 6.
5.4.0
MISCELLANEOUS FAULTS
5.4.1
Page 5-18
Rev. G
Ch # 740904-09
Regular Maintenance
CHAPTER 6
REGULAR MAINTENANCE
CONTENTS:
Section
Title
6.1.0 INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................................................................... 6-2
6.2.0 X-RAY GENERATOR UPDATE/SERVICE RECORD ........................................................................................... 6-2
6.3.0 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE ................................................................................................................................ 6-2
6.4.0 OIL FILL/LEVEL CHECK (HT TANK) .................................................................................................................... 6-4
6.4.1 Millenia Oil Fill/Level Check ............................................................................................................................... 6-4
6.4.2 Indico 100 Oil Fill/Level Check ........................................................................................................................... 6-5
6.5.0 CLEANING ............................................................................................................................................................. 6-6
6.6.0 EPROM REPLACEMENT / SOFTWARE UPGRADE ........................................................................................... 6-6
6.6.1 Console Software / EPROM............................................................................................................................... 6-6
6.6.2 Power EPROM ................................................................................................................................................... 6-7
6.6.3 Dual Speed Starter EPROM (If fitted) ................................................................................................................ 6-7
6.6.4 Resetting Factory Defaults ................................................................................................................................. 6-7
6.7.0 SOFTWARE KEY INSTALLATION / REPLACEMENT.......................................................................................... 6-9
6.8.0 BATTERY REPLACEMENT................................................................................................................................. 6-10
6.9.0 TUBE CONDITIONING / SEASONING ............................................................................................................... 6-10
6.9.1 Tube Conditioning (Overview).......................................................................................................................... 6-10
6.9.2 Tube Conditioning (Procedure) ........................................................................................................................ 6-11
6.10.0 END OF PRODUCT LIFE .................................................................................................................................. 6-12
Ch # 740904-10
Rev. L
Page 6-1
Regular Maintenance
6.1.0
INTRODUCTION
This chapter of the manual provides a recommended schedule for periodic maintenance of the Millenia and
Indico 100 family of generators.
NOTE:
6.2.0
6.3.0
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
WARNING:
NOTE:
WARNING: ALWAYS SWITCH OFF MAINS POWER TO THE GENERATOR AND WAIT A
MINIMUM OF 5 MINUTES FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE BEFORE
BEGINNING ANY PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE, INCLUDING CLEANING.
Page 6-2
Rev. L
Ch # 740904-10
Regular Maintenance
Every 12 months:
Every 5 years:
2.
Clean the control console, remote fluoro control (if used) and main
cabinet as needed. REFER TO 6.5.0 CLEANING BEFORE
PROCEEDING
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.
Examine the following for any visible damage and replace any
damaged components:
The exterior of the control console and remote fluoro control if
used, including the membrane switch assembly.
The cable between the control console and the generator main
cabinet and between the remote fluoro control (if used) and
generator main cabinet.
The hand switch and fluoro footswitch (if used) and the cables
connecting these to the console.
2.
Open the generator cabinet and examine the unit for any visible
damage: missing or loose ground connections, oil leaks, damaged
cables etc.
3.
Ch # 740904-10
Rev. L
Page 6-3
Regular Maintenance
6.4.0
6.4.1
Using a suitable wrench, remove the oil fill cap on top of the HT transformer.
2.
Measure the oil level from the TOP surface of the oil fill flange using a clean ruler. The oil level should
be in the range of 7/8 (22 mm) to 1 3/8 (35 mm) from the top of the flange. Add oil if the oil level is
low, that is greater than 1 3/8 (35 mm) from the top.
3.
Use only fresh oil, type Shell DIALA AX or equivalent. Take care not to damage delicate components
inside the tank if using a funnel for oil fill.
4.
Replace the oil filler cap and tighten when finished. Wipe up any oil spills. Dispose of soiled absorber
in compliance with government requirements and ensure conformity to local disposal regulations.
Page 6-4
Rev. L
Ch # 740904-10
Regular Maintenance
Loosen the oil fill plug screw on the Indico 100 tank lid.
2.
With the screw sufficiently loosened, remove the rubber (neoprene) plug.
3.
Use a clean ruler, strip of cardboard, or other equivalent material to determine the oil level -measured always from the TOP surface of the HT tanks lid.
Normally the oil level should be between 0.88 - 1.25 inches (22 - 32 mm) from the top of the tank
lid.
If the oil level is between 1.25 - 1.6 inches (32 - 41 mm) from the top of the tank lid, then clean oil
should be added as needed.
If the oil level is greater than 1.6 inches (41 mm) below the top of the tank lid, please consult the
factory.
4.
5.
Use only fresh oil, type Shell DIALA AX or equivalent. It is critical that air is not added when topping up
the oil. The following procedure is strongly recommended when adding oil.
Use a new clean syringe to remove oil from the container. A 60 cc catheter tip syringe is
recommended. Approximately 60 cc of oil is required to raise the oil level by one millimeter.
Place the tip of the syringe through the oil-fill plug and into the oil, ensuring that it is below the
surface of the oil.
Gently eject the oil from the syringe into the HT tank, while making sure that the tip of the syringe
remains below the surface of the oil until all of the oil is emptied from the syringe.
Repeat the previous steps until the required amount of oil has been added.
Replace the oil fill plug. Once the plug is installed and the screw properly seated, tighten the screw 4
turns. This will secure the oil fill plug. Wipe up any oil spills. Dispose of soiled absorber in compliance
with government requirements and ensure conformity to local disposal regulations. THE OIL DOES
NOT CONTAIN PCBs.
Ch # 740904-10
Rev. L
Page 6-5
Regular Maintenance
6.5.0
CLEANING
6.6.0
Never use anything other than soap and water to clean plastic surfaces. Other cleaners may damage the
plastic.
Never use any corrosive, solvent or abrasive detergents or polishes.
Ensure that no water or other liquid can enter any equipment. This precaution prevents short circuits and
corrosion forming on components.
Methods of disinfection used must conform to legal regulations and guidelines regarding disinfection and
explosion protection.
If disinfectants are used which form explosive mixtures of gases, these gases must have dissipated before
switching on the equipment again.
Disinfection by spraying is not recommended because the disinfectant may enter the X-ray equipment.
If room disinfection is done with an atomizer, it is recommended that the equipment be switched OFF,
allowed to cool down and covered with a plastic sheet. When the disinfectant mist has subsided, the
plastic sheet may be removed and the equipment be disinfected by wiping.
WARNING:
6.6.1
Console software for the 23 X 56 cm console and for the Rad-only console resides in an EPROM.
When the software for these consoles needs to be field upgraded, a replacement EPROM will be
supplied.
2.
Console software for the 31 X 42 cm console initially resides in flash memory on the console board.
The console software will be field upgraded by one of the following methods:
The flash memory may be reprogrammed in the field if the required hardware is available (a
suitable computer, a flash loader, and the proper cables). For details, please consult the factory.
Alternatively, an EPROM may be supplied containing the updated software. Continue with the
following steps if upgrading the software via an EPROM.
3.
With the generator mains power switched OFF, open the console to gain access to the console
EPROM. Refer to chapter 2, the section CHECKING THE RAM BACKUP BATTERY VOLTAGE, for
the procedure to access the console CPU board.
4.
Locate and carefully remove the existing EPROM on the console CPU board (refer to figure 1E-4).
This does not apply if the console software currently resides in flash memory as described in step 2.
5.
Carefully insert the replacement EPROM into the socket observing the orientation per figure 1E-4.
6.
Ensure that JW1 on the console board is set to the EPROM BOOT position in order to run the
updated software on EPROM. Refer to figure 1E-4. This jumper is initially set to the FLASH
BOOT position in order to boot from flash memory.
JW1 on the console board must be set to the FLASH BOOT position in order to run existing or
upgraded console software from flash memory.
7.
8.
Page 6-6
Rev. L
Ch # 740904-10
6.6.3
Regular Maintenance
Power EPROM
1.
With the generator mains power switched OFF, locate and carefully remove the existing power
EPROM on the generator CPU board (U38 or U41, refer to figure 1E-1).
2.
Carefully insert the replacement EPROM into the socket observing the orientation per figure 1E-1.
NOTE THAT THE REPLACEMENT EPROM MAY HAVE FOUR LESS PINS THAN THE SOCKET IT
IS TO BE INSERTED INTO. IF THIS IS SO, THE EMPTY PINS MUST BE ON THE PIN 1 SIDE OF
THE EPROM AS SHOWN IN FIGURE 1E-1.
3.
Switch the generator mains power OFF, AND WAIT 5 MINUTES FOR THE DC BUS CAPACITORS
TO FULLY DISCHARGE.
STEPS 2 AND 3 APPLY TO MILLENIA GENERATORS ONLY. IN INDICO 100 GENERATORS, THE
DUAL SPEED STARTER BOARD IS FULLY ACCESSIBLE WITH THE APPROPRIATE GENERATOR
SIDE PANEL(S) REMOVED.
6.6.4
2.
Loosen the two nuts securing the clamping bracket at the top of the dual speed starter. Slide the
bracket up and gently remove the dual speed starter assembly. The cables connected to the dual
speed starter do not need to be removed in order to change the EPROM.
3.
Carefully rotate the dual speed starter chassis to fully expose the dual speed starter board inside the
unit.
4.
Locate and carefully remove the existing EPROM on the dual speed starter board (U26, refer to figure
1E-6).
5.
Carefully insert the replacement EPROM into the socket observing the orientation per figure 1E-6.
6.
Reinstall the dual speed starter assembly by reversing steps 2 and 3 (Millenia).
Ch # 740904-10
Rev. L
Page 6-7
Regular Maintenance
6.6.4
With the power OFF, set switch 8 of SW1 on the console CPU board to its ON position.
2.
Power ON the generator. The console will prompt for a YES or NO to loading defaults for two
conditions (console settings and APR memory). Select YES to both.
3.
Power OFF the console. Reset switch 8 of SW1 on the console CPU board to its OFF position.
This will initialize both the CONSOLE settings (refer to CONSOLE settings in chapter 3C) and the APR to the
factory default settings.
In chapter 3C, refer to LOAD CONSOLE DEFAULTS. This is in the UTILITY menu, under the
CONSOLE submenu. Set LOAD CONSOLE DEFAULTS to YES.
2.
3.
4.
Briefly switch the generator OFF, and then ON again. The console will prompt for a YES or NO to
loading defaults when it is powered on again. Select YES to both prompts to reset the console and
APR defaults.
5.
This will initialize both the CONSOLE settings (refer to CONSOLE settings in chapter 3C) and the APR
to the factory default settings.
The LOAD CONSOLE DEFAULTS setting automatically resets to NO the next time the generator is switched
on.
With the power OFF, set switch 8 of SW1 on the generator CPU board to its OFF position.
2.
Power ON the generator. After the initialization is complete, the console will display the message
FACTORY DEFAULTS.
3.
Power OFF the generator. Reset switch 8 of SW1 on the generator CPU board to its ON position.
This will initialize all generator data to the factory defaults (tube selection, generator limits, receptor setup, I/O
configuration, AEC setup, AEC calibration, fluoro setup, tube calibration, time & date, error log and statistics).
Page 6-8
Rev. L
Ch # 740904-10
Regular Maintenance
WARNING:
This feature is available on Indico 100 generators only. The software key activates specific options in the
Indico 100 X-ray generator, and may need to be installed to add certain options, or may need to be replaced if
it is desired to alter the current configuration of the generator. To install or replace the software key follow the
procedure below.
1.
With the generator mains power switched OFF, locate the socket for the software key, U29, on the
generator CPU board. Refer to figure 6-3.
2.
Remove the existing I.C. U29, if fitted. The original I.C. should be placed in anti-static packaging, and
may be set aside for future use in a generator that requires the options that are activated by that I.C.
3.
Carefully insert the replacement software key into the U29 socket observing the orientation per figure
6-3.
4.
Perform setup and calibration, if required, of the new features that have been activated by the new
software key. Refer to the applicable sections of the service manual.
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
U29
EPROM U41
FILE: ML_CPU2.CDR
Ch # 740904-10
Rev. L
Page 6-9
Regular Maintenance
6.8.0
BATTERY REPLACEMENT
To replace the battery on the console CPU board or on the generator CPU board, follow the procedure below.
Refer to the figure showing the location of these batteries in chapter 2, in the section CHECKING THE RAM
BACKUP BATTERY VOLTAGE. Refer to that section in chapter 2 for console disassembly instructions to gain
access to the console CPU board if required.
THE CONSOLE BATTERY SHOULD BE REPLACED WITH THE GENERATOR POWERED UP.
THIS WILL PREVENT THE CONSOLE DATA FROM BEING LOST WHEN THE BATTERIES ARE
REMOVED.
NOTE:
THIS IS THE ONLY EXCEPTION TO THE RULE OF NOT SERVICING THE GENERATOR WHILE
THE POWER IS ON. FAMILIARIZE YOURSELF WITH THE HIGH VOLTAGE LOCATIONS AND
HAZARDS BEFORE REPLACING THIS BATTERY.
6.9.0
1.
Remove the battery from the holder by gently prying under the battery at the access slot in the battery
holder using a small screwdriver. Slide the battery over the edge of the holder and remove it when it is
free.
2.
Check the voltage of the new battery prior to inserting it. This should be nominally 3.0V, do not use if it
is under 2.80 V.
3.
Wipe the replacement battery with a clean cloth, and ensure that the holder is clean and free of debris
before inserting the battery.
4.
Gently lift the spring contact on the holder and insert the replacement battery positive (+) side up
6.9.1
NOTE:
Page 6-10
Rev. L
Ch # 740904-10
Regular Maintenance
NOTE:
LOW SPEED ONLY EXPOSURES ARE RECOMMENDED FOR THE SEASONING EXPOSURES,
TO PREVENT EXCESSIVE HEAT BUILD-UP IN THE HOUSING FROM THE STATOR WINDINGS
OR THE ROTOR BEARINGS.
X-ray tubes that have not been used for more than 8 hours may suffer thermal shock if operated at
high mA and kV without a warm-up procedure. A cold anode (Molybdenum) is very brittle and when
suddenly heated over a small area may experience thermal cracking of the anode surface, eventually
leading to permanent tube damage.
6.9.2
Start the tube auto calibration sequence, and manually terminate the exposure at 70 kV and 250 mA.
2.
Season the tube at 70 kV by taking approximately 10 exposures of 200 mA and 100 ms. These
exposures should be taken at the rate of approximately one every 15 seconds.
3.
Restart the auto calibration sequence and manually terminate the exposure at 100 kV and 250 mA.
4.
Season the tube at 100 kV by taking approximately 5 exposures of 200 mA and 100 ms. These
exposures should be taken at the rate of approximately one every 15 seconds.
5.
Restart the auto calibration sequence and manually terminate the exposure at 120 kV and 160 mA.
6.
Season the tube at 120 kV by taking approximately 5 exposures of 160 mA and 100 ms. These
exposures should be taken at the rate of approximately one every 15 seconds.
7.
Restart the auto calibration sequence and allow the auto calibration sequence to complete.
8.
Season the tube at 130 kV by taking approximately 5 exposures of 100 mA and 50 ms. These
exposures should be taken at the rate of approximately one every 15 seconds.
9.
Ch # 740904-10
Rev. L
Page 6-11
Regular Maintenance
Electrical insulating oil in HT tank. This is a mineral oil with trace additives (60 Litre (17 U.S. gal) for
Millenia, 25 Litre (6.5 U.S. gal) for Indico 100).
Solder (lead/tin).
Electrical and electronic components: ICs, transistors, diodes, resistors, capacitors, etc.
WARNING:
Page 6-12
Rev. L
Ch # 740904-10
Theory of Operation
CHAPTER 7
THEORY OF OPERATION
CONTENTS:
Ch # 740895-06
Rev. L
Page 7-1
Theory of Operation
7.1.0
INTRODUCTION
This chapter contains the theory of operation for the Indico 100 series of X-ray generators. The theory of
operation is organized by functional blocks as depicted in the functional drawings in chapter 9.
7.2.0
7.2.1
System ON (MD-0762)
The left side of this drawing shows the wiring from the ON and OFF switches on the console keyboard
assemblies to J4-10, J4-11 and J4-12 on the generator interface board for the various Indico 100
consoles (J16-3, J16-6, J16-7 for the Rad-only console).
The generator interface board on the Indico 100 X-ray generator includes power ON and OFF switches
S2 and S1 that may be used to switch the generator on and off locally while working on the equipment.
These switches are connected in parallel with the main generator power ON and OFF switches that are
located on the console.
Pressing either of the power ON switches described above turns on Q2 on the generator interface board.
This turns on Q3, holding the collector of Q3 low. This latches Q2 on by holding the base of Q2 low when
the ON button is released.
The collector of Q3 is connected to K2 and K3 via D16. These relays will energize if S3 is in the NORMAL
position when the generator is switched on. If S3 is in the LOCKOUT position, the generator cannot be
inadvertently switched on.
When K2 and K3 are energized, the DC rails (+5 V, +12 V, +15 V, +24 V, -12 V, -15 V, and -24 V) on the
generator interface board are established, and +24 V is supplied to the console via K3 (see MD-0788,
sheet 4).
The generator CPU will issue a P/S ON (power supply ON) command after the +5 V rail is detected as
described in 7.2.2.
JW1 on the generator interface board may be jumpered such that K1 is energized only when the
generator is switched on, or such that K1 is energized at all times that the AC mains to the generator is
on. K1 switches the 110 and 220 VAC supplies for the room interface board, as shown on sheet 4 of MD0788.
Pressing either of the OFF switches turns on Q1 on the generator interface board. This turns off Q2,
turning off Q3. This will de-energize K2, K3, and / or K1 on the generator interface board, removing the
DC rails from the generator interface board and removing the +24 V supply from the console. Deenergizing K1 (if applicable) will disconnect the 110 / 220 VAC supplies to the room interface board.
In normal operation, J17-1 and J17-2 are joined via a wire jumper. An emergency-off switch may be
connected to the generator by removing the jumper between J17-1 and J17-2, and then wiring the
emergency-off switch to J17-1 and J17-2.
Page 7-2
Rev. L
Ch # 740895-06
Theory of Operation
Ch # 740895-06
Rev. L
Page 7-3
Theory of Operation
7.2.2
Page 7-4
Rev. L
Ch # 740895-06
Theory of Operation
Ch # 740895-06
Rev. L
Page 7-5
Theory of Operation
7.2.2
7.2.3
Page 7-6
Rev. L
Ch # 740895-06
Theory of Operation
Ch # 740895-06
Rev. L
Page 7-7
Theory of Operation
7.2.4
Page 7-8
Rev. L
Ch # 740895-06
Theory of Operation
Ch # 740895-06
Rev. L
Page 7-9
Theory of Operation
7.2.4
7.2.5
Page 7-10
Rev. L
Ch # 740895-06
Theory of Operation
7.2.6
Ch # 740895-06
Rev. L
Page 7-11
Theory of Operation
7.2.6
Page 7-12
Rev. L
Ch # 740895-06
Theory of Operation
Ch # 740895-06
Rev. L
Page 7-13
Theory of Operation
7.2.6
7.2.7
Page 7-14
Rev. L
Ch # 740895-06
Theory of Operation
7.2.8
Ch # 740895-06
Rev. L
Page 7-15
Theory of Operation
7.2.8
7.2.9
Page 7-16
Rev. L
Ch # 740895-06
Theory of Operation
Ch # 740895-06
Rev. L
Page 7-17
Theory of Operation
Page 7-18
Rev. L
Ch # 740895-06
Theory of Operation
Ch # 740895-06
Rev. L
Page 7-19
Theory of Operation
Page 7-20
Rev. L
Ch # 740895-06
Theory of Operation
Ch # 740895-06
Rev. L
Page 7-21
Theory of Operation
Page 7-22
Rev. L
Ch # 740895-06
Theory of Operation
Ch # 740895-06
Rev. L
Page 7-23
Theory of Operation
Page 7-24
Rev. L
Ch # 740895-06
Theory of Operation
Ch # 740895-06
Rev. L
Page 7-25
Theory of Operation
Page 7-26
Rev. L
Ch # 740895-06
Spares
CHAPTER 8
SPARES
CONTENTS:
Section
Title
8.1.0 INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.2.0 SPARE PARTS LIST INDICO 100 GENERATOR................................................................................................. 8-2
8.1.0
INTRODUCTION
This chapter contains the list of recommended spare parts for the various models of Indico 100 generators.
Ch # 740895-07
Rev. V
Page 8-1
Spares
8.2.0
DESCRIPTION
Generator CPU board
Generator interface board
Room interface board
Power supply control board
Filament board
Auxiliary board
Inverter board
Power input board
Resonant Board
AEC board
Console CPU board
Console display board
Display assy, LCD
Remote fluoro display board
Remote fluoro control board
Low speed starter board
Digital I/O board
DAP interface board
Dual speed starter board
Dual speed starter subassembly
Hand switch assembly
Battery, lithium 3.0V
Capacitor, DC bus 470 uF 450 VDC
Capacitor, DC bus 9000 uF 400 VDC
Contactor, line
Diode, mains rectifier 160MT120K
Diode, mains rectifier DD89N12K,
DD90N12L, IRKD91-12
Fuse, A70QS10-14F
Fuse, FNM-3
Fuse, FNQ-2
Fuse, FNQ-10
Fuse, GDC-1.6
Fuse, GDC-2
Fuse, GDC-2.5
Fuse, GDC-5
Fuse, MDA-2
Fuse, MDA-5
Fuse, MDA-7
Fuse, MDA-10
Fuse, MDA-12
Fuse, MDL-1 1/2
Page 8-2
PART NUMBER
See note
See note
733184-00
732816-03
See note
732221-02
See note
See note
See note
See note
See note
See note
See note
729053-00
729038-00
See note
See note
735992-00
728877-03
See note
See note
7412290100
4150394100
4155001400
SC2715
6623071100
NOTE
1b
1c
2
1a
3
4
5
6
7
8
1b
9
19
10
10
11
17
22
12
12
20
2
13
14a
2
13
SUGGESTED QTY
See note
See note
1
1
See note
1
See note
1
1
1
See note
1
1
See note
See note
See note
See note
See note
See note
See note
See note
2
6
4
1
1
6623507000
6739951800
6711907400
5550005300
6711905500
5550033300
5550032600
5550034400
5550035600
6713000400
6713000100
6713000500
6713000200
6713746500
6713541500
14a
12
21
21
13
2
2
2
2
2
11
2
14a
2
14b
1
7
See note
See note
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
Rev. V
Ch # 740895-07
Spares
DESCRIPTION
Fuse, MDL-4
Fuse, NLN-100
Fuse, OTS-60
Relay, DPST, 12V
Connector, 4 pin
Fan, axial
Transformer, aux power supply
Transformer, room I/F
HT tank assembly (complete)
PART NUMBER
6713544000
6711906500
SC3434
7213011800
5618931800
2084022900
732417-00
735496-01
See note
NOTE
2
14a
13
2
12
18
2
2
15
SUGGESTED QTY
5
5
5
2
1
1
1
1
See note
NOTE:
1a.
The part number shown is the suggested replacement for the original power supply control board. The
spares board is full featured and will replace the original board in your generator regardless of
configuration. This is intended to eliminate the need to stock multiple configurations of this board.
1b.
Two versions of generator CPU boards and four versions of console CPU boards are used in Indico 100
generators. Please confirm the original part number(s) of these boards in your generator before ordering
spares. If your original generator CPU board is part number 732174-XX (where XX is a number from 00
to 08), order part number 732174-12. In this case, upgraded firmware will be required along with the
new CPU board. Please consult the factory for details.
If the original generator CPU board is part number 732174-12, it will be replaced with the same
part number. In this case, a firmware upgrade is not required.
If your original generator CPU board is part number 734573-00, order part number 734573-02. In this
case, upgraded firmware will be required along with the new CPU board. Please consult the factory for
details.
If the original generator CPU board is part number 734573-02, it will be replaced with the same
part number. In this case, a firmware upgrade is not required.
The generator CPU board and the console CPU board must be matched per the table below:
APPLICATION
23 X 56 cm console
23 X 56 cm console
31 X 42 cm console
Rad-only console
Ch # 740895-07
733903-00
735852-00
736805-00
Rev. V
Page 8-3
Spares
NOTE (Cont):
1c.
Two different generator interface boards are used in Indico 100 generators. For rad and R&F
generators, use part number 732177-06, for pulsed fluoro generators use part number 732177-08.
Spares should be stocked accordingly.
2.
3.
Three different filament boards are used in Indico 100 generators. RAD only generators use ONE
filament board, part number 731407-00. R&F generators use TWO filament boards, part number
731407-01 (large focus) and part number 731407-02 (small focus). Spares should be stocked
accordingly.
4.
The part number shown is the suggested replacement for the original auxiliary board. The spares board
is jumper configurable in the field and as such will replace the original auxiliary board. This is intended
to eliminate the need to stock multiple configurations of this board.
5.
Three different inverter board part numbers are used in Indico 100 generators. For 230 VAC 1 phase
and 480 VAC 3 phase generators use part number 732813-00, for 400 VAC 3 phase 30 / 50 / 80 kW
generators use part number 732813-04, for 230 VAC 1 phase 37.5 kW and for 400 VAC 3 phase 37.5 /
65 kW generators use part number 732813-05 (see note 17 for the definition of mains input voltage). 30
and 37.5 kW generators require one inverter board, 50 and 65 kW generators require two inverter
boards, and 80 kW generators require three inverter boards. Spares should be stocked accordingly.
6.
Two part numbers of power input boards are used for spares. For 1 phase 230 VAC generators use part
number 733798-01, for 3 phase 400 or 480 VAC generators use part number 732161-01.
7.
Five different resonant boards are used in Indico 100 generators. Refer to the table below for the correct
part number for your generator.
O/P POWER (kW) & MAINS VOLTS
30 kW (230 VAC 1, 400 / 480 VAC 3)
37.5 / 40 kW (230 VAC 1, 400 VAC 3)
50 kW (400 VAC 3)
50 kW (480 VAC 3)
65 kW (400 VAC 3)
80 kW (400 VAC 3)
80 kW (400 / 480 VAC 3)
RESONANT BOARD
RAD POWER SUPPLIES
732808-00
732808-05
RESONANT BOARD
R&F POWER SUPPLIES
732808-01
732808-02
732808-06
732964-00
732964-02
732964-03
732964-01
732808-03
8.
The AEC board for your generator was selected to be compatible with specific AEC device(s). To
maintain full compatibility, the original part number must be ordered as a replacement. Refer to chapter
9, section 9.2.0 for the part number of the original AEC board shipped in the generator for which this
manual was prepared.
9.
THE CONSOLE DISPLAY BOARD IS ONLY USED WITH THE 23 X 56 CM CONSOLE. The console
display board is supplied pre-mounted to the console front panel switch assembly. Consult the factory
for the required spares part number for this assembly.
Page 8-4
Rev. V
Ch # 740895-07
Spares
NOTE (Cont):
10.
11.
These items only used on generators fitted with low speed starter, spares should be stocked
accordingly. The low speed starter part number with a 33F phase shift capacitor for standard R type
stators is 732752-00. The part number with a 12.5F phase shift capacitor is 732752-01, and the part
number with a 45F phase shift capacitor is 732752-02.
12.
These items only used on dual speed starter option, spares should be stocked accordingly. Several part
numbers of dual speed starter (which are tube stator dependent) are used in Indico 100 generators. To
determine which dual speed starter assembly is in your generator, note the DUAL SPEED STARTER
ASSY part number on a label on the dual speed starter chassis. This will be the part number that must
be ordered for spares usage. For reference, this will be part number 733317-XX or 735925-XX where
XX is a two digit number designating the exact configuration.
The dual speed starter fuses listed are used on all versions of dual speed starter.
13.
These items are used on the 400/480 VAC 3 phase power input board. Spares should be stocked
accordingly.
14a. These items are used on 1 phase 230 VAC units only (on the DC bus assembly or on the 1 phase
power input board). Spares should be stocked accordingly.
14b. This fuse used on 1 phase 230 VAC rad two tube generators, and on 1 phase 230 VAC R & F one tube
and two tube generators. Spares should be stocked accordingly.
15.
16.
NOTE REGARDING MAINS (LINE) VOLTAGE AS DESCRIBED IN THIS SECTION: The mains
voltage referenced in this section is the mains voltage at the input to the generator (at the main fuses
on the power input board). This is not necessarily the same as the voltage at the main disconnect box in
the room, the reason being that an optional line adjusting transformer may be used with the generator
which steps the incoming line voltage to the generator up or down. To ensure that the correct part
number is selected for spares, it is suggested that the mains voltage be noted at the main input fuses
INSIDE THE GENERATOR.
17.
The digital I/O board is optional, and used on generators intended to interface with digital imaging
systems. To ensure full compatibility, please order the same part number that is in your generator(s).
18.
A cooling fan is used on R&F power supplies only. Spares should be stocked accordingly.
19.
For 23 X 56 cm consoles, use LCD display assembly part number 733396-00. For 31 X 42 cm consoles,
use LCD display assembly part number 735895-00.
20.
For 23 X 56 cm consoles, use hand switch assembly part number 733176-00. For 31 X 42 cm consoles,
use hand switch assembly part number 735203-00.
21.
Single phase generators use fuse FNM-3, three phase generators use FNQ-2. Spares should be
stocked accordingly.
22.
Ch # 740895-07
Rev. V
Page 8-5
Spares
Page 8-6
Rev. V
Ch # 740895-07
Schematics
CHAPTER 9
SCHEMATICS
CONTENTS:
Ch # 740895-08
Rev. B
Page 9-1
9 Schematics
9.1.0
INTRODUCTION
This chapter contains the functional schematics for your X-ray generator. Each schematic represents a
major function in the Indico 100 generator; the fourteen functional schematics in this chapter represent all
of the major functional blocks in Indico 100 generators.
9.2.0
9.3.0
FUNCTIONAL DRAWINGS
The functional schematics immediately follow the functional schematic index.
Page 9-2
Rev. B
Ch # 740895-08
DRAWING NUMBER
MD-0788
MD-0762
MD-0763
MD-0761
MD-0759
MD-0760
MD-0764
MD-0765
MD-0786
MD-0787
MD-0757
MD-0758
MD-0766
MD-0767
MD-0828
MD-0829
SCHEMATIC NUMBER
728401
734628
THE PART NUMBER OF THE ORIGINAL AEC BOARD IN THE GENERATOR FOR
WHICH THIS MANUAL WAS PREPARED IS LISTED BELOW:
AEC BOARD PART NUMBER (AS ORIGINALLY SHIPPED)
N/A
MF-0718E
9 Schematics
Page 9-4
Rev. B
Ch # 740895-08
3 PHASE AC
MAINS INPUT
F5A
PHASE 3
F5C
GROUND
R11
R10
NEUTRAL
+
R20
PHASE 2
~
~
~
E23
K1
E16
D3
K1
S.S.
OK
JW2
1
1
J4-8
J4-8
U2
U1
+12V
+12VDC
OK
D2
K2
DC BUS
OK
F2
E10
F1
380/400/480 VAC
J6-1
3
D2
J6-5
D9
120 VAC
J6-6
J4-13
J4-2
J4-2
52 VAC
J2-2 P2-2
F1
K2
D8
SOFT START
FAULT SIGNAL
TO AUXILIARY
BOARD, PAGE 3
R1, R2
K1
J4-1
J4-1
J4-4
J4-4
+12V
D5
J4-3
TP1
J5-3
J1-3
J5-4
J1-4
J3-3
J2-3
+12V
J4-3
F1
J4-14
J3-4
J2-4
J4-15
J4-15
J3-2
J2-2
J4-16
J4-16
J4-18
J4-18
J3-9
J2-9
K3
TP4
TP1
REFER TO MD-0764
J4-17
J10-3
K4
+12V
FLUORO FAN
TIMER / DRIVER
CIRCUIT
(U11, Q9, ETC)
D37
FLUORO
FAN ON
J4-5
D6
J5-3
J5-4
J1-6
J1-5
J1-3
K3
K4
J11-4
AUXILIARY BOARD
E21
240V
***
J8-1
F3
J7-1
J7-3
180V
0V
240V
200V
CONTINUED ON
PAGE 4
230/277 VAC
NEUTRAL
OPTIONAL
GROUND
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED________
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
HTW
0V
H.T. TANK
TUBE 1 /TUBE 2
SOLENOID
(TWO TUBE HT
TANKS ONLY)
J8-3
T2 (SHOWN TAPPED
* FOR
400 VAC MAINS)
J7-5
**
J5-6
THREE FAN
UNITS ONLY
E17
200V
FROM PAGE 3
J5-4
F2
J11-6
R&F GENERATORS ONLY
J5-7
J10-1
+12V
6
J4-5
COMMON
+12V
D7
R72
52 / 73 / 94 VAC
F3
+12V
J4-14
J4-17
RETURN
J1-1
F4
K1
+12V
CONTINUED ON
PAGE 3
73 VAC
K5
D4
J4-13
T1
208 VAC
N/C
J2-1 P2-1
CNCTR
CLOSED
94 VAC
R31
SOFT START
DRIVER
CIRCUIT
(U3B, Q6, ETC)
240 VAC
J6-7
J5-6
+
-**
560 VDC
+12V
JUMPER POSITION:
1 PHASE GENERATORS 2
JUMPER PINS 2-3
3 PHASE GENERATORS 3
JUMPER PINS 1-2
E2 -
+12V
J4-10
E2 -
E9
DC BUS
DISCHARGE
CIRCUIT
(Q1, D10)
F1
J4-10
E1 +
INVERTER
BOARD
R12
SOFT START OK
PROTECTION
CIRCUIT
(U1C, Q7, ETC)
R48
JW3
1
JUMPER POSITION:
1 PHASE GENERATORS 2
JUMPER PINS 2-3
3 PHASE GENERATORS 3
JUMPER PINS 1-2
E1 +
INVERTER
BOARD
E2 -
DC BUS CHARGED
SENSING
CIRCUIT
(R5-R8, D3)
F2
E1 +
INVERTER
BOARD
E11
E8
+12V
DC BUS
OUT
R16, R17
F5B
D1
R18, R19
K5
PHASE 1
DATE
10 MAR 2000
________
10 MAR 2000
MD-0788 REV J
SHEET 1 OF 6
K5
1 PHASE AC
MAINS INPUT
LINE 1
F5A
LINE 2
F5B
E33
MAINS
RECTIFIER
230
VAC
E34
BUS
CAPACITORS
R11
R10
K1
P1-4
P1-1
J12-4
J12-1
NO CONNECTION
J6-5
J6-6
J4-4
J6-7
K5
J5-4
+12V
+12V
J4-4
J3-3
F4
J4-14
J4-15
J4-16
J4-16
J4-18
J4-18
J4-17
J4-17
LOW SPEED
STARTER BOARD
REFER TO PAGE 1
J3-4
D5
J3-2
R12
J4-3
J4-14
RETURN
J5-3
J4-1
J4-15
F1
J2-2 P2-2
K1
J4-3
73 VAC
52 VAC
D8
AUXILIARY BOARD
REFER TO PAGE 1
CONTINUED ON
PAGE 3
D2
K2
J4-1
120 VAC
K2
D4
J4-2
*T1
94 VAC
DC BUS
OK
J2-1 P2-1
J4-2
208 VAC
U1
+12V
J4-13
J6-1
J4-13
E2 -
J6-3
DC BUS CHARGED
SENSING CIRCUIT
(R6-R8, R16-R21, D3, ETC)
1
J4-8
E2 -
240 VAC
F1
J4-8
E1 +
INVERTER
BOARD
DC BUS ASSEMBLY
F2
J4-10
E1 +
INVERTER
BOARD
GROUND
J4-10
650 VDC
OUT
D9
+12VDC
OK
J3-9
+12V
D7
J10-3
K3
K4
J10-1
+12V
K3
6
J4-5
J4-5
D6
J11-4
J11-6
K4
H.T. TANK
REFER TO PAGE 1
J8-3
E21
E17
J8-1
240V
T2 (SHOWN TAPPED
* FOR
240 VAC MAINS)
F3
J7-1
J7-3
200V
J7-5
230 VAC
OPTIONAL
GROUND
180V
CONTINUED ON
PAGE 4
200V
G. SANWALD
CHECKED________
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
HTW
0V
DATE
10 MAR 2000
________
10 MAR 2000
MD-0788 REV J
SHEET 2 OF 6
+35V
0V
J7-3
26 VAC
J7-6
R71
F4
C22
R65
J7-1
C21
R64
26 VAC
+12V
+12V
T1
D31
J7-4
U34
J6-5
J7-5
+5 V
REGULATOR
+/-35V
D32
+5V
J6-4
TP16
F3
FROM
PAGE 1, 2
TP5
J7-2
15 VAC
U5,U6
-35V
F1
J7-4
C24,
C25
J7-5
15 VAC
F2
TO PAGE 1
J6-1
J7-1
J6-2
J7-2
J6-3
J7-3
+12V
-12V
R70
+12 VDC
REGULATOR
0V
D29
TP1 TP15
-12V
D27
+12V
U4
D33
R68
-12 VDC
REGULATOR
D16
D30
C19
+12V
-12V
TO MD-0786
+12V
+12V
D28
-12V
J4-1
J1-1
J4-3
J1-3
J4-5
J1-5
J4-7
J1-7
U27
J4-9
J1-9
+5 V
REGULATOR
J4-11
J1-11
J4-12
J1-12
J4-13
J1-13
J4-15
J1-15
J4-17
J1-17
J4-19
J1-19
+5V
R32
+12V
D1
+12V
5.1V REF
J5-7
J5-6
J5-3
J5-4
J1-5
J1-6
J1-3
J6-7
J8-6
J6-4
J6-3
J8-5
J8-3
18
TUBE 1/TUBE 2
SELECT SIGNAL
TO MD-0765
CONTACTOR
CLOSED
SIGNAL TO
MD-0765
FLUORO
RAD
JUMPER POSITION:
RAD GENERATORS
JUMPER "RAD"
R&F GENERATORS
JUMPER "FLUORO"
J1-4
J9-3
J1-3
J9-2
J1-2
J9-5
J1-5
J9-6
J1-6
-12V
12VDC / SOFT START
FAULT SIGNAL
TO MD-0764, PAGE 1
SOFT START
FAULT SIGNAL
FROM AUXILIARY
BOARD, PAGE 1
R227
R217
1
-35V
AUXILIARY BOARD
2
U41
J1-1
J1-10
J1-29
J1-18
J1-19
J2-14
J2-6
J2-15
J2-7
J1-4
J10-25
J10-6
J10-10
J10-29
J10-18
J10-19
J3-14
J3-6
J3-15
J3-7
+15V
R10
-35V
+35V
J1-6
R11
-12V
FILAMENT BOARD
J1-25
R2
+12V
F1
TP2
R225
U40
J9-4
F2
U3A
R228
1
U7
R226
RN2C
RN2D
J1-1
R21
CONTROL
BOARD
+35V
J9-1
R27, R32
RN4F
+12V
U3D
+12V
R223
R123
R20
U3C
+12V
R22
+12V
Q16
CONTROL BOARD
-12V
+12V
Q1
JW1
J6-5
+35V
8
7
J5-5
AUXILIARY BOARD
-
J6-6
D19
F2
+12V
J1-3
TO 2.1 V
CURRENT
SINK
1
5
R33
14
12
P/S ON
-15V
DS34
DS35
GRN
RED
15
TO 2.1 V
CURRENT
SINK
DATA LATCH,
BUFFER, &
DRIVER
U27, U19
& U16
U17
+5V
12
11
Q4
+5V
11
DRIVER
DRIVER
U16
U16
TUBE 1/TUBE 2
SELECT SIGNAL
TO MD-0787
DS22
FLUORO
16
TP2
+5V
FILAMENT BOARD
Q1
DS23
FLUORO
TO 2.1 V
CURRENT
SINK
DS2
LOW
17
DS4
HIGH
TO 2.1 V
CURRENT
SINK
U24
BUFFER
DATA BUS
D0..D7
BIT 0
DATA LATCH
& BUFFER
U27, U19
BIT 2
DATA
LATCH
-35V
J1-6
R9
U9
10
D1
R14
DS10
RED
-12V
J1-5
R13
DS9
GRN
F1
+5V
RN11I
CONT.
J1-2
13
RN11A
RN7F
+5V
DATA
LATCH
U27
U49
BIT 7
BIT 3
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED________
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
HTW
DATE
10 MAR 2000
________
10 MAR 2000
MD-0788 REV J
PAGE 3
SHEET 3 OF 6
24 VDC RETURN
K3
24 VDC
F5
D3
C10
0V
+5V
J1-1
F3
18 VAC
FROM
PAGE 1, 2
K2
J1-4
D1
C16
0V
F4
J1-7
F2
J1-9
F1
J16-8
-12V
TP5
110 VAC
U40
220 VAC
300 VAC
BACKLIGHT
POWER SUPPLY
(Q7, Q8, T1,
C57, ETC)
J10-1
FLUORESCENT LAMP
J10-4
LINE SYNC
TO MD-0767
ZERO CROSS
DETECTOR
220 VAC
220 VAC
R4
+24V
R78
TO RAD-ONLY
CONSOLE
(PAGE 5)
-15V
K1
-15V
TP6
110 VAC
19
TP7
-15 V
REGULATOR
-24V
TP9
J16-3
+12V
R6
U4
R5
220 VAC
+ 5 / -15VDC
POWER SUPPLY
& REGULATOR
(U28, L1, D9-D13, ETC)
F1
+12 V
REGULATOR
-12 V
REGULATOR
18 VAC
110 VAC
J5-15
TP7
+5V
TP2
TP3
U3
U2
J1-5
J4-15
+5V
TP8
TP10
R3
+5 / +16VDC
POWER SUPPLY
CIRCUIT
(U47, Q4, T1,
D17, D18, ETC.)
F6
J1-3
J4-13
J5-13
R1
R81
J1-2
J5-14
TP1
U5
+15 V
REGULATOR
R2
TP13
TP13
18 VAC
J5-12
J4-14
+15V
+24V
T2
J4-12
J2-1
J1-1
J2-3
J1-3
J2-6
J1-6
J2-7
J1-7
J2-8
J1-8
J2-9
J1-9
110 VAC
+24VDC
R7
DS1
D15
POWER ON
+12V
+12V
K1
+24V
+24V
J10-13
J10-19
K2
J10-11
J10-16
J10-17
-12V
-12V
-24V
-24V
K3
+24V
J17-3
J13-21
J13-23
J13-11
J13-13
J13-17
J3-6
J13-6
J3-1
J13-1
J3-8
J13-8
J3-5
J13-5
-15V
+5V
TP16
-12V
J13-4
J13-7
DS38
DS37
TP18
TP21
J3-7
J11-1
DS33
J11-5
TO REMOTE FLUORO
CONTROL, PAGE 5
TP20
J13-2
J3-4
+12V
R89
-15V
J3-2
+5V
R75
R80
TP4
+24V
+12V
TP19
DS36
-15V
+15V
+15V
+12V
R85
-12V
+5V
TP17
R77
J13-15
+5V
J13-3
R76
-15V
J3-3
-15V
DS39
R90
+12V
J13-9
+15V
+15V
+24V
R86
+15V
R81
+5V
J17-4
R78
AEC BOARD
-12V
G. SANWALD
CHECKED________
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
HTW
DATE
10 MAR 2000
________
10 MAR 2000
MD-0788 REV J
SHEET 4 OF 6
+12V
+12V
+5V
U8
J11-1
P1-1
J11-5
P1-5
+5 V
REGULATOR
D4
+5V
+12V
+5V
J1-17
J2-17
J1-18
J2-18
J1-15
J2-15
J1-19
J2-19
J1-20
J2-20
+12V
REMOTE FLUORO
DISPLAY BOARD
REMOTE FLUORO
CONTROL BOARD
J5-12
FROM GENERATOR
INTERFACE BOARD
(PAGE 4)
+5V
+5V
J5-14
+5V
TP2
J5-13
F1
J5-15
+ 5 / -20VDC
POWER SUPPLY
CIRCUIT
(U30, Q5, T1,
D7, D8, ETC.)
J8-1
J1-1
J8-2
J1-2
J8-23
J1-23
U31
-12 V
REGULATOR
-12V
J8-24
J1-24
J8-25
J1-25
J8-26
J1-26
U32
300 VAC
BACKLIGHT
POWER SUPPLY
J10-1
-12V
FLUORESCENT LAMP
J10-5
J16-3
J8-3
+5V
TP3
FROM GENERATOR
INTERFACE BOARD
(PAGE 4)
TP7
TP2
J16-4
J8-8
F1
+ 5 / -20VDC
POWER SUPPLY
CIRCUIT
(U12, L1, D2,
D3-D7, ETC.)
TP8
+5V
TP9
-20V
19
300 VAC
BACKLIGHT
POWER SUPPLY
(Q1, Q2, T1,
C36, ETC.)
J5-1
FLUORESCENT LAMP
J5-5
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED________
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
HTW
DATE
10 MAR 2000
________
10 MAR 2000
MD-0788 REV J
SHEET 5 OF 6
NOTE
REFERENCE
REMARKS
THIS VOLTAGE WILL BE APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC WHEN THE DC BUS CAPACITORS ARE NOT CHARGED. THIS WILL RISE TO APPROXIMATELY 6 VDC WHEN THE DC BUS CAPACITORS ARE FULLY CHARGED.
THE DC BUS CAPACITORS MUST CHARGE WITHIN APPROXIMATELY 0.25 SECONDS OF THE GENERATOR BEING SWITCHED ON. IF THE DC BUS CAPACITORS DO NOT CHARGE NORMALLY, THE SOFT START
OK PROTECTION CIRCUIT ENERGIZES RELAY K1 (SEE # 4) AND INHIBITS OPERATION OF THE SOFT START DRIVER CIRCUIT (SEE # 3).
LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) COMMANDS THE MAIN CONTACTOR K5 ON THE POWER INPUT BOARD TO CLOSE. HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = CONTACTOR OPEN. THIS OUPUT WILL NOT SWITCH
LOW IF THE DC BUS CAPACITORS ARE NOT CHARGED (SEE # 1 & 2).
K1 REMAINS DE-ENERGIZED (CONTACTS AS SHOWN) IF NO SOFT-START FAULT IS DETECTED. THEREFORE, K1 AND K2 ON THE POWER INPUT BOARD WILL ENERGIZE WHEN THE GENERATOR IS SWITCHED
ON. A SOFT-START FAULT ENERGIZES K1 ON THE AUXILIARY BOARD, DE-ENERGIZING K1 ON THE POWER INPUT BOARD. THIS WILL INHIBIT FURTHER DC BUS CHARGING.
LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = TUBE 2 SELECTED, HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = TUBE 1 SELECTED.
LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = FLUORO FAN(S) ON, HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = FLUORO FAN(S) OFF. FAN(S) ARE SWITCHED ON DURING PULSED OR CONTINUOUS FLUORO OPERATION, AND
REMAIN ON FOR APPROXIMATELY 20 MINUTES AFTER SWITCHING TO RAD MODE.
LOW INDICATES CONTACTOR CLOSED (SEE # 3). THE CONTACTOR CLOSED SIGNAL OCCURS APPROXIMATELY 10 SECONDS AFTER INITIAL GENERATOR TURN-ON, ASSUMING NORMAL DC BUS CHARGING.
HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = RAD / PULSED FLUORO MODE. LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = CONTINUOUS FLUORO MODE. USED ON R&F GENERATORS ONLY.
HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = PULSED FLUORO / LOW POWER MODE. LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = HIGH POWER RAD MODE. NOT USED ON ALL MODELS, REFER TO MD-0786 FOR DETAILS.
24 VDC (APPROXIMATELY) ENERGIZES K1 AND / OR K2 ON THE POWER INPUT BOARD, INITIATING THE POWER-ON SEQUENCE. SEE # 4.
HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) = TUBE 2 SELECTED. LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = TUBE 1 SELECTED.
HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) = RAD / PULSED FLUORO MODE. LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = CONTINUOUS FLUORO MODE. USED ON R&F GENERATORS ONLY.
HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) = PULSED FLUORO / LOW POWER MODE. LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = HIGH POWER RAD MODE. NOT USED ON ALL MODELS, REFER TO MD-0786 FOR DETAILS.
DS9 LIT = CONTACTOR CLOSED, DS10 LIT = CONTACTOR NOT CLOSED.
DS34 LIT = GENERATOR ON COMMAND ISSUED (CONSOLE PASSED ALL SELF TESTS). DS35 LIT = GENERATOR ON COMMAND NOT ISSUED (DURING CONSOLE SELF TESTS, OR IF SELF TESTS FAILED).
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
FIGURE 1
-8 V
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED________
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
HTW
DATE
10 MAR 2000
________
10 MAR 2000
MD-0788 REV J
SHEET 6 OF 6
24 VDC RETURN
T2
F5
D3
J17-2
J17-1
+ 24 VDC
*
S3
Q1
Q2
R15
LOCKOUT
NORMAL
D4
S1
OFF
K3
D16
K2
31 X 42 CM
CONSOLE
J3-3
J5-10
J4-10
P1-2
J3-2
J5-11
J4-11
R13
Q3
P1-3
DS1
ON
S2
ON
K1
OFF
P1-1
J3-1
J5-12
J4-12
JW1
23 X 56 CM
CONSOLE
CONSOLE
BOARD
KEYBOARD ASSEMBLY
ON
P1-3
J2-3
J3-9
J6-9
J5-10
J4-10
P1-2
J2-2
J3-7
J6-7
J5-11
J4-11
P1-1
J2-1
J3-5
J6-5
J5-12
J4-12
JUMPER POSITION:
TO ENERGIZE K1 ONLY WHEN
THE CONSOLE IS SWITCHED ON
JUMPER JW1 PINS 1-2
TO ENERGIZE K1 AT ALL TIMES THAT
THE GENERATOR AC MAINS IS ON
JUMPER JW1 PINS 2-3
(K1 SWITCHES THE 110 & 220 VAC
SUPPLIES TO THE ROOM
INTERFACE BOARD)
OFF
KEYBOARD ASSEMBLY
RAD-ONLY
CONSOLE
DISPLAY BOARD
ON
CONSOLE CPU
BOARD
P1-16
J7-16
J8-7
J16-7
P1-15
J7-15
J8-6
J16-6
P1-17
J7-17
J8-3
J16-3
OFF
CONSOLE
BOARD
KEYBOARD ASSEMBLY
USE DRAWING DC BUS & POWER DISTRIBUTION, MD-0788, IN CONJUNCTION WITH THIS DOCUMENT
TOUCH SCREEN
CONSOLE
P1-2
J5-2
J2-10
J4-10
* TO CONNECT AN EMERGENCY-OFF SWITCH, REMOVE JUMPER FROM J17-1 TO J17-2. THEN CONNECT
THE EMERGENCY OFF SWITCH TO J17-1 AND J17-2.
ON
P1-3
J5-3
J2-11
J4-11
P1-4
J5-4
J2-12
J4-12
OFF
KEYPAD ASSEMBLY
TOUCH SCREEN
INTERFACE
BOARD
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED_________
DATE
02 JUN 2000
_________
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
02 JUN 2000
SYSTEM ON
MD-0762 REV E
SHEET 1 OF 2
NOTE
REFERENCE
REMARKS
MOMENTARILY PRESSING ON CONNECTS THIS LINE TO 24 VDC RETURN. THIS LATCHES RELAY DRIVERS ON THE GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD,
ENERGIZING K2 AND K3, AND POSSIBLY K1 (DEPENDING ON JW1 SETTING). SEE NOTE ADJACENT TO JW1 ON THIS DOCUMENT.
MOMENTARILY PRESSING OFF CONNECTS THIS LINE TO 24 VDC RETURN. THIS UNLATCHES RELAY DRIVERS ON THE GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD,
DE-ENERGIZING K2 AND K3, AND POSSIBLY K1 (DEPENDING ON JW1 SETTING).
DS1 LIT INDICATES THE PRESENCE OF THE 24 VDC SUPPLY SHOWN. THIS 24 VDC SUPPLY WILL BE PRESENT IF THE GENERATOR IS CONNECTED TO A
LIVE AC MAINS SUPPLY.
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED_________
DATE
02 JUN 2000
_________
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
02 JUN 2000
SYSTEM ON
MD-0762 REV E
SHEET 2 OF 2
+24V
NOTE *
TABLE
STEPPER
INPUT
BUCKY
CONTACTS
TB1-5
J2-15
J9-15
TB1-4
J2-16
J9-16
TB2-5
J2-13
J9-13
TB2-4
J2-14
J9-14
TB2-7
J2-11
J9-11
+24V
TB2-6
J2-12
J2-24
J9-24
TB3-4
J2-25
J9-25
JW10
JW9
R53
R55
R66
J9-12
TB3-5
NOTE *
JW7
5
U7, U12, U18,
U19, U25
U21
R54
U31
R56
+24V
U29
R67
REMOTE TOMO
SELECT
+24V
NOTE *
COLLIMATOR
INTERLOCK
NOTE *
4
JW2
SEE
MD-0761
D0
J12-1
J6-1
D1
J12-2
J6-2
D2
J12-3
J6-3
D3
J12-4
J6-4
D4
J12-5
J6-5
D5
J12-6
J6-6
D6
J12-7
J6-7
D7
J12-8
J6-8
R23
TOMO
EXPOSURE
TB3-7
J2-22
J9-22
TB3-6
J2-23
J9-23
TB4-4
J2-21
J9-21
U8
U10
R21
ROOM DOOR
INTERLOCK
+24V
U14
TB4-5
R29
J2-20
R38
J9-20
R34
R36
TB4-7
U13
J2-19
T2 FROM MD-0787
J9-19
R33
+24V
R32
TB4-8
THERMAL
SWITCH 1
+24V
NOTE *
+24V
TB4-6
THERMAL
SWITCH 2
JW3
BUFFER, DRIVER
AND ADDRESS
DECODER CIRCUITS
U9
R22
U16
R37
TB4-9
T1 FROM MD-0787
MULTIPLE SPOT
EXPOSURE
I.I.
SAFETY
TB5-12
J2-17
J9-17
TB5-11
J2-18
J9-18
TB6-4
J2-9
J9-9
TB6-3
J2-10
J9-10
+24V
NOTE *
+24V
NOTE *
R35
JW8
JW6
U20
J2-8
TB6-5
REMOTE FLUORO
EXPOSURE
REMOTE
PREP
+24V
J9-8
TB6-6
J2-7
J9-7
TB6-8
J2-5
J9-5
TB6-7
J2-6
J9-6
R68
**
U30, U42,
U44
R70
R71
R52
U27
R69
DATA BUS
DO..D7
+24V
NOTE *
REMOTE
EXPOSURE
TB6-10
J2-3
J9-3
TB6-9
J2-4
J9-4
TP14
J2-1
J2-2
+24V
NOTE *
4
J9-1
J9-2
R77
R76
JW15
JW14
R75
U28
R74
**
U41,
U43
THIS PAGE SHOWS THE ROOM INTERFACE INPUTS. ROOM INTERFACE OUTPUTS ARE
SHOWN ON PAGE 2
** ADDITIONAL CIRCUITS ARE USED IN THE AREAS INDICATED **. THESE CIRCUITS ARE NOT
RELEVANT TO THIS ROOM INTERFACE DIAGRAM, HOWEVER, THEY ARE PART OF THE X-RAY
EXPOSURE FUNCTION AND ARE SHOWN ON MD-0761
*
24 VDC EXTERNAL INPUT POSITION
FOR JW2, JW3, JW6, JW7, JW8, JW9,
JW10, JW14, JW15 SHOWN.
JUMPER CONNECTS PINS 2-3; 24 VDC
APPLIED EXTERNALLY ACTIVATES
THE INPUT(S) BY ENERGIZING THE
APPROPRIATE OPTO-COUPLER.
*
DRY CONTACT INPUT POSITION
FOR JW2, JW3, JW6, JW7, JW8, JW9,
JW10, JW14, JW15 SHOWN. JUMPER
CONNECTS PINS 1-2 AND 3-4; AN
EXTERNAL DRY CONTACT CLOSURE
ACTIVATES THE INPUT(S) BY ENERGIZING
THE APPROPRIATE OPTO-COUPLER.
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
S. BLAKE
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
DATE
13 APR 2000
14 APR 2000
ROOM
INTERFACE
13 APR 2000
MD-0763 REV C
SHEET 1 OF 2
+24V
+24V
C2
DRIVE 1
J9-40
J2-40
J9-39
J2-39
J9-30
J2-30
TB1-2
JW12
R2
K1
TB1-1
C1
K1
JW1
DRIVE 2
TB1-11
JW9
R1
K2
DRY * LIVE *
J9-29
TOMO / BUCKY 4
SELECT
TB1-12
J2-29
BUCKY 3
SELECT
K2
TB11
J9-28
DRIVE 3
J6-1
J12-1
J2-28
K6
K3
D0
K3
K4
J9-27
DRIVE 4
J6-2
J12-2
J12-3
K1
K4
D1
J9-34
DRIVE 5
J6-3
J2-27
K2
DRY * LIVE *
2
3
C3
TB2-2
JW11
R3
K3
TB2-1
BUCKY 2
SELECT
C4
J2-34
220 VAC
K5
D2
JW2
JW3
TB10
TB2-11
JW10
R4
K4
DRY * LIVE *
TB2-12
BUCKY 1
SELECT
1
J9-32
DRIVE 6
J6-4
J6-5
J12-4
J12-5
J2-32
D3
D4
ADDRESS DECODERS,
BUFFER, REGISTER,
AND DRIVER
CIRCUITS
TB3-1
2
K6
JW4
J2-31
K5
TB3-12
JW14
C6
J2-35
J6-7
J12-7
J2-36
3
K9
D6
JW5
J9-37
J6-8
J12-8
TB4-1
K10
24 VDC
TB8
J9-38
DRIVE 11
J2-38
DATA BUS
DO..D7
2
3
J9-33
J2-33
J9-26
+24V
JW6
K9
K13
TUBE 1 / TUBE 2
INDICATOR (COMM)
TUBE 1 INDICATOR
TUBE 2 INDICATOR
TB5-4
MAG 3
TB5-3
DRY **
K10
LIVE 24 VDC **
TB5-7
TB5-6
MAG 2
TB5-5
J2-26
DRIVE 1 TO
DRIVE 13 = LOW
ENERGIZES
THE RELAYS
ROOM
LIGHT
TB5-2
4
K12
DRIVE 13
TB4-2
1
K11
DRIVE 12
TB4-3
K7
J2-37
D7
TB4-12
DRY * LIVE *
4
5
DRIVE 10
K8
JW13
2
J9-36
DRIVE 9
TOMO / BUCKY
START
TB4-11
C5
K6
R5
D5
R6
TB9
K8
COLLIMATOR
BYPASS
TB3-11
K7
J9-35
TB3-2
DRY * LIVE *
110 VAC
J12-6
4
J9-31
DRIVE 7
DRIVE 8
J6-6
TB5-8
K12
TB7
1
K11
+24V
TB5-10
MAG 1
TB5-9
3
JW7
K13
+24V
DRY **
TB5-1
TB6-1
LIVE 24 VDC **
JW8
TB6-2
ALE
OUTPUT
TB6-11
DRY **
LIVE CONTACT
DRY CONTACT
DRY CONTACT POSITION
FOR JW1 TO JW5 SHOWN.
JUMPER CONNECTS PINS 4-6
LIVE CONTACT
DRY CONTACT
LIVE CONTACT POSITION
FOR JW1 TO JW5 SHOWN.
JUMPER CONNECTS PINS 6-8
TB6-12
LIVE 24 VDC **
**
SPARE
OUTPUT
DRAWN
DRY CONTACT
DRY CONTACT
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
S. BLAKE
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
DATE
13 APR 2000
14 APR 2000
ROOM
INTERFACE
13 APR 2000
MD-0763 REV C
SHEET 2 OF 2
+24V
+24V
U22
5
LAST IMAGE
HOLD CIRCUIT
(U39, C30, ETC.)
REMOTE FLUORO
EXPOSURE INPUT
TP5
TP6
+5V
+5V
J5-6
J4-6
J5-7
J4-7
J5-8
J4-8
R19
FROM
RAD-ONLY
CONSOLE
(PAGE 3)
U15
R25
ADDRESS DECODER,
DATA LATCH, AND
DRIVER
U18, U25
U37
R18
J13-7
R72
COM
CPU
U46
RN14C
J12-5
J6-5
RN14D
U25, U12, U7
BUFFER AND
ADDRESS
DECODER
J12-7
J6-7
RN14B
J6-4
RN14E
4
J12-4
5
KV CONTROL
REFER TO MD-0759
4
5
JW15
SEE NOTE 1
1
J9-3
U26
4
MA CONTROL
REFER TO MD-0760
R77
J9-4
J13-9
U25, U12, U7
U43
X-RAY
TO 2.1 V
CURRENT
SINK
+24V
U25
HAND
SWITCH
DS41
U28
U24
4
PREP
DS42
+24V
J16-4
J16-5
FOOT
SWITCH
R102
R121
J4-9
BUFFER AND
ADDRESS
DECODER
J16-3
J6-6
U18, U25
+24V
U38
U18
DATA BUS
D0..D7
J12-6
R20
+5V
CPU
EXP
SWT
R70
+5V
+12V
SEE NOTE 1
J5-9
R120
J9-8
U30
R119
R118
R113
EXPOSURE ENABLE
COMMAND FROM
MD-0767, PAGE 1
R24
TP4
ADDRESS DECODER,
DATA LATCH, AND
DRIVER
J6-17
U25, U12, U7
U42
2
J12-17
U32
U44
R92
R82
RN19B
R39, R57
1.
J13-3
REMOTE
EXPOSURE
INPUT
J13-1
R76
J13-5
J3-18
CONSOLE BOARD
J3-19
ADDRESS DECODER,
DATA LATCH, AND
DRIVER
J12-5
RN14D
J6-5
J3-20
+24V
P1-18
JW2
SEE NOTE 1
RN14A
J9-24
P1-19
PREP
THE CONSOLE BOARD &
KEYBOARD ASSEMBLY
SHOWN ON THIS PAGE IS
USED ON THE 31 X 42 CM
CONSOLE ONLY. REFER TO PAGE
3 FOR THE 23 X 56 CM CONSOLE
AND THE RAD-ONLY CONSOLE,
AND PAGE 4 FOR THE
TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLE.
R23
J9-25
X-RAY
P1-20
KEYBOARD ASSEMBLY
REMOTE
TOMO
SELECT
INPUT
R21
J6-8
U25, U12, U7
U8
ADDRESS DECODER,
DATA LATCH, AND
DRIVER
DATA BUS
D0..D7
J12-8
4
DRAWN
U10
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
S. BLAKE
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
DATE
26 APR 2000
26 APR 00
26 APR 2000
X-RAY EXPOSURE
RAD/FLUORO
MD-0761 REV G
SHEET 1 OF 4
13
J1-4
GRN
R174
RN11D
DS31
RED
TO 2.1 V
CURRENT
SINK
DS27
GRN
7
U27
D19
+5V
14
DS26 X-RAY
DS28
RN5E
J1-33
RN2A
J3-9
J9-7
J3-7
H.T. TANK
+12V
U19, U16
D21
TP18
J10-15
J1-15
PREP ENABLED
DETECTOR CKT
(U11B, U10C, ETC)
RN1C
5
11
12
J1-34
RN4B
GENERATOR READY
DETECTOR CIRCUIT
(U10A, Q6, D37, ETC)
J10-16
J1-3
D25
RN1D
U2
18
J1-22
CONTINUED
ON PAGE 3
R133
Q12
J10-35
RN1H
1
X-RAY REQUEST
DETECTOR CKT
(U11D, RN7, ETC)
U5
J1-35
RN1F
16
TP12
RN1G
1
U3
RN1E
J9-9
15
J10-33
J10-34
10
BUFFER AND
DRIVER
DATA BUS
D0..D7
12
U4
J10-14
RED
DATA
LATCH
KV ENABLED
DETECTOR CKT
(U11A, RN8, ETC)
RN2B
TO 2.1 V
CURRENT
SINK
U33F
13
TP10
J1-14
YEL
PREP
R173
RN2F
DS30
KV
EN
+12V
J8-4
+5V
RN11C
RN11B
+5V
AUXILIARY BOARD
X-RAY REQUEST
DETECTOR CKT
(U10D, RN7, ETC)
TP14
LOGIC OR / NOR
CIRCUITS (U10B, U14,
Q4, Q13, D91, ETC)
17
DRIVE ENABLE COMMAND TO MD-0759, PAGE 1
CONTROL BOARD
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
S. BLAKE
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
DATE
26 APR 2000
26 APR 00
26 APR 2000
X-RAY EXPOSURE
RAD/FLUORO
MD-0761 REV G
SHEET 2 OF 4
+5V
P/S
READY
DS17
OPTO-COUPLER ON
= GENERATOR READY
J1-3
FROM
PAGE 2
J1-22
J5-6
TO 2.1 V
CURRENT
SINK
J5-7
U24
J5-8
U14
U6
J10-22
BUFFER
J10-3
R9
RED
R8
GRN
19
DS18
R10
RN7D
+5V
J4-7
J4-8
U10
U12
2
J4-6
J5-9
U3
TO
GENERATOR
INTERFACE
BOARD
(PG 1)
J4-9
BUFFER
DATA BUS
D0..D7
CONTROL BOARD
U21
U11
U13
2
DATA BUS
D0..D7
1
TP12
+5V
TB1-1
TP13
J8-4
+5V
J8-5
R66
R67
J8-3
J16-4
J16-5
J16-3
TO
GENERATOR
INTERFACE
BOARD
(PG 1)
FOOT
SWITCH
PREP
U17
HAND
SWITCH
X-RAY
TB1-2
TB1-3
TB1-4
CPU
COM
5
DATA BUS
D0..D7
PREP
HAND
SWITCH
X-RAY
U9
TB1-5
J6-6
J6-8
J6-10
U10
4
P1-18
J2-18
J3-6
P1-19
J2-19
J3-8
P1-20
J2-20
J3-10
J3-3
PREP
J3-1
X-RAY
COM
J3-5
J7-3
J7-2
J7-1
KEYBOARD ASSEMBLY
DISPLAY BOARD
P1-3
P1-2
PREP
X-RAY
DRAWN
P1-1
KEYBOARD ASSEMBLY
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
S. BLAKE
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
DATE
26 APR 2000
26 APR 00
26 APR 2000
X-RAY EXPOSURE
RAD/FLUORO
MD-0761 REV G
SHEET 3 OF 4
PREP
P1-6
J5-6
J3-7
P1-7
J5-7
J2-8
P1-5
J5-5
J2-9
J4-7
J4-8
X-RAY
TO
GENERATOR
INTERFACE
BOARD
(PG 1)
J4-9
KEYPAD ASSEMBLY
PREP
HAND
SWITCH
NOTE
REFERENCE
X-RAY
COM
J3-3
J3-1
J3-5
REMARKS
LOW (APPROXIMATELY 1 VDC) AT THESE POINTS INDICATES FOOT SWITCH INPUT CLOSED, PREP SWITCH PRESSED, OR X-RAY SWITCH PRESSED RESPECTIVELY. HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 24 VDC) =
OPEN CIRCUIT (I.E. NOT PRESSED) FOOT SWITCH, OR PREP SWITCH, OR X-RAY SWITCH. FOR RAD-ONLY CONSOLE, LOW INDICATES PREP SWITCH PRESSED, OR X-RAY SWITCH PRESSED, RESPECTIVELY.
2
3
LOW (APPROXIMATELY 1 VDC) = AN X-RAY EXPOSURE HAS BEEN REQUESTED VIA ONE OF SEVERAL EXPOSURE INPUTS. HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 24 VDC) = NO X-RAY EXPOSURE HAS BEEN REQUESTED.
EXPOSURE ENABLE LINE. LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) INDICATES AN X-RAY EXPOSURE REQUEST, HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) = NO X-RAY EXPOSURE HAS BEEN REQUESTED.
THE CATHODE OF THE ASSOCIATED LED IS HELD LOW UNDER CPU CONTROL DURING AN X-RAY EXPOSURE REQUEST ONLY. NO MEANINGFUL MEASUREMENTS CAN BE MADE ON THIS LINE AS THIS IS A
DATA LINE. THE REQUIRED DATA IS LATCHED BY THE REGISTER CIRCUIT(S) AT THE APPROPRIATE TIME.
THE OUTPUT OF THE ASSOCIATED LED IS LATCHED BY A REGISTER. THIS IS THEN READ BY THE DATA BUS AT THE APPROPRIATE TIME. AS THIS IS A DATA LINE, NO MEANINGFUL MEASUREMENTS CAN BE
MADE AT THIS CONNECTION.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
DS30 LIT = KV ENABLE REQUEST SENT. THIS IS NECESSARY TO MAKE AN X-RAY EXPOSURE. DS31 LIT = KV ENABLE NOT REQUESTED.
DS27 LIT = PREP REQUEST SENT. DS28 LIT = PREP NOT REQUESTED.
DS26 LIT = X-RAY EXPOSURE IN PROCESS.
HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) = KV ENABLED, LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = KV NOT ENABLED.
HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) = PREP REQUESTED. LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = PREP NOT REQUESTED.
HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) = X-RAY REQUESTED. LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = X-RAY NOT REQUESTED.
LOW = X-RAY EXPOSURE REQUESTED AS PER # 3. THIS LINE MUST BE LOW IN ORDER FOR THE X-RAY EXPOSURE LEDS ON THE CONTROL BOARD TO BE ENERGIZED (SEE # 16).
LOW = (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = TUBE 1 / TUBE 2 MISMATCH OR THERMOSTAT OPEN FAULT. HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = NO FAULT.
HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = KV ENABLED, LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = KV NOT ENABLED.
HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = PREP REQUESTED, LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = PREP NOT REQUESTED.
HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = X-RAY REQUESTED, LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = X-RAY NOT REQUESTED.
HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) = OUTPUT DRIVE ENABLED, LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = OUTPUT DRIVE DISABLED.
18
ALL INPUTS TO THE GENERATOR READY DETECTOR CIRCUIT MUST BE AT THE CORRECT LOGIC LEVEL IN ORDER TO BE ABLE TO MAKE AN X-RAY EXPOSURE. THIS MEANS ALL FOUR FAULT INPUTS SHOWN
MUST BE CLEARED, AND THE KV ENABLE AND PREP COMMANDS MUST BE PRESENT.
19
DS17 LIT INDICATES GENERATOR READY TO MAKE AN EXPOSURE. THIS REQUIRES THAT ALL CONDITIONS PER # 18 BE SATISFIED. DS18 LIT INDICATES A GENERATOR READY DETECTOR CIRCUIT INPUT IS
NOT SATISFIED TO ENABLE AN X-RAY EXPOSURE.
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
S. BLAKE
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
DATE
26 APR 2000
26 APR 00
26 APR 2000
X-RAY EXPOSURE
RAD/FLUORO
MD-0761 REV G
SHEET 4 OF 4
TP9 TP8
J1-31
R89
U16A
+12V
D80
R208
HIGH KV
DETECTOR
AND LATCH
(U31, U32A, U33A)
HV ON DETECTOR
CIRCUIT (U30C
U30D, Q6, ETC)
JW3
125kV 150kV
OR
LOGIC
JUMPER POSITION:
125kV GENERATORS
JUMPER 125kV
150 kV GENERATORS
JUMPER 150kV
R25
J10-7
J1-7
3+
J1-26 R25, R44
D93
CATHODE OVERVOLTAGE
SIGNAL TO MD-0760, PG 2
R220
INVERTER 1
FAULT LATCH &
LOGIC INVERTER
(U39B, U35F)
INVERTER 1
FAULT DETECTOR
(T3, U36, D83, ETC)
INVERTER 2
FAULT LATCH &
LOGIC INVERTER
(U39C, U35E)
INVERTER 2
FAULT DETECTOR
(T4, U37, D84, ETC)
INVERTER 3
FAULT LATCH &
LOGIC INVERTER
(U39D, U35D)
INVERTER 3
FAULT DETECTOR
(T5, U38, D85, ETC)
J14-1
J14-3
J15-1
INVERTER FAULT SIGNALS
FROM PAGE 2
J15-3
J16-1
J16-3
R71
ERROR AMPLIFIERS
INCLUDES U13B, U21A
R70
U13A
R106
D49
D35
R107
65+
+
+
U13B
R43
U21A
R175
VCO
INCLUDES U19, U20,
U23, U25, U27, Q10
U21B
R108
+12V
ANODE OVERVOLTAGE
SIGNAL TO MD-0760, PG 2
TP17 TP19
D48
2-
J10-26
D92
+5V
R26, R45
U14A
J9-8
R50
U12B
R132
3+
6
5
INV 1
R46
U24A
2
1
U26A
3
DRIVE PULSES
CONTINUED ON PAGE 2
U26B
U24B
5
4
D66
D70
DATA BUS
D0..D7
Ir
R62
3
2
+
-
D27-D30
R66
U15
R64
R63
HIGH RESONANT
CURRENT LATCH
& LOGIC INVERTER
(U32D, U33D)
CURRENT SENSE
R65
D/A
CONVERTER
KV FEEDBACK SIGNAL
FROM PAGE 3
D87-D89, U35C
D86
U22
D82
INV 2
11
kV
D63
TP2
+12V
D81
INV 3
D69
U33E
TP26
+12V
R172
10
R69
R221
RESET COMMAND
FROM MD-0761, PG 2
J9-5
J9-7
R54
R23
HV ON SIGNAL
TO MD-0767, PG 1
A/D
CONVERTER
U16B
R171
RN2B
R48
2
3
R180
J10-12
J9-6
R49
U12A
R37
2
3
R52
R24
J1-12
U15A
RN4B
J10-31
R67
R72
RN2A
R91
R210
R209
R31
R215
RN4A
R68
R42
R26
U15B
R35
6
R36
R41
TP6 TP8
7
R53
T1
T2
DRIVE ENABLE
COMMAND FROM
MD-0761, PAGE 2
-12V
CONTROL BOARD
J13-4
J13-1
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
S. BLAKE
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
DATE
18 MAY 2000
18 MAY 2000
18 MAY 2000
KV CONTROL &
FEEDBACK
MD-0759 REV C
SHEET 1 OF 4
J2-1
J2-3
J10-1
J1-1
J10-2
J1-2
J10-3
J1-3
J10-4
J1-4
* USED ON R&F
GENERATORS ONLY
TO J14-1
TO J14-3
K1 *
INVERTER FAULT
SIGNAL, TO PAGE 1
MOSFET
SWITCHES
MOSFET
SWITCHES
E3
MOSFET
SWITCHES
MOSFET
SWITCHES
*
E4
INVERTER BOARD #1
J2-1
J2-3
J11-1
J1-1
J11-2
J1-2
TO J15-1
TO J15-3
INVERTER FAULT
SIGNAL, TO PAGE 1
MOSFET
SWITCHES
MOSFET
SWITCHES
E3
J11-3
J1-3
J11-4
J1-4
MOSFET
SWITCHES
MOSFET
SWITCHES
E4
INVERTER BOARD #2
J2-1
J2-3
J12-1
J12-2
J12-3
J12-4
DRIVE PULSES
FROM PAGE 2
J1-1
POWER MODE
SELECT
BOARD
(REFER TO
MD-0786)
J1-2
TO J16-1
TO J16-3
INVERTER FAULT
SIGNAL, TO PAGE 1
MOSFET
SWITCHES
MOSFET
SWITCHES
E3
J1-3
J1-4
MOSFET
SWITCHES
MOSFET
SWITCHES
E4
CONTROL BOARD
INVERTER BOARD #3
RESONANT BOARD
H.T. PRIMARY CURRENT
SENSE, TO PAGE 1
J1-1
J1-4
TO J13-1
TO J13-4
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
S. BLAKE
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
DATE
18 MAY 2000
18 MAY 2000
18 MAY 2000
KV CONTROL &
FEEDBACK
MD-0759 REV C
SHEET 2 OF 4
HV ANODE
BOARD
J1
ANODE
S
TO J9-8
KV FEEDBACK
SIGNAL
TO PAGE 1
TO J9-7
TO J9-5
TO J9-6
J3-8
HV MULT
ASSY +
(ANODE)
J3-7
J3-5
J3-6
E9
HV MULT
ASSY(CATHODE)
E10
FROM
PAGE 2
C
L
S
TANK LID
BOARD
RESONANT BOARD
HV CATHODE
BOARD
J2
CATHODE
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
S. BLAKE
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L.FOSKIN
DATE
18 MAY 2000
18 MAY 2000
18 MAY 2000
KV CONTROL &
FEEDBACK
MD-0759 REV C
SHEET 3 OF 4
NOTE
REFERENCE
REMARKS
1
2
3
kV REFERENCE OUTPUT, GENERATED BY THE CPU. SCALING IS 1 VOLT OUT = 15 kV OF GENERATOR OUTPUT.
kV FEEDBACK TO THE CPU. SCALING IS 1V = 20 KV OF GENERATOR OUTPUT.
HV ON SIGNAL. THIS IS HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) WHEN HIGH VOLTAGE IS ON, LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) WHEN HIGH VOLTAGE IS OFF.
THE VOLTAGE AT TP17 AND TP19 SHOULD BE A 50% DUTY CYCLE SQUARE WAVE, RANGING IN FREQUENCY FROM APPROXIMATELY 80 kHz TO APPROXIMATELY 250 kHz, DEPENDING ON GENERATOR
OUTPUT POWER. SEE FIGURE 1.
12 VDC
0 VDC
FIGURE 1
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
S. BLAKE
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L.FOSKIN
DATE
18 MAY 2000
18 MAY 2000
18 MAY 2000
KV CONTROL &
FEEDBACK
MD-0759 REV C
SHEET 4 OF 4
+5V
J2-8
RN7C
JW1
5.5 A 6.5 A
1
3
2
J2-7
FIL
BUFFER &
CURRENT LIMIT
CIRCUIT
J2-9
DS14
DS13
ERROR
AMPLIFIER &
DRIVER CIRCUIT
+12V
RED
TP2
TO 2.1 V
CURRENT
SINK
U24
OPTO-COUPLER
ON = NO FILAMENT
FAULT
BUFFER
5
RN7E
+5V
FILAMENT CURRENT
FEEDBACK SIGNAL
(SM) TO PAGE 2
J10-23
J1-23
RN4D
R137
J10-5
J1-5
J10-24
J1-24
RN2G
R136
OPTO-COUPLER
ON = NO HV / MA
FAULT
TP3
HV / MA FAULT
FROM MD-0761,
PAGE 2
J2-6
JW1
J2-2
J3-8
J3-10
J2-10
J3-7
TP2
R24
J10-9
J1-9
J3-6
J10-28
J1-28
J3-5
RN11E
LARGE
U27
SMALL
TO 2.1 V
CURRENT
SINK
BUFFER AND
DRIVER
DATA
LATCH
RN6E
+5V
U24
J2-6
U19, U16
J10-17
J1-17
J10-36
J1-36
OPTO-COUPLER
ON = LARGE FOCUS
SELECTED
LG/SM REQUEST
DETECTOR CKT
RN1A
(U11C, Q2, ETC)
5
1
JW1
J3-11
BUFFER
5
RN2E
J1-8
J2-4
J2-3
J2-2
J10-27
J1-27
BUFFER &
CURRENT LIMIT
CIRCUIT
J2-9
ERROR
AMPLIFIER &
DRIVER CIRCUIT
TP1
U10
DATA BUS
D0..D7
J2-10
+12V
J10-8
J5-1
RN1B
5.5 A 6.5 A
1
3
2
J2-5
U1
OPTO-COUPLER
ON = SMALL FOCUS
SELECTED
J8
INDICO 100 GENERATORS WITH STANDARD SINGLE FILAMENT BOARD (TYPICALLY USED IN RAD
ONLY GENERATORS) USE THE FILAMENT BOARD CONFIGURATION SHOWN BELOW
JW5
1
J5-2
INDICO 100 GENERATORS WITH OPTIONAL TWO FILAMENT BOARDS (TYPICALLY USED IN R&F
GENERATORS) USE THE FILAMENT BOARD CONFIGURATION SHOWN ABOVE
+5V
DS25
J2-1
T1
RMS
CONVERTER
CIRCUIT
U14B
DS24
C22
BUFFER /
AMPLIFIER &
FILAMENT
CURRENT
COMPARATOR
J2-2
R11
6
D/A
CONVERTER
TP1
FILAMENT CURRENT
FEEDBACK SIGNAL
(LG) TO PAGE 2
R17
U22
ERROR
AMPLIFIER &
DRIVER CIRCUIT
J2-10
TP1
J5-3
J3-9
TP21
U14D
J4
BUFFER &
CURRENT LIMIT
CIRCUIT
J2-9
R7
14
5.5 A 6.5 A
1
3
2
J2-5
J3-2
R5
R10
Q14
J5-4
RN4C
U8
BUFFER
J2-3
T1
RMS
CONVERTER
CIRCUIT
J3-10
Q15
+12V
RED
C22
BUFFER /
AMPLIFIER &
FILAMENT
CURRENT
COMPARATOR
J2-4
DS12
U24
12 +
J1-4
HV
TO 2.1 V
CURRENT
SINK
D/A
CONVERTER
TP1
GRN
13 -
J10-4
J2-10
FILAMENT FAULT
TO MD-0761, PAGE 2
U7
DS11
U18
RN2H
GRN
RN4A
R75
J2-1
C22
T1
BUFFER /
AMPLIFIER &
FILAMENT
CURRENT
COMPARATOR
RMS
CONVERTER
CIRCUIT
TP2
J2-11
Q3
J5-3
J5-4
+12V
K1
K1
J5-1
J5-2
CONTROL BOARD
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
S. BLAKE
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
DATE
12 MAY 2000
12 MAY 2000
FILAMENT DRIVE
& MA CONTROL
15 MAY 2000
MD-0760 REV E
SHEET 1 OF 4
LARGE
J5-1
J4-1
J5-2
J4-2
FROM J2-4
FILAMENT CURRENT
FEEDBACK SIGNAL
(LG) FROM PAGE 1
FROM J2-2
FROM J2-3
J3-4
J2-3
J3-3
J2-11
SM FILAMENT FEEDBACK
CONTINUED ON PAGE 3
J2 **
CATHODE
C
S
L
FROM PAGE 1
FILAMENT CURRENT
FEEDBACK SIGNAL
(SM) FROM PAGE 1
FROM J2-1
J3-2
J1-13
J3-1
J1-32
LG FILAMENT FEEDBACK
CONTINUED ON PAGE 3
8
J4-4
6-
R4
J1-11
U30B
R3
J1-30
R15
J2-1
R14
J2-9
5+
TP6 TP7
+
U9
HIGH MA FAULT TO
GENERATOR READY
DETECTOR CIRCUIT
ON CONTROL BOARD,
SEE MD-0761, PAGE 2
+12V
TP2 TP3
J3-1
RN6C, RN6D
J3-2
6-
E18
10
FLUORO MA FEEDBACK
CONTINUED ON PAGE 3
U33E
ANODE I
D65
D95
R38
U6B
D72
HIGH ANODE
CURRENT LATCH
& LOGIC INVERTER
(U32C, U33C)
5+
RN6A, RN6B
J9-2
ANODE OVERVOLTAGE
SIGNAL FROM MD-0759, PG 1
R19
R8
J9-1
R212
R179
R9
R7
R34
RAD MA FEEDBACK
CONTINUED ON PAGE 3
11
HV ANODE
BOARD
R36
R33, R32
R164
R213
H.T.TANK
2
J1
ANODE
R165
R216
FILAMENT SUPPLY
BOARD
R5
R163
CATHODE
H.T. BOARD
R6
J5-4
TP4 TP5
R16
J4-3
R17
SMALL
J5-3
mA
TEST
JACK
RESET COMMAND
FROM MD-0761, PG 2
+
E17
R177
+12V
CATHODE OVERVOLTAGE
SIGNAL FROM MD-0759, PG 1
R39
RN6G, RN6H
J9-4
2-
R18
J3-4
J3-3
RN6F, RN6E
U6A
D96
HIGH CATHODE
CURRENT LATCH
& LOGIC INVERTER
(U32B, U33B)
CATHODE
D64
S
J2
CATHODE
R40
J9-3
3+
D71
H.T.TANK
HV CATHODE
BOARD
TANK LID
BOARD
DRAWN
CONTROL BOARD
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
S. BLAKE
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
DATE
12 MAY 2000
12 MAY 2000
FILAMENT DRIVE
& MA CONTROL
15 MAY 2000
MD-0760 REV E
SHEET 2 OF 4
JW1
TP25 TP24
R57
U1A
RN8D
6.5 A
5.5 A
+35V
-12V
RN9D
65
J3-3
R63
U30B
RN8C
RN9C
D6
R62
J3-11
R61
SM FILAMENT FEEDBACK
FROM ON PAGE 2
SET MAX
CURRENT
11
RN3G
J2-8
RN2A
J2-7
RN2B
6-
5+
R64
RN1A
J2-5
RN1B
Q12
U4B
RN3F
J2-6
Q6
TP3
U3
RN4H
U1B
TP23 TP22
R67
RN5G
PWM
REGULATOR
RN8B
J10-13
R59
U30A
RN8A
RN9A
RN3H
23
Q13
Q7
R60
J10-32
LG FILAMENT FEEDBACK
FROM ON PAGE 2
RN9B
J2-9
3
U37
11
+12V
RN5D
A/D
CONVERTER
R38
R39
RN2D
910 +
J10-11
12 +
R34
J5-3
J8
14
U15D
R23
RN1C
J5-4
J4
13
U15C
RN2C
K1
J2-11
R29
J5-1
K1
RN1D
J10-30
J5-2
TP4
TP2
TP10
TP7
RAD MA FEEDBACK
FROM ON PAGE 2
-35V
10
TP1
J2-10
C22
12
J2-4
RN2C
J2-3
RN2D
U4A
1.7 V
Ref
U2A
-
TP11 TP14
R45
R50
J2-2
RN1C
J2-1
RN1D
D12, 13
D27, 28
U7
Q1
+
T1
RMS
CONVERTER
RN4C
-
3+
J3-1
U2B
U23A
RN5D
R79
R21
R87
2-
R88
FLUORO MA FEEDBACK
FROM ON PAGE 2
RN5C
RN4D
J3-9
DATA BUS
D0..D7
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
S. BLAKE
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
DATE
12 MAY 2000
12 MAY 2000
FILAMENT DRIVE
& MA CONTROL
15 MAY 2000
MD-0760 REV E
SHEET 3 OF 4
NOTE
REFERENCE
REMARKS
1
2
3
4
5
6
FILAMENT REFERENCE OUTPUTS, GENERATED BY THE CPU. SCALING IS 1 VOLT OUT = 1 AMP OF FILAMENT CURRENT.
HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) = LARGE FOCUS SELECTED, LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = SMALL FOCUS SELECTED. THIS SIGNAL IS USED IN SINGLE FILAMENT SUPPLY GENERATORS ONLY.
HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = FILAMENT FAULT (FILAMENT CURRENT < 2 A). LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = NO FILAMENT FAULT.
HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = LARGE FOCUS SELECTED, LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) SMALL FOCUS SELECTED.
THESE TEST POINTS ALLOW MEASUREMENT OF A VOLTAGE PROPORTIONAL TO ANODE CURRENT. THE SCALING IS 0.4 VDC = 100 mA. SHORT EXPOSURE TIMES MUST BE CONSIDERED AND APPROPRIATE
MEASUREMENT TECHNIQUES MUST BE USED.
8
9
10
11
PRIMARY FILAMENT CURRENT AT THESE POINTS MAY BE CONFIRMED USING A CURRENT PROBE ON ONE OF THE OUTPUT LEADS ON THE SMALL OR LARGE PAIR OF OUTPUTS.
THE VOLTAGE AT THESE TEST POINTS WILL BE APPROXIMATELY 1 VDC = 1 AMP OF FILAMENT CURRENT.
0V
FIGURE 1
+12 V
HIGH FILAMENT
DEMAND
0V
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
S. BLAKE
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
DATE
12 MAY 2000
12 MAY 2000
FILAMENT DRIVE
& MA CONTROL
15 MAY 2000
MD-0760 REV E
SHEET 4 OF 4
+12V
TUBE 1
SHIFT
J3-3
MAIN
R1
J3-9
J1-1
K2
+12V
J1-20
C3
R121
CONTINUED
ON PAGE 2
RN4E
R138
J6-10
Q18
J5-10
D7
R29
J4-9
J4-9
J3-8
J2-8
R30
Q3
COMM
K4
+12V
TUBE 2
K1
STATOR FAULT TO GENERATOR
READY DETECTOR CIRCUIT ON
CONTROL BOARD, SEE MD-0761
J3-7
SHIFT
J3-5
MAIN
J3-1
COMM
K3
TP1
J5-8
JUMPER POSITION:
INDICO 100 GENERATORS
JUMPER 1.5S FOR 1.5 SEC
BOOST, NO JUMPERS FOR
2.5 SEC BOOST. REFER TO
CH. 2 OF SERVICE MANUAL.
DO NOT USE JUMPER
POSITION .15S
JW1
TP3
R36
BOOST AND
RUN LOGIC
CIRCUIT
(U1, U10, U18
Q2, Q12, ETC.)
.15S
1.5S
J4-11
J3-7
TP4
J8-4
J1-4
R35
J4-12
J3-6
F2
Q1
U1
ZERO
CROSS
CIRCUIT
J2-6
+12V
D1
K1
J4-6
J4-6
J3-10
+12V
J2-10
D15
D2
J2-9
U2
TP2
J4-12
Q15
D17
+12V
ZERO
CROSS
CIRCUIT
+12V
R46
ENABLE COMMAND
FROM MD-0761,
PAGE 2
D18
R45
Q2
J2-7
F1
TP3
J4-11
F3
R5
J6-8
R1
PREP COMMAND
FROM MD-0761,
PAGE 2
K4
AUXILIARY BOARD
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED________
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
HTW
DATE
10 MAR 2000
________
LOW SPEED
STARTER
10 MAR 2000
MD-0764 REV E
SHEET 1 OF 2
RN7A
+5V
DS20
GRN
U24
ROTOR
DS21
RED
TO 2.1 V
CURRENT
SINK
OPTO-COUPLER
ON = NO FAULT
J10-1
BUFFER
5
J1-1
FROM
PAGE 1
U5
4
J10-20
J1-20
DATA BUS
D0..D7
NOTE
REFERENCE
CONTROL BOARD
REMARKS
1
2
3
4
5
6
HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 6-11 VDC) = NO STATOR FAULT, LOW (<APPROXIMATELY 2 VDC) = STATOR FAULT (LOW OR NO STATOR CURRENT).
LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = NO STATOR FAULT, HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = STATOR FAULT (LOW OR NO STATOR CURRENT).
HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 10 VDC) = PREP REQUESTED, LOW (APPROXIMATELY 1 VDC) = PREP NOT REQUESTED.
LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = BOOST REQUESTED, HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = BOOST NOT REQUESTED (BOOST REQUESTED FOR APPROXIMATELY 1.5 SEC AFTER PREP INITIATED).
LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = RUN REQUESTED, HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = RUN NOT REQUESTED (RUN REQUESTED AFTER BOOST COMPLETE, AND FOR DURATION THAT PREP IS PRESSED).
HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = LOW SPEED STARTER ENABLED, LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = STARTER DISABLED (SEE # 7).
THIS POINT MUST BE HIGH (AS PER # 6) TO ENABLE THE LOW SPEED STARTER. THIS REQUIRES THE ENABLE COMMAND TO BE PRESENT (HIGH), AND THE TUBE 1 /TUBE 2 MISMATCH &THERMOSTAT
OPEN SIGNAL TO BE HIGH. IF THE 12 VDC / SOFT START FAULT SIGNAL IS LOW (INDICATING A FAULT), J1-4 WILL NOT BE PULLED LOW DUE TO THE DIODE SHOWN CONNECTED TO THIS PIN ON PAGE 1.
LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) ENERGIZES K1 ON THE LOW SPEED STARTER BOARD, ENABLING THE STARTER. HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) DE-ENERGIZES K1 ON THE LOW SPEED STARTER BOARD.
AS PER # 6 AND 7, NO ENABLE COMMAND, OR PRESENCE OF A TUBE 1 / TUBE 2 MISMATCH & THERMOSTAT OPEN FAULT, OR A 12 VDC / SOFT START FAULT WILL INHIBIT LOW SPEED STARTER OPERATION.
DS20 LIT INDICATES NORMAL STATOR CURRENTS. DS 21 LIT INDICATES STATOR FAULT, OR LOW SPEED STARTER IS IN STANDBY MODE.
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED________
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
HTW
DATE
10 MAR 2000
________
LOW SPEED
STARTER
10 MAR 2000
MD-0764 REV E
SHEET 2 OF 2
SW2 *
LS
TO 2.1 V
CURRENT
SINK
DATA
LATCH
R40
BUFFER AND
DRIVER
J10-2
J1-2
J10-21
J1-21
J4-6
J1-6
J4-8
J1-8
PREP COMMAND
FROM MD-0761
R96
CONTACTOR
CLOSED
SIGNAL FROM
MD-0788, PAGE 3
J1-2
J4-4
J1-4
RN7A
IGBT
SWITCH
(Q3)
6
1
+12V
TUBE 1
DUAL SPEED
STARTER CPU,
BUFFERS,
DRIVERS
PREP
INITIATED
K1-A
K5
R42
J4-14
J1-14
J4-16
J1-16
K6
R32
K3
HIGH SPEED
PHASE SHIFT
CAPACITOR
J10-1
1
COMM
TUBE 2
K4
SHIFT
TB3-2
MAIN
TB3-1
COMM
R1
TB3-3
J1-1
+12V
J1-20
R121
U5
J10-20
TB2-1
K1-B
K2-B
MAIN
+12V
K5
C22
TUBE 2
SELECT
+12V
BUFFER
TB2-2
D47
K6
OPTO-COUPLER
ON = NO FAULT
SHIFT
Q5
K2
TUBE 1/TUBE 2
SELECT SIGNAL
FROM MD-0788,
PAGE 3
TB2-3
K2-A
K1
5
U14
+5V
IGBT
SWITCH
(Q1)
U13
U24
IGBT
SWITCH
(Q4)
R41
J4-2
TO 2.1 V
CURRENT
SINK
IGBT
SWITCH
(Q2)
+12V
R94
RED
DRIVER
CIRCUIT AND
FAULT
CURRENT
LATCH
(U1-U10,
T1-T4, ETC).
HIGH SPEED
SELECT
Q7
GRN
K4
D47
ROTOR
U12
+12V
DS21
U17, U18
U19, U22, U24
U19, U16
DS20
R31
U27
R24
HS
DS1
INVERTER
FAULT
DS7
DS8
INVERTER
FAULT
DETECTOR
+5V
RN7G
SW1 *
RN4E
K3
J4-10
J1-10
7
LOW SPEED
PHASE SHIFT
CAPACITOR
R138
Q18
STATOR FAULT TO
GENERATOR READY
DETECTOR CIRCUIT
ON CONTROL BOARD,
SEE MD-0761
DATA BUS
D0..D7
CONTROL BOARD
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
STEVE BLAKE
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L.FOSKIN
DATE
30 MAR 2000
30 MAR 2000
30 MAR 2000
DUAL SPEED
STARTER
MD-0765 REV C
SHEET 1 OF 2
NOTE
REFERENCE
REMARKS
DS8 LIT INDICATES HIGH SPEED SELECTED, DS7 LIT INDICATES LOW SPEED SELECTED.
HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) = HIGH SPEED SELECTED, LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = LOW SPEED SELECTED.
LOW (APPROXIMATELY 7 VDC) = CONTACTOR CLOSED AND PREP REQUESTED. THIS INITIATES THE BOOST CYCLE. HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = BOOST NOT REQUESTED (PREP COMMAND NOT
RECEIVED, OR CONTACTOR IS NOT CLOSED).
LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = TUBE 2 SELECTED, HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = TUBE 2 DESELECTED. THIS CONDITION DEFAULTS TO TUBE 1.
DS1 LIT INDICATES AN INVERTER CURRENT FAULT. POSSIBLE CAUSES INCLUDE INCORRECT DIP SWITCH SETTINGS FOR THE TUBE IN USE (SEE ** ON PAGE 1), INCORRECT STATOR IMPEDANCE, OR
DEFECTIVE STATOR CABLE.
6
7
8
K4 OPEN CIRCUITS THE STATOR COMMON LEAD AT ALL TIMES THAT THE DUAL SPEED STARTER IS IN STANDBY MODE.
LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = NO STATOR FAULT, HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = STATOR FAULT (LOW OR NO STATOR CURRENT).
DS20 LIT INDICATES NORMAL STATOR CURRENTS. DS21 LIT INDICATES STATOR FAULT, OR DUAL SPEED STARTER IS IN STANDBY MODE.
1
2
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
STEVE BLAKE
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L.FOSKIN
DATE
30 MAR 2000
30 MAR 2000
30 MAR 2000
DUAL SPEED
STARTER
MD-0765 REV C
SHEET 2 OF 2
NOTE
REFERENCE
K1
REFER TO MD-0759
PAGE 2
REMARKS
R44
+12V
+12V
D36
J2-1
1
FROM J1-5 (AUXILIARY
BOARD), SEE MD-0788,
PAGE 3
RAD
MODE
J2-2
R79
J2-1
K1
J2-2
Q5
R47
RESONANT BOARD
+12V
D38
J10-1
D44
J10-2
K1
J3-2
D1
R69
Q4
R66
J3-1
AUXILIARY BOARD
ENERGIZING K1
DISABLES DRIVE
TO INVERTER
BOARD No. 3
J12-1
J1-1
J12-2
J1-2
J12-3
J1-3
K1
J4-1
J12-4
CONTROL BOARD
J1-1
J4-2
J1-2
J4-3
J1-3
J4-4
J1-4
J1-4
INVERTER BOARD
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED________
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
HTW
DATE
21 MAR 2000
________
21 MAR 2000
MD-0786 REV B
SHEET 1 OF 1
+12V
D42
R41
JW4
JUMPER POSITION:
R&F GENERATORS (WITH THERMAL SWITCH)
JUMPER JW4 PINS 1-2 (ON)
RAD GENERATORS (NO THERMAL SWITCH)
JUMPER JW4 PINS 2-3 (OFF)
ON OFF
3
1
2
R39
+12V
THERMAL
CUTOFF
OPEN
R40
J2-4
R43
Q10
J2-3
+12V
D26
TUBE 1 / TUBE 2
TELLBACK LOGIC
CIRCUIT
(U9, U10, R84)
R7
Q8
+5V
INVERTER BOARD
U8
TUBE 1 / TUBE 2
RELAY CONTACTS
(SHOWN IN TUBE
1 POSITION)
J5-1
J11-1
J4-20
J4-20
J5-2
J11-2
J4-19
J4-19
R28
TUBE 2
SELECTED
DS5
DS6
TUBE
2
TUBE
1
U35
+12V
D39
R38
+5V
RN7H
U7
R8
+12V
RN11H
R6
THERMAL SWITCH ON
INVERTER HEATSINK
(R&F UNITS ONLY)
DECODER/
DEMULTIPLEXER
J1-2
J8-2
J2-5
J3-5
J1-1
J8-1
J2-13
J3-13
U3
OPTO COUPLER
ON = TUBE 2 SELECTED
H.T. TANK
POWER INPUT
BOARD
AUXILIARY BOARD
CONTROL BOARD
REFER TO MD-0763 (ROOM INTERFACE) FOR INTERLOCKS ACCESSED VIA THE ROOM INTERFACE BOARD
TUBE 1
STATOR
TERMINAL
BLOCK
J5-1
NOTE
REFERENCE
REMARKS
1
2
LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = TUBE 2 SELECTED, HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 10 VDC) = TUBE 1 SELECTED.
LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = TUBE 2 SELECTED, HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = TUBE 1 SELECTED.
DS6 LIT INDICATES TUBE 1 SELECTED. DS5 LIT INDICATES TUBE 2 SELECTED. NEITHER LED LIT INDICATES A MISMATCH BETWEEN THE
TUBE THAT HAS BEEN REQUESTED, AND THE TUBE THAT HAS ACTUALLY BEEN SELECTED (SEE # 5).
4
5
LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = INVERTER THERMAL SWITCH CLOSED (OR JUMPERED VIA JW4), HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) =
INVERTER THERMAL SWITCH OPEN, OR JW4 JUMPER OMITTED ON RAD GENERATORS.
THERMAL
SWITCH
TUBE 1 THERMOSTAT TO T1
ON MD-0763, PAGE 1
J5-2
TUBE 2
STATOR
TERMINAL
BLOCK
J5-3
TUBE 2 THERMOSTAT TO T2
ON MD-0763, PAGE 1
THERMAL
SWITCH
J5-4
THE TUBE 1 / TUBE 2 TELLBACK LOGIC CIRCUIT ENSURES THAT THE TUBE ACTUALLY SELECTED MATCHES THE TUBE THAT WAS
REQUESTED. FOR EXAMPLE, IF TUBE 2 WAS REQUESTED BY THE CONSOLE BUT TUBE 1 WAS ACTUALLY SELECTED BY THE H.T. TANK,
THE LOGIC CIRCUIT WILL INDICATE A FAULT CONDITION.
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
S. BLAKE
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
DATE
18 MAY 2000
18 MAY 2000
INTERLOCKS &
TUBE 1 / TUBE 2
TELLBACK
18 MAY 2000
MD-0787 REV C
SHEET 1 OF 1
+24V
+12V
J10-13
J10-19
J10-16
J10-11
-24V
U25, U23
RN14H
D0
RN14G
D1
RN14F
D2
RN14E
D3
RN14D
D4
RN14C
D5
RN14B
D6
RN14A
D7
-12V
U33
J6-1
J12-1
11
CH 4 SELECT
J10-2
J6-2
J12-2
12
CH 3 SELECT
J10-3
J6-3
J12-3
13
CH 2 SELECT
J10-4
J6-4
J12-4
14
CH 1 SELECT
J10-5
15
L FIELD SELECT
J10-7
BUFFER &
DATA LATCH
DRIVER
J6-5
J12-5
J6-6
J12-6
16
M FIELD SELECT
J10-8
J6-7
J12-7
17
R FIELD SELECT
J10-9
J6-8
J12-8
18
START
J10-6
CONTINUED
ON PAGES
3 TO 5
R88
+5V
R87
+5V
TP10
9
10
CPU
R99
1
U28
R100
J7-19
J11-19
Q6
U45C
PTSTOP
J10-1
PTRAMP
J10-15
PTREF
J10-10
R85
TP12
R42
R44
TP9
R86
Q5
TP11
J11-4
U37
9
J7-4
10
J11-1
TP12
RN5B
U23C
+12V
TP4
U18
D/A
CONVERTER
10 +
J10-17
R89
U46
R30
R117
Q7
+12V
R116
A/D
CONVERTER
J7-1
-12V
U14C
J14-6
J14-7
J14-14
J14-3
J14-1
J14-2
J14-4
J14-12
J14-13
J14-15
J14-8
J14-9
J14-10
J14-11
DATA BUS
DO..D7
TO A EC DETECTOR CIRCUIT
CONTINUED ON PAGE 2
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
__________
DATE
02 JUN 2000
__________
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
02 JUN 2000
AEC
MD-0757 REV C
SHEET 1 OF 5
J2-3
J2-4
J2-1
J2-6
J2-7
J2-14
J2-2
J2-12
J2-13
J2-15
J2-8
J2-9
J2-10
J2-11
OPTO-COUPLER
"ON" = AEC START
S1
+8V
+8 VDC
REGULATOR
CIRCUIT
ANALOG
SWITCH
J1-1
-8V
J1-2
PHOTO DIODE
DETECTORS
J1-3
-8 VDC
REGULATOR
CIRCUIT
INTEGRATOR
CIRCUIT
AMPLIFIER
CIRCUIT
COMPARATOR
& DRIVER
CIRCUIT
J1-4
OPTIONAL A EC
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
__________
DATE
02 JUN 2000
__________
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
02 JUN 2000
AEC
MD-0757 REV C
SHEET 2 OF 5
J5-4
J7-5
R SELECT
U2D
R30
D10
U2B
R29
D11
D14
R41
R28
D15
L SELECT
J7-7
J5-7
J7-8
J5-8
J7-9
J5-9
+12V
+12V
Q1
R45
D19
R22
D18
DS5
R82
+12V
R57
J12-1
U11B
L SELECT
R11
J3-4
R20
J7-12
J5-12
-12V
2 TP3
J5-10
J7-1
J5-1
J13-1
R19
SAMPLE
& HOLD
U12
U10A
R23
R60
L SELECT
U10B
U9B
CATH (M)
CATH (R)
AEC CH 4
J4-2
R SELECT
ANODE
J4-3
J4-4
M SELECT
CATH (L)
J4-5
R6
R5
-
R84
U13
U1B
R85
J4-6
R56
R70
J14-1
J14-2
J14-3
J14-4
J14-5
AEC BOARD
CATH (R)
J4 (shell)
R4
R50
CATH (L)
J4-1
TP5
ANODE
J13-3
J13-4
GROUND
J13-2
J13-5
D31
CATH (M)
GROUND
U6C
R88
D33
R17
C37
R14
J5-15
U1A
R51
TP1 3
J7-10
TP4
R18
JW3
J5-11
J7-15
J3-6
JW4
J7-11
R33
J5-18
TP2
CATH (L)
CATH (R)
J3 (shell)
R3
J7-18
+12V
R81
J5-17
D20
R80
J7-17
ANODE
J3-3
J3-5
R21
J5-14
AEC CH 3
J3-1
J3-2
J5-13
J7-14
CATH (M)
CATH (R)
U6B
M SELECT
U2E
CATH (L)
J12-4
R SELECT
U2F
ANODE
J12-3
R26
J7-13
CATH (M)
GROUND
GROUND
J12-2
J12-5
D30
D24
R58
L SELECT
J2-6
R2
R62
R64
FROM
PAGE 1
M SELECT
CATH (L)
CATH (R)
J2 (shell)
Q2
R SELECT
J2-4
J2-5
R61
R54
ANODE
J2-3
R77
R76
R69
R87
AEC CH 2
J2-1
M SELECT
+12V
Q3
PT STOP
CATH (M)
CATH (R)
J2-2
R SELECT
R55
PT REF
CATH (L)
U6A
J5-6
R63
PT RAMP
ANODE
J11-3
JW2
J7-6
D16
CATH (M)
GROUND
GROUND
J11-2
J11-4
R59
R71
J11-5
R86
J1-6
J11-1
U11A
U2C
R72
CATH (R)
J1 (shell)
R31
D12
R74
R75
R43
D13
CATH (L)
J1-5
U2A
START
J1-4
M SELECT
D6
J5-5
ANODE
J1-3
JW1
J7-4
AEC CH 1
J1-1
J1-2
R1
J5-3
DS4
R42
CHAMBER 1 SELECT
J7-3
L SELECT
R32
CHAMBER 2 SELECT
J5-2
DS3
R38
R37
CHAMBER 3 SELECT
J7-2
+12V
R40
DS2
DS1
CHAMBER 4 SELECT
+12V
R73
+12V
R39
+12V
CATH (M)
GROUND
GROUND
ANODE
CATH (L)
CATH (M)
CATH (R)
U6D
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
__________
DATE
02 JUN 2000
__________
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
02 JUN 2000
AEC
MD-0757 REV C
SHEET 3 OF 5
+500V
DS5
CHAMBER 2 SELECT
CHAMBER 1 SELECT
START
J10-3
J10-4
J10-5
J10-6
J5-2
DS3
CH 4
D5
U3B
U3F
CONVERTER
CIRCUIT
12 VDC TO 45 VDC
AND 300 / 500 VDC
+12V +24V
RN3C
RN3A
CH 1
U3D
J5-6
RN3D
CH 2
D4
D11
Q1
SET
VALUE
U3A
+12V +24V
11
J5-7
J10-8
J5-8
J10-9
J5-9
D30
D65
Q2
Q3
J12-4
START
J12-3
MIDDLE
J12-2
J12-6
Q4
LEFT
MIDDLE
R67
S1C
J10-19
TP17
J5-19
TP20
TP23
J10-13
J10-17
TP5
+12V
TP6
TP7
CH 2
S4
J5-17
U4A
U4B
TP4
J10-16
S2A
R1
STRT
J2-11
J12-9
R2
R32
C4
J5-11
-12V
CH 1
TP21
J5-16
S3A
-24V
S2C
R3
CH 4
R53
TP3 3
CH 2
TP19
S1B
PT REF
PT STOP
J10-15
J10-10
J10-1
J5-15
R54
J13-6
RN4C
J5-10
CH 3
R13
CH 4
S3D
U2A
R56
D22
STRT
2
SAMPLE
& HOLD
U6
J3-12
J3-7
J4-2
J14-4
START
J14-3
MIDDLE
J14-2
J14-6
13
J4-1
J4-3
+45V
TP14
R35
J4-8
J4-10
L/R
J4-9
R/L
J4-11
J14-5
J14-9
CH 4
S1A
R FIELD SEL
SIGNAL
GROUND
AEC CH 2
+/-300 V
+/-300/+500 V
+45 V
START
M FIELD SEL
L FIELD SEL
R FIELD SEL
SIGNAL
GROUND
AEC CH 3
+/-300 V
+/-300/+500 V
+45 V
START
M FIELD SEL
L FIELD SEL
R FIELD SEL
SIGNAL
GROUND
J4-12
J4-7
AEC CH 4
+/-300 V
+/-300/+500 V
+45 V
START
M FIELD SEL
L FIELD SEL
R FIELD SEL
SIGNAL
GROUND
R36
AEC BOARD
J3-11
J14-1
RN4B
J3-9
J13-9
H.V.
JW1
1
2
3
U1A
R14
7
J3-8
J3-10
R/L
J13-5
R57
LEFT
D27
J3-1
L/R
+/-300V
JW2
1
2
3
S3C
J5-1
L FIELD SEL
R58
RIGHT
R12
START
M FIELD SEL
TP2 10
S3B
PT RAMP
J13-2
CH 3
U2B
R11
J13-3
MIDDLE
13
S2D
R4
J13-4
START
TP13
J2-7
J3-3
+45V
JW3
1
2
3
CH 3
J2-12
J3-2
J13-1
H.V.
LEFT
S2B
J2-10
R/L
+/-300V
JW4
1
2
3
CH 1
J5-13
C11
J10-11
+24V
+/-300/+500 V
+45 V
R68
RIGHT
TP18
J2-8
J2-9
CH 2
FROM
PAGE 1
J2-1
L/R
J12-5
13
RIGHT
J1-7
J2-3
+45V
TP12
J1-12
J2-2
J12-1
H.V.
JW5
1
2
3
D40
J1-11
+/-300V
JW6
1
2
3
+12V +24V
J1-9
R/L
J11-9
LEFT
J10-7
L/R
J11-5
R89
J1-8
J1-10
AEC CH 1
+/-300 V
R90
RIGHT
START
+12V +24V
J11-6
CH 1
S1D
STRT
J11-2
13
+45V
INCLUDES U7 AND T1
J11-3
MIDDLE
TP11
D16
RN3B
U3E
J11-4
START
JW7
1
2
3
TP9
CH 3
D12
J5-5
H.V.
RN4A
U3C
J5-4
J1-1
J1-3
+45V
LEFT
D6
J5-3
+/-300V
TP24
DS4
J11-1
H.V.
JW8
1
2
3
+12V
TP22
J1-2
+/-300V
RIGHT
TP10
12
RN6E
RN6D
RN6A
DS2
+12V
R66
CHAMBER 3 SELECT
J10-2
DS1
+12V
R79
CHAMBER 4 SELECT
+12V
RN6C
+12V
RN6B
+12V
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
__________
DATE
02 JUN 2000
__________
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
02 JUN 2000
AEC
MD-0757 REV C
SHEET 4 OF 5
NOTE
REFERENCE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
REMARKS
HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) = NO PTSTOP (PHOTOTIMER STOP) SIGNAL RECEIVED FROM AEC BOARD. LOW (APPOXIMATELY 0 VDC) = PTSTOP SIGNAL RECEIVED FROM AEC BOARD.
PTRAMP IS THE AEC RAMP FROM THE AEC BOARD. THE RAMP SLOPE AND MAGNITUDE WILL DEPEND ON THE AEC TECHNIQUE IN USE. THE MAXIMUM POSSIBLE RAMP MAGNITUDE IS 5 TO 10 VDC,
DEPENDING ON MODEL.
PTREF (THE AEC REFERENCE VOLTAGE FROM THE CONSOLE) WILL VARY FROM 0 TO 10 VDC, DEPENDING ON TECHNIQUE.
HIGH (> 10 VDC) = AEC CHANNEL DESELECTED, LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = AEC CHANNEL SELECTED.
HIGH (> 10 VDC) = L, M, R, FIELD DESELECTED, LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = L, M, R, FIELD SELECTED.
HIGH (> 10 VDC) = NO AEC STOP REQUEST (INSUFFICIENT RAMP TO TERMINATE AEC EXPOSURE), LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = AEC STOP REQUESTED (AEC EXPOSURE TERMINATED).
HIGH (> 10 VDC) = AEC START NOT REQUESTED, LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = AEC START REQUESTED.
THE VOLTAGE AND MAGNITUDE OF THE RAMP AT THIS POINT SHOULD BE APPROXIMATELY THE SAME AS AT TP17 ON THIS BOARD (NOTE REFERENCE 2) .
THIS WILL BE A NEGATIVE DC VOLTAGE OR RAMP, DEPENDING ON AEC CHAMBER OUTPUT. THE MAGNITUDE OF THE DC VOLTAGE OR RAMP IS DEPENDENT ON THE AEC TECHNIQUE IN USE.
THIS WILL BE A POSITIVE DC VOLTAGE OR RAMP, DEPENDING ON AEC CHAMBER OUTPUT. THE MAGNITUDE OF THE DC VOLTAGE OR RAMP IS DEPENDENT ON THE AEC TECHNIQUE IN USE.
R79 ADJUSTS THE +45V, +300V, AND +500V OUTPUTS FROM THE DC TO DC CONVERTER CIRCUIT. REFER TO CHAPTER 3D FOR DETAILS.
THE VOLTAGE AT TP22 SHOULD BE APPROXIMATELY AS SHOWN IN FIGURE 1 (BELOW). THE MAXIMUM DUTY CYCLE WILL BE APPROXIMATELY 45%, DEPENDING ON THE LOAD ON THE HV SUPPLIES.
THE VOLTAGE AT THIS TEST POINT IS THE OUTPUT OF THE AEC CHAMBER. REFER TO THE AEC CHAMBER MANUFACTURERS DOCUMENTATION FOR DETAILS.
200 kHz
12 VDC
0 VDC
FIGURE 1
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
__________
DATE
02 JUN 2000
__________
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
02 JUN 2000
AEC
MD-0757 REV C
SHEET 5 OF 5
2
3
R64
J7-10
6
5
R48
R41
Set
ABS gain
U17B
**
JW24
(IN)
R118
J11-3
13 -
J7-3
12 +
U17C
JW25
(OUT)
14
R56
A/D
CONVERTER
U23D
TP8
C22
J7-5
TP9
J7-7
CONTROL SIGNALS
FROM DATA BUS
ADDRESS REGISTERS
(U24, U25)
-12V
J7-12
DIGITAL
POTENTIOMETER
U49
COMPOSITE VIDEO
INPUT
JW19 *
DATA BUS
D0..D7
R49
3
R47
U34
13 -
R28
C21
JW5 *
12 +
R26
D11
14
DRIVER
U17D
R46
R30
C20
JW20 *
TP14
**
1
J8
REFER TO CHAPTER
3E OF SERVICE MANUAL
FOR DETAILS ON
ABS INPUT CONNECTIONS
10
R50
U17A
R61
+12V
J7-4
U37
R52
D13
R45
C19
R42
R44
R51
R63
2
JW11 *
JW4 *
R54
JW23
R27
JW21 *
1
R65
R58
R62
TP13 TP15
RN5A
JW12 *
R43
R31
JW13 *
NOTE
REFERENCE
REMARKS
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
KVR
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
DATE
16 MAY 2000
ABS
(AUTOMATIC BRIGHTNESS
STABILIZATION)
16 MAY 2000
16 MAY 2000
MD-0758 REV C
SHEET 1 OF 1
DS15
DS19
TXD
RXD
R43
U20
UART
+5V
LS1
R46
+5V
U11
RS-232
TRANSMITTER /
RECEIVER
U7
RN3E
RN3F
RN3G
RN3H
J11-3
P1-3
J11-7
P1-7
J11-2
P1-2
J11-8
P1-8
RS-232
RECEIVER /
DRIVER
MICROCONTROLLER
(CPU, EPROM **,
J1-1
J2-1
J1-2
J2-2
J1-3
J2-3
J1-4
J2-4
J1-5
J2-5
J1-6
J2-6
J1-7
J2-7
J1-8
J2-8
J1-9
J2-9
J1-10
J2-10
J1-11
J2-11
J1-12
J2-12
J1-13
J2-13
J1-14
J2-14
ADDRESS DECODERS
& LOGIC CIRCUITS)
U1, U2, U3, U4
LED
DISPLAYS
DATA LATCHES
(U6-U9)
(7 SEGMENT
DISPLAYS &
STATUS LEDs)
DS1-DS23
DRIVERS
(U1-U4, U10)
U5
** U3 IS THE EPROM.
BUFFER
DATA BUS
D0..D7
J1-1
P1-1
J1-2
P1-2
J1-3
P1-3
J1-4
P1-4
J1-5
P1-5
J1-6
P1-6
J1-7
P1-7
J1-8
P1-8
J1-9
P1-9
J1-10
P1-10
FRONT PANEL
KEYBOARD
SWITCHES
KEYBOARD ASSEMBLY
LIMITED TROUBLESHOOTING CAN BE PERFORMED ON THE REMOTE FLUORO CONTROL ASSEMBLY IN THE FIELD. THE DC RAILS CAN BE CHECKED (REFER TO MD-0788),
AND THE TXD AND RXD LEDs ON THE GENERATOR CPU BOARD MAY BE OBSERVED (THESE WILL FLASH ON AND OFF TO INDICATE DATA FLOW). MEANINGFUL MEASUREMENTS
CANNOT BE MADE ON COMMUNICATIONS, DATA, AND CONTROL LINES.
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED _________
DATE
02 JUN 2000
_________
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
02 JUN 2000
REMOTE FLUORO
CONTROL
MD-0766 REV C
SHEET 1 OF 1
+24V
+15V
+5V
J13-11
J13-13
J13-17
J13-15
-15V
RN14H
D0
RN14G
D1
RN14F
D2
RN14E
D3
RN14D
D4
RN14C
D5
RN14B
D6
RN14A
D7
J6-1
J12-1
J6-2
J12-2
J6-3
J12-3
J6-4
J12-4
J6-5
J12-5
J6-6
J12-6
J6-7
J12-7
J6-8
J12-8
J6-9
J12-9
RN4A
RN4C
RN4E
RN4G
RN3A
J13-1
RN4B
RN3B
RN4D
RN3D
RN4F
RN3F
RN4H
RN3H
RN3C
J13-2
J13-3
RN3E
J13-4
J13-5
RN3G
J13-6
J13-7
J13-8
J13-10
WRITE ENABLE
J6-11
J12-11
READ ENABLE
J6-13
J12-13
J13-12
RESET
J6-20
J12-20
J13-16
J6-15
J12-15
J7-20
J11-20
R91
HV ON SIGNAL FROM
MD-0759, PAGE 1
4
5
DS40
U45B
1
2
3
U28
CPU
U45A
3
2
JW3
DATA, ADDRESS,
AND CONTROL BUS
JUMPER POSITION:
INVERTED SYNC
JUMPER PINS 1-2
NON-INVERTED SYNC
JUMPER PINS 2-3
R84
J13-18
J13-19
J13-14
J13-20
RN19D
+5V
R115
EXTERNAL SYNC
SYNC
1
J13-22
3
R97
CONTINUED
ON PAGES
2 TO 6
J7-15
J11-15
JW22
U51
LINE SYNC FROM
MD-0788, PAGE 4
JUMPER POSITION:
INTERNAL (LINE SYNC)
JUMPER PINS 1-2
EXTERNAL (DIGITAL IMAGING SYNC)
JUMPER PINS 2-3
J13-9
J13-21
J13-23
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
KVR
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
DATE
16 MAY 2000
17 MAY 2000
17 MAY 2000
DIGITAL
INTERFACE
MD-0767 REV D
SHEET 1 OF 9
+5V
+15V
+24V
J1-11
J1-13
J3-7
J1-17
J3-1
J1-15
J3-3
TP1
U7
J1-20
TP2
R2
+24V
J2-20
MUX
R3
J2-21
R11
-15V
+24V
J3-9
R1
J1-14
DS4
J1-1
U4
J1-2
EXON
U6
PFL
DS7
DS8
HCF
PREP
DS10
GEN
READY
TOMO
J1-6
J1-7
J1-8
J2-1
J2-7
J3-5
U14
J2-3
J1-4
J1-5
ADDRESS DECODER
CIRCUITS
(U1, U2, U3A, U6A)
DATA
LATCH
J2-4
DRIVER
J2-5
J3-6
J2-6
J2-22
J1-10
J3-2
+24V
U8
BUFFER
J1-9
R7
J3-8
J2-9
DS1
U13
J1-21
J3-4
+24V
OFL
+24V
+24V
U9
R5
J1-23
SW1
5
BUFFER
U12
2
STOP
EXP.
J2-2
+24V
+24V
R4
J2-23
DS2
DS3
U11
J2-10
J2-12
R9
J1-16
R8
J1-12
J1-18
J3-10
+24V
DS9
J1-3
R6
FROM
PAGE 1
DS6
F1
R17
U16
+24V
+24V
R16
U10
+24V
R15
+24V
R14
5
JW1
+24V
R12
4
5
+24V
R10
J1-19
U3B
+24V
R13
O.EXP
J2-11
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
KVR
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
DATE
16 MAY 2000
17 MAY 2000
17 MAY 2000
DIGITAL
INTERFACE
MD-0767 REV D
SHEET 2 OF 9
+24VR
+5V
+15V
+24VR
+24V
J1-11
J1-13
J1-17
D6
F1
J1-15
D5
R10
12 U10D 11
13
J1-19
D3
U17
MONOSTABLE
TIMER
J3-25
J2-1
J3-27
J2-3
J3-29
J2-5
J3-31
J2-7
J3-33
J2-9
J3-35
J2-11
Q1
J2-13
J2-17
R9
-15V
+24VR
J2-19
J2-18
D4
U14
J2-20
U16
J2-14
J1-1
J2-12
J1-2
J2-10
J1-3
J1-4
DATA
LATCH
J1-5
J1-6
J2-8
DRIVER
J2-6
+24V
J1-7
J1-8
J1-10
U13
J1-12
J2-4
+24VR
J2-2
R15
ADDRESS DECODER
CIRCUITS
(U1, U2, U9, U10C)
R13
U15
J3-34
Q2
J1-16
J1-18
J3-30
D1
DATA
LATCH
J2-23
J3-32
J3-28
DRIVER
J3-26
J3-36
FROM
PAGE 1
+24VR
+24VR
+24V
+24VR
+24VR
R14
U12
R12
J1-9
BUFFER
J1-21
R1
U3
J1-23
R2
U4
4
U11
R3
U5
4
5
4
Q3
J2-16
J3-47
J2-22
D2
J3-41
J3-39
SW1
J3-37
J3-38
BUFFER
J3-40
J3-42
U6
R4
U7
4
R5
R6
J3-44
J3-46
U8
4
+24VR
J2-15
J3-45
R16
J3-43
J2-24
J3-48
J1-22
J2-21
J1-20
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
KVR
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
DATE
16 MAY 2000
17 MAY 2000
17 MAY 2000
DIGITAL
INTERFACE
MD-0767 REV D
SHEET 3 OF 9
+24VR
+5V
+15V
+24VR
+24V
+24VR
J3-25
J2-1
J1-11
J3-27
J2-3
J1-13
J3-29
J2-5
J3-31
J2-7
J1-17
D6
F1
J1-15
D5
R10
12 U10D 11
13
J1-19
D3
U17
MONOSTABLE
TIMER
J2-9
J3-35
J2-11
J2-13
J2-17
R9
-15V
J3-33
Q1
J2-19
J2-18
D4
U14
** REFER TO MD-0761, SHEET 1, FOR THE PREP AND X-RAY INPUTS ON THE
GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD.
*** REFER TO MD-0762, SHEET 1, FOR THE POWER ON & OFF INPUTS ON THE
GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD.
J2-20
U16
J2-14
J1-1
J2-12
J1-2
J2-10
J1-3
J1-4
DATA
LATCH
J1-5
J1-6
DRIVER
+24V
J1-7
J1-8
J1-10
U13
J1-12
J4-1
J2-6
J4-2
J2-4
+24VR
J4-5
R13
U15
J3-34
Q2
J1-16
J1-18
J3-32
J3-30
D1
DATA
LATCH
J2-23
J3-28
DRIVER
J3-26
+24VR
+24VR
+24V
J5-8
J4-7
PREP SW **
J4-8
X-RAY SW **
J5-5
J4-10 ON SW ***
J4-11 OFF SW ***
J4-9
+24VR
**
R14
+24VR
J5-7
J5-2
J4-12 COMMON***
J4-3
J3-36
U12
FROM J4
GENERATOR
INTERFACE
BOARD
J5-3
*
*
*
*
J4-4
J2-2
R15
ADDRESS DECODER
CIRCUITS
(U1, U2, U9, U10C)
J2-8
R12
J1-9
BUFFER
J1-21
R1
U3
J1-23
U11
R2
U4
4
FROM
PAGE 1
R3
Q3
J3-47
U5
4
J2-16
J2-22
D2
J3-41
J3-39
SW1
J3-37
J3-38
BUFFER
J3-40
J3-42
R4
U6
U7
4
R5
J3-44
R6
+15V
J3-46
U8
4
J6-1
J2-15
+24VR
J6-2
J3-45
R16
J3-43
J6-3
J2-24
J6-4
J3-48
J1-22
J6-6
J2-21
J1-20
J6-7
J6-8
J6-11
+15V
J6-12
J6-9
J7-2
J6-10
J7-3
J7-1
J7-4
U18
U19
DATA
LATCH
DRIVER
TO X-RAY
MINI-CONSOLE.
(SHEET 5)
J7-5
J6-13
TO MINI-CONSOLE X-RAY
EXPOSURE INDICATOR.
(SHEET 5)
J6-5
J6-14
J7-7
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
KVR
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
DATE
16 MAY 2000
17 MAY 2000
17 MAY 2000
DIGITAL
INTERFACE
MD-0767 REV D
SHEET 4 OF 9
P1-1
P1-2
DS1
DS2
RAD
EXP
FLUORO
EXP
DS3
PREP
DS4
PWR
ON
LS1
LS2
P1-4
P1-6
P1-3
P1-5
P1-7
FROM J6
(SHEET 4)
P1-8
P1-9
P1-10
ON
OFF
P1-13
P1-11
E1
E2
P1-12
HAND
SWITCH
PREP
X-RAY
E3
P1-14
J3-2
J3-3
DS1
RAD
EXP
DS2
FLUORO
EXP
LS1
FROM J7
(SHEET 4)
LS2
J3-1
J3-5
J3-7
J3-4
THE OPTIONAL X-RAY MINI CONSOLE AND OPTIONAL MINI CONSOLE X-RAY EXPOSURE INDICATOR
ARE TYPICALLY USED WITH DIGITAL IMAGING SYSTEMS THAT HAVE INTEGRATED GENERATOR
CONSOLE CONTROL FUNCTIONS.
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
KVR
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
DATE
16 MAY 2000
17 MAY 2000
17 MAY 2000
DIGITAL
INTERFACE
MD-0767 REV D
SHEET 5 OF 9
+24V
+15V
J1-11
U12
J1-13
+5 V
REGULATOR
J1-17
F1
+5V(A)
+24V
+15V
J1-1
GENERATOR
READY
J1-3
U4
U6
J1-6
J1-7
J1-8
EXPOSURE IN
PROCESS (EIP)
R2
DATA
LATCH
DS3
DRIVER
R1
J1-10
J1-12
J1-18
DS2
U10
J2-11
R7
U8
J2-15
J2-4
J3-1
U16
J2-5
J3-4
J2-6
J3-3
U14
J1-9
J1-23
X-RAY
J1-14
J1-21
R9
J1-16
J2-22
J2-13
+24V
R8
FROM
PAGE 1
ADDRESS DECODER
CIRCUITS
(U1, U2, U3A, U5A)
+15V
U7
DS4
J1-5
J2-8
J1-2
J1-4
J2-14
J2-21
R6
+5V
J2-16
J3-10
BUFFER
J2-18
J3-11
U15
+5V(A)
U9
SW1
EXPOSE
RDY
U11
+24V
BUFFER
R3
DS1
R4
R5
J2-17
J2-19
J3-12
DS5
U13
4
J2-9
J2-12
PREP
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
KVR
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
DATE
16 MAY 2000
17 MAY 2000
17 MAY 2000
DIGITAL
INTERFACE
MD-0767 REV D
SHEET 6 OF 9
+24V
F1
+5V
+15V
+24V
J2-13
J2-7
J2-8
J1-11
J2-9
J1-13
J2-12
J1-17
J2-5
J4-3
J2-6
J4-2
J2-20
+15V
1
U10
J1-1
U6
J1-2
DS3
U4
J1-3
R1
J1-4
J1-5
J1-6
FROM
PAGE 1
J1-7
J1-8
J4-5
ADDRESS DECODER
CIRCUITS
(U1, U2, U3A, U5A)
DS4
2
R7
2
R8
J1-12
J2-23
+15V
U14
DS8
J1-10
J2-21
+15V
U13
DS7
DRIVER
J2-22
+15V
U7
R2
DATA
LATCH
J2-24
+15V
U15
DS9
J2-1
J3-2
R9
J1-16
J1-18
9
10
12
13
11
U3D
U3C
J2-2
J3-1
J2-3
J1-19
J3-4
J2-4
J3-5
DS9 X-RAY ON
J2-11
J3-6
U8
J2-15
J3-8
J1-9
J1-21
J1-23
J2-16
BUFFER
J3-7
J2-17
J3-12
U9
J2-18
SW1
J3-11
+24V
5
BUFFER
J3-10
U11
+24V
5
J2-19
DS5
R3
R4
U12
DS6
R5
R6
J2-10
BUCKY IN MOTION
J2-25
SPARE INPUT
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
KVR
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
DATE
16 MAY 2000
17 MAY 2000
17 MAY 2000
DIGITAL
INTERFACE
MD-0767 REV D
SHEET 7 OF 9
U1
+24V
U12
RATE 0
J1-11
DS38
J1-13
DRIVER
J1-17
J2-8
RATE 1
DS40
RATE 2
DS41
DS43
*
U11
-15V
J1-1
SPARE I/P
J1-2
J1-3
J3-1
+24V
J2-22
J2-13
J3-2
J2-23
J2-1
J3-3
J3-8
J2-2
J3-4
J3-27
J2-3
J3-5
J3-9
J2-4
J3-6
J3-28
J2-5
J3-7
J3-10
J2-6
J3-8
J3-29
J2-7
J3-9
J3-31
J2-8
J3-10
J2-9
J3-20
U9
DS45
DRIVER
J3-17
J2-9
RATE 3
J1-15
DS16
J2-17
SELECT TOMO
DS18
J2-4
DRIVER
J2-16
SPARE INPUT 1
DS20
J2-3
SPARE INPUT 2
DS21
MAG MODE 0
MAG MODE 1 *
J2-15
DS22
MAG MODE 2 *
J2-2
DS23
J2-14
DS24
J2-1
J1-4
J1-5
FLUORO
REQUEST
J1-6
J1-7
CPLD
J1-8
DS29
DS27
U10
J1-12
DS25
J1-18
DS37
DS36
*
J2-5
DS26
DS28
DS30
SELECT CINE *
FROM
PAGE 1
J2-6
SELECT HCF
J2-7
TABLE STEP
REQUEST
DS34
DS6
DS4
R77
DRIVER
DS46
J3-21
J3-23
J2-11
J3-22
J3-4
J2-12
J3-23
J2-14
J3-24
J2-15
J3-25
J3-22
J3-3
J3-21
J3-2
J3-20
DS3
DS19
*
J3-5
J3-24
J3-26
J2-17
J3-27
J2-18
J3-28
J2-19
J3-29
J2-20
J3-30
J2-21
J3-31
J2-22
J3-32
J2-23
J3-33
J2-25
J3-25
DS7
J2-16
J2-24
J3-6
J3-7
D3
DS17
DS14
DRIVER
R72
DS13
*
Q1
DS11
DS8
U2
U17
R78
J2-10
J3-1
J2-20
SPARE O/P 4
SPARE O/P 3
SPARE O/P 2
SPARE O/P 1
TABLE TUBE SELECT
GENERATOR READY
X-RAY ON
J2-19
DS32
+24V
+24V
DRIVER
J2-18
U3
DS39
DRIVER
J1-22
DS35
STEP TABLE
J1-10
J1-19
DS33
DS31
J3-16
F1
J2-21
DS10
J3-26
DS12
J3-34
J3-35
J3-36
J2
J3-37
TABLE FLUORO
REQUEST
U15
READY ACQUIRE
FLUORO
-3
J3
J2
2
-1
4
-2
J2
-3
-3
J3
J2
J3
U6
-15V
TABLE X-RAY
REQUEST
DS44
U4
DS9
D2
DS2
R63
J1-20
D1
-1
1
-1
+15V
DS42
U13
READY ACQUIRE
RAD/CINE/HCF
DS15
U8
TABLE PREP
REQUEST
R30
+24V
K1
J1-14
J1-9
U5
J1-21
U7
4
J1-23
R17
U16
4
R25
U14
4
R69
R68
24V FROM
ROOM INTERFACE
J5-1
J5-3
J3-18
J3-19
* DUE TO SPACE RESTRICTIONS, SERIES RESISTORS ARE NOT SHOWN FOR THE INDICATED LEDS
REFER TO THE DIGITAL IMAGING SUPPLEMENT IN THE SERVICE MANUAL
FOR DETAILS REGARDING THE CONNECTIONS TO J2, J3.
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
KVR
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
DATE
16 MAY 2000
17 MAY 2000
17 MAY 2000
DIGITAL
INTERFACE
MD-0767 REV D
SHEET 8 OF 9
+5V
+15V
+24V
J1-11
+5V
J1-13
+15V
DS1
J1-17
R10
J1-19
J7-2
XRAY ON
12 U3D 11
13
U7
MONOSTABLE
TIMER
4
5
U3B
9
10
U3C
J7-3
U10
4
J2-20 (-)
J2-19 (+)
DRIVER
+15V
J6-1
J7-1
J6-2
J7-4
J6-5
J7-5
J6-14
J7-7
U17
U18
J6-3
J1-1
J6-4
J1-2
J6-6
J1-3
J1-4
DATA
LATCH
J1-5
J1-6
J1-7
J1-8
J6-7
DRIVER
J6-8
ADDRESS DECODER
CIRCUITS
(U1, U2, U3A, U5)
J4-10
J6-9
J1-10
J1-16
J1-18
DATA
LATCH
U11
R8
XRAY
DS4
DRIVER
DRIVER
J2-14 (-)
DS2 PREP
4
U14
GENRDY
R9
U8
R7
J1-21
DS3
DS5 *
DRIVER
DRIVER
J2-15 (+)
J2-16 (-)
J2-21 (+)
J2-22 (-)
J2-1 (+)
U15
BUFFER
DRIVER
SW1
J4-1
J4-2
J5-7
J4-5
J5-8
+5V
R11
R12
XRAYEN
Q1
* THE INPUTS / OUTPUTS MARKED * ARE SPARE, AND HAVE NOT BEEN ASSIGNED
J4-9
J5-2
DS7
DS6 *
J6-13
J4-3
J4-4
+5V
R5
BUFFER
J6-12
J5-3
J2-2 (-)
U9
J4-8
J4-12
U12
J4-7
J6-11
J2-13 (+)
J1-9
J1-23
J2-18 (-)
DATA
LATCH
J6-10
J2-17 (+)
R6
FROM
PAGE 1
U6
J4-11
U13
U4
R4
J1-12
J2-25 (+)
J5-5
U16
J2-26 (-)
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
KVR
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
DATE
16 MAY 2000
17 MAY 2000
17 MAY 2000
DIGITAL
INTERFACE
MD-0767 REV D
SHEET 9 OF 9
+15V
Q6
+15V
Q5
+5V
J2-1
R2
Q4
+5V
R31
Q3
DS1
J2-2
+5V
U1
U2
RN12C
RS-232
TRANSMITTER /
RECEIVER
UART
RN12A
RN12B
J2-2
J1-2
J2-3
J1-3
J2-7
J1-7
J2-5
J1-5
R7
U5
J2-5
J2-8
J2-9
RS-422
DRIVER
RS-232
TRANSMITTER /
RECEIVER
MICROCONTROLLER
+5V
SWITCHED +15V
TEST +15V
TEST +15V
+ DOSE
DAP
CHAMBER
#1
- DOSE
OPTO
RELAY
GROUND
GROUND
R9
U38
J2-4
DAP
CHANNEL 1
DS3
R69
R71
DS29
U31
J2-3
+5V
R5
+5V
DS32
J2-7
R8
+5V
J2-6
R10
Q1
R11
DATA BUS
D0..D7
D2
+15V
Q8
+15V
Q7
J3-1
Q10
J3-6
R44
Q9
TP2
+5V
TP3
TB8
3
4
5
J4-1
J3-8
J3-9
RS-422
DRIVER
+5V
1
2
U6
J3-5
TEST +15V
TEST +15V
+ DOSE
- DOSE
OPTO
DAP
CHAMBER
#2
RELAY
GROUND
GROUND
R15
TB7
R45
+5V
J3-4
DAP
CHANNEL 2
DS2
J4-2
J3-3
R5
+5V
R26
R25
J3-2
+5V
R14
+15V
R13
24 VDC
J3-7
SWITCHED +15V
R16
TP1
Q2
R17
3
4
5
D3
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
M. LODER
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
DATE
16 JULY 2001
DAP
21 AUG 2001
28 AUG 2001
MD-0828 REV B
SHEET 1 OF 1
+5V
*
FOR RS-232: U1, U2, AND R16 ARE NOT FITTED.
FOR RS-422: U12, RN3C, RN3D, RN3A, AND RN3B
ARE NOT FITTED.
+5V
DS3
DS1
TXD
J5-1
J7-7
RXD (RS-232)
*
14 RN3C 3
15
J4-2
J11-18
J7-18
CTS (RS-232)
*
13 RN3D 4
13
* RN3A
14
* RN3B
12
J5-4
J4-4
J11-6
J7-6
TXD (RS-232)
J5-5
J4-5
J11-17
J7-17
RTS (RS-232)
J5-3
+5V
TP3
TXD- (RS-422)
J11-10
J7-10
TXD+ (RS-422)
C40
Y2
RXD
U23
J11-13
J7-13
RXD- (RS-422)
J11-12
J7-12
RXD+ (RS-422)
J11-9
J7-9
R122
14
J16-1
CPU
C35
* U1
11
12
13
R123
R124
FROM
RAD-ONLY
CONSOLE
(PAGE 2)
RS-422
I/P
* R16
+5V
J16-2
J16-3
J1
RS-232
3
7
J6-1
2
J6-2
+5V
RS-422 4
O/P
ALTERNATE
CONSOLE
CONNECTIONS
+5V
14
6 RN12F 11
12
7 RN12G 10
15
8 RN12H 9
13
DS43
J2
RS-232
(LAPTOP)
R116
R117
RXD
U27
14
R126
10
R127
12
13
R128
R129
11
DATA BUS
D0..D7
J2
RS-232
7
3
TXD
2
RTS
8
RXD
CTS
RXD
TXD
U38
1 RN12A 16
14
2 RN12B 15
12
3 RN12C 14
15
4 RN12D 13
13
U31
+5V
DS32
DS29
RXD
TXD
R71
-12V
J6-4
TXD
DS43
+5V
RS-232
J6-3
DS44
DS44
U42
5 RN12E 12
+5V
R98
TXD
R115
U18
J7-11
DS42
R114
R101
DS41
J11-11
DUART
DUART
R69
1 Hz
* U2
R93
+5V
J4-3
RS-232
R72
DS40
U20
J11-7
15
+5V
U12
J4-1
16
R15
RXD
R18
CONSOLE
CABLE
RS-232
DATA BUS
D0..D7
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
J. BARNES
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
DATE
13 DEC 2001
9 JAN 2002
9 JAN 2002
SERIAL
COMMUNICATIONS
MD-0829 REV D
SHEET 1 OF 3
*
FOR RS-232: U5, U9, JP2, AND R6 ARE NOT FITTED.
FOR RS-422: U6, RN4A, RN4C, RN4D AND R7 ARE
NOT FITTED.
DS16
+5V
TXD
J5-4
1 RS-422
I/P
7
J5-5
D3
2
8
J5-3
RN2B
R5
Q3
* U6
7
14
*RN4A
3 RN18B 4
14
5 RN18C 6
12
7 RN18D 8
15
1 RN18A 2
13
8 RN17D 7
10
5 RN17C 6
11
J15
11
TP5
RXD
TXD
R65
TXD
RN16B
RXD
RN16A
DS48
U50
TO GENERATOR
INTERFACE
BOARD (PG 1)
RXD
1 Hz
U23
*JP2
R6
RN2A
+5V
Q4
DS46
RN16D
J16
R94
D4
DS45
J5-2
* U5
+5V
TP1
+5V
DS47
RN16C
J5-1
6
4 RS-422
O/P
7
D6
+5V
1 Hz
* U9
+5V
+5V
U28
CPU
RS-232
-12V
2
DATA BUS
D0..D7
8
*
6 RN4C 5
*RN4D
R7
RS-232
+5V
-12V
+5V
DS1
U17
DS2
DS3
TXD
RXD
R10
+5V
TP1
1 Hz
+5V
R20
CPU
13
R19
12
D2
TXD
Q1
Q2
U20
11
14
6 RN1C 5
10
4 RN1B 3
12
13
2 RN1A 1
8 RN1D 7
DATA BUS
D0..D7
RS-232
TP10
J8-1
J16-1
R24
J8-2
J16-2
TXD
RTS
RXD
CTS
+5V
+5V
J8-3
J16-3
DS5
DS4
TXD
RXD
RS-232
J4
U11
R25
R26
R27
R28
DATA BUS
D0..D7
TO GENERATOR
INTERFACE
BOARD (PG 1)
RS-232
(LAPTOP)
TP11
R23
CPU
R21
RN2C
RXD
J2
R22
D1
U8
RS-232
(LAPTOP)
RN2D
+5V
RS-232
TXD
RTS
RXD
CTS
5
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
J. BARNES
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
DATE
13 DEC 2001
9 JAN 2002
9 JAN 2002
SERIAL
COMMUNICATIONS
MD-0829 REV D
SHEET 2 OF 3
+5V
*
FOR RS-232: U1, U2, AND R8 ARE NOT FITTED.
FOR RS-422: U12, RN4C, RN4D, RN4A, AND RN4B
ARE NOT FITTED.
DS2
J4-1
J11-7
J7-7
RXD (RS-232)
*
14 RN4C 3
13
12
4 RS-422
O/P
7
J5-2
J4-2
J11-18
J7-18
CTS (RS-232)
*
13 RN4D 4
* RN4A
14
11
* RN4B
10
+5V
D4
15
6
J5-4
J4-4
J11-6
J7-6
TXD (RS-232)
1 RS-422
I/P
7
J5-5
J4-5
J11-17
J7-17
RTS (RS-232)
* U2
RXD
*JP2
J5-3
J4-3
RN2B
Q4
R6
+5V
D3
J11-11
J7-11
TXD- (RS-422)
J11-10
J7-10
TXD+ (RS-422)
* RN4B
J7-13
RXD- (RS-422)
J11-12
J7-12
RXD+ (RS-422)
J11-9
J7-9
10
12
13
*
6 RN4C 5
*
8 RN4D 7
R7
3
7
J6-1
2
J6-2
C35
ALTERNATE
CONSOLE
CONNECTIONS
11
6 RN13F 11
10
7 RN13G 10
13
12
8 RN13H 9
9
RS-232
14
6 RN1C 5
4 RN1B 3
13
2 RN1A 1
8 RN1D 7
Q12
R1
U29
+5V
+5V
DS31 TXD
DS35 RXD
DUART
TXD
RTS
RXD
CTS
Q9
U39
1 RN13A 16
14
11
2 RN13B 15
10
3 RN13C 14
13
12
4 RN13D 13
R65
RN2D
Q2
J2
J2
U20
12
DATA BUS
D0..D7
RS-232
Q8
RS-232
(LAPTOP)
10
DS48 RXD
-12V
J6-4
TXD
RN2C
14
J6-3
D2
Q1
DS47 TXD
U43
5 RN13E 12
+5V
11
+5V
Q11
-12V
Y2
+5V
DUART
R8
J1
RS-232
D1
RS-422
I/P
R64
14
J11-13
R48
* RN4A
C30
R63
11
RXD
C39
* U1
R66
U25
DUART
Y1
* U6
+5V
RS-422 4
O/P
Q3
C41
RS-232
R47
RN2A
TXD
U24
J5-1
16
TXD
Q2
U12
* U5
DS1
RXD
Q1
* U9
+5V
R15
CONSOLE
CABLE
*
FOR RS-232: U9, U5, JP2, AND R6 ARE NOT FITTED.
FOR RS-422: U6, RN4A, RN4B, RN4C, RN4D, AND R7
ARE NOT FITTED.
RS-232
5
GENERATOR INTERFACE
BOARD
DATA BUS
D0..D7
-12V
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
J. BARNES
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
DATE
13 DEC 2001
9 JAN 2002
9 JAN 2002
SERIAL
COMMUNICATIONS
MD-0829 REV D
SHEET 3 OF 3
1
REVISIONS
NOTES:
ZONE
LTR
DESCRIPTION
DWN
CHKD
APPROVED
DATE
Emir
S.C
Emir
Emir
G.SANWALD
27SEP94
Emir
Emir
G.SANWALD
27SEP94
Emir
Emir
G.SANWALD
20OCT94
Emir
Emir
M.PHILLIPS
10DEC96
Emir
Emir
Emir
Emir
Emir
Emir
J.C.
01SEP94
J7
1
2
3
4
R7
R8
R9
R17
R18
1M
1M
1M
1M
1M
S.CARTWRIGHT
D.YAKE
S.CARTWRIGHT
20JUN97
26JUN97
28FEB00
-1000V
R48
100K
TP4
J1
R49
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
100K
+12V
-12V
-24V
D11
C4
T1
C9
R1
1K
C8
5
1N3070
TP5
C15
.01
E2
START (1)
L (1)
N (1)
R (1)
SIG (1)
D6
.01
600V
L1
D5
D4
.01
600V
D3
D2
.01
600V
D1
2
23 uH
6
C3
C2
C1
.01
600V
.01
600V
.01
600V
C18
C20
C22
+300V
4
C24
C25
+500V
C5
E3
.01
200V
D12
1 uF
D13
D14
.01
200V
D15
D16
.01
200V
D17
D18
.01
200V
D19
.01
200V
D20
C14
C17
C19
C21
C23
.01
200V
.01
200V
.01
200V
.01
200V
.01
200V
D21
+50V
R44
100K
R45
J2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
100K
C
START (2)
L (2)
N (2)
R (2)
SIG (2)
J6
1 1 1 1 1 9 7 5 3 1
9 7 5 3 1
2 1 1 1 1 1
0 8 6 4 2 0 8 6 4 2
+12V
TP1
C16
R39
100K
R47
R46
R43
R42
R41
R36
R35
R34
R26
R22
1M
1M
1M
1M
1M
1M
1M
1M
1M
1M
C7
10
6.8nF
R23
C6
1
R30
R11
J3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
100K
R40
R27
90.9K
100K
R13
10K
C12
.01
-12V
R33
10K
220
220
D7
D9
Q3
Q1
TP2
6
5
U1B
LF353N
START (3)
L (3)
N (3)
R (3)
SIG (3)
+12V
C27
0.1
U3
2
1
3
C10
.01
R28
49K9
8
R21
1K
+12V
+V
-V
SYNC
CT
RT
DISC
CSS
COMP
SD
VREF
R20
1K
C26
10
OSC
OUTA
OUTB
R31
R32
475K
5
6
7
9
10
16
R29
R25
E2
E3
2.74K
22
Q2
C13
2.2nF
Q4
R14
R12
4
11
14
220
220
D8
D10
SG3525
121K
U2A
14016
2
TP3
R10
20K
R19
20K
R24
20K
SPARE
R16
1K
1
3
U2D
14016
R37
R15
10K
C11
.01
R6
10
100K
J4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
R4
10
R3
10
R5
10
-24V
100K
-12V
+12V
U2C
14016
J5
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
START (4)
L (4)
N (4)
R (4)
SIG (4)
U2B
14016
LF353N
R38
U1A
11
10
4
+12V
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
1
2
DRAWN
HIGHEST REFERENCE
DESIGNATIONS
Emir
07SEP94
Emir
27SEP94
CHECKED
C27, D21, J7, Q4, R49
APPROVAL
DATE
TP4, T1, U3
SCHEMATIC
ENGINEER
J.CUNNINGHAM
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
27SEP94
DES/MFG AUTH.
S.CARTWRIGHT
REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS
NOT USED
NEXT ASSY
COMPUTER GENERATED
6
SIZE
CONTRACT No.
728399
MANUALS
CAGE CODE
DWG NO
02845
REV
728401
USED ON
February 28, 2000
INTERFACE
-----------------------
R2
27SEP94
SCALE
2
NTS
SHEET
LEVEL 3
1
1 OF 1